JP6983972B1 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To adjust the interests of a player and a playground with respect to setting suggestion without impairing fairness and the like. SOLUTION: It is possible to make a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting, and it is possible to count the total number of games of the gaming machine from a predetermined reference time and the number of consecutive elapsed games by one player in the gaming machine. , The execution probability of the setting suggestion effect can be changed according to the total number of games and the number of elapsed games. Even if the total number of games is the same, the probability of executing the setting suggestion effect is higher when the number of elapsed games is large than when the total number of games is small. When the total number of games approaches the predetermined upper limit, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when it is far, and the predetermined upper limit can be changed by the game hall staff. [Selection diagram] FIG. 63.

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine.

In the conventional gaming machine, as a measure against dust in the hopper device for paying out medals inside the housing, Patent Document 1 is provided with a hole for removing dust in the support plate of the rotating plate for sending out medals inside the hopper device. Proposed in.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-10721

However, in such a gaming machine, foreign matter such as dust discharged from the dust removing hole of the hopper device is electrically collected or diffused on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the housing in which the hopper device is installed. There was a problem that it could cause troubles.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing foreign matter such as dust discharged from a dust removing hole of a hopper device from diffusing. The purpose.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A bucket that can store game media (for example, bucket 802) and
A rotating member (for example, a medal disc 831) that receives and sequentially conveys the game medium stored in the bucket.
A motor that rotates the rotating member (for example, a motor 833b) and
A mounting plate on which the rotating member is mounted (for example, a mounting plate 834) and
It has a base member (for example, a base member 804) that supports the bucket and the above-mentioned mounting plate and is detachably attached to the housing of the gaming machine.
A gaming machine provided with a hopper device (for example, a hopper device 800) that discharges the game medium from a payout port to the outside by rotating the rotating member.
The above-mentioned mounting plate is formed with a through hole (for example, a through hole 834a) that penetrates the mounting surface on which the rotating member is placed and the back surface of the above-mentioned mounting plate.
The hopper device is
A foreign matter recovery case (for example, a foreign matter recovery case 805) installed so as to face the bottom of the base member.
Further has a substrate (for example, a drive substrate 851) involved in driving the motor, and further comprises.
The foreign matter recovery case is provided with a substrate case (for example, a substrate case 850) for accommodating the substrate.
The substrate case has a plurality of protrusions (for example, protrusions 850 g) on the inner surface of the peripheral wall.
By placing the substrate on the plurality of protrusions, the substrate is held by the substrate case at a predetermined height position from the bottom surface of the substrate case.
In the substrate case, the upper opening is closed by a cover member, and the substrate case is closed.
The cover member is
A flat plate portion (for example, a flat plate portion 853) covering the upper opening of the substrate case and
It has an inner wall portion (for example, inner wall portions 852a, 852b, 852c, 852d) formed so as to project downward from the lower surface of the flat plate portion.
The inner wall portion is configured to be located inside the inner surface of the substrate case.
The substrate is placed on the plurality of protrusions, and its movement in the vertical direction is restricted by the lower end of the inner wall portion.
A recess (for example, an opening 850f) for connecting a connector of the substrate is provided on a part of the peripheral wall of the substrate case.
The flat plate portion of the cover member is provided with a canopy portion (for example, a canopy portion 854) protruding outward from the upper portion of the recess for connecting the connector.
The recess for connecting the connector is provided on the peripheral wall of the substrate case, which is opposite to the peripheral wall located on the lower side of the through hole.
The cover member is provided with a hook piece (for example, hook piece 855) for restraining the harness connected to the connector of the board.
The foreign matter collecting case is provided with guide pieces (for example, guide pieces 856) at predetermined intervals with respect to the hook pieces.
A gaming machine characterized in that the hook piece is integrally formed with the flat plate portion of the cover member.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust discharged from the dust removing hole of the hopper device from diffusing.

It is a figure which shows the external structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment, stop operation mode, display combination and the like. It is a figure for demonstrating the limit processing of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the winning flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the carry-over combination storage area of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game state flag storage area of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the mode flag storage area of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the operation stop button storage area of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the pressing order storage area of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on processing which is executed by the main control circuit of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance / start check process executed by the main control circuit of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery processing which is executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game start state state control process which is executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of the game start in advantageous section executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control process which is executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state control process at the end of a game which is executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the end of a game in an advantageous section executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the periodic interrupt process executed by the main control circuit of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the medalless gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the main control board of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control circuit of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the latch signal generation circuit of the main control circuit of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game when the game is started from the state which the start lever is off in the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game when the re-game is started from the state which the start lever is off in the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game when the game is started from the state which the start lever is on in the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game when the re-game is started from the state which the start lever is on in the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the main control circuit of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows a part of the external structure suitable for the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game when the game is started from the state which the start lever is on in the modification of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game when the re-game is started from the state which the start lever is on in the modification of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the main control circuit in the modification of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the external structure of the 3rd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a front view which shows the external structure of the 3rd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a front view of the state which the front door of the 3rd game machine which concerns on this embodiment is removed. It is a figure which shows the holding structure of the main control board case of the 3rd game machine which concerns on this embodiment, (A) is the figure which shows before the protection member attached to the cabinet, (B) is the figure which shows the protection. It is a figure which shows after the member is attached to the cabinet, and is the figure which shows the state which the main control board case is attached to the protective member via a bracket. It is a figure which shows the main control board case of the 3rd game machine which concerns on this embodiment, (A) is the front view of the main control board case, (B) is the back view of the main control board case. be. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the holding structure of the main control board case of the 3rd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the selector of the 3rd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a front view of the state in which the sub-plate of the selector of the third gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment is removed. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the selector of the 3rd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment, (A) is the cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 54, (B) is BB of FIG. 54. It is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow. It is an exploded perspective view of the hopper device of the 3rd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the foreign matter recovery case of the 3rd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a top view of the state in which the cover member and the drive board of the foreign matter recovery case of the 3rd game machine which concerns on this embodiment are removed. It is a top view of the cover member of the 3rd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a side view of the cover member of the 3rd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of [the specification of the 3rd interface board IF3 for a test machine]. [Suggestion of setting using the number of elapsed games and the total number of games] It is an explanatory diagram of the hall menu screen displayed in the modified example. It is an execution probability table of the same setting suggestion effect. [Suggestion of setting with a roll corresponding to a character customized by Unimemo] It is an explanatory diagram of the design arrangement of reels and the configuration (1/3) of the internal winning combination in the modified example. It is explanatory drawing of the structure (2/3) of the same internal winning combination. It is explanatory drawing of the structure (3/3) of the same internal winning combination. It is a transition diagram of the same game state. It is explanatory drawing of the difference of the navigation with and without uni-memo in the same AT. It is an internal winning table according to the same game state. It is explanatory drawing of the game history screen. [Countermeasures against light leakage in the rear-projection movable screen] It is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism part in the modification. It is a screen rear view explaining the pasting of the screen sheet. It is a group drawing seen from the back of the screen. It is a group drawing seen from the front of the screen. It is sectional drawing of the screen. It is an enlarged sectional view of the main part of the screen. It is an assembly drawing of the screen. It is a completed drawing of the screen. It is an enlarged perspective view seen from the top of the gear part. It is an enlarged perspective view seen from the bottom of the same gear part. It is a figure explaining the combination of the screen and a gear part. It is a figure explaining the posture change of the screen. It is a figure explaining another embodiment of the screen.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine.

[1. Structure of pachislot machine]
First, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Note that FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, for convenience of explanation, a part of the internal structure may be described in the following description of the external structure, and a part of the external structure may be described in the description of the internal structure.

[1-1. External structure]
[1-1-1. Housing]
The pachi-slot machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. Further, the housing 2 is arranged in a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the main body of the gaming machine, an upper door mechanism UD arranged in the upper part of the front surface of the cabinet G, and a lower part of the front surface of the cabinet G. It also has a lower door mechanism DD.

The cabinet G has an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a back wall G3, an upper surface wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. In FIGS. 1 and 2, the back wall G3 and the bottom wall G5 are not shown. Further, the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G is formed with two openings G4a penetrating in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. Then, a wooden plate member G4b is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G4a.

The plate member G4b is used to fix the pachi-slot machine 1 to a game island (not shown) when the pachi-slot machine 1 is installed in a game store, but as long as such a fixing method is secured, a metal material or a resin material is used. It can be configured with, or it can be integrally formed with the upper surface wall G4. Further, as long as a certain strength is secured for the cabinet G, a part or all of each constituent member may be made of wood or a resin material.

Further, in the cabinet G, an upper opening G101 that opens forward is formed on the upper side of the intermediate support plate G1, and a lower opening G101 that opens forward on the lower side of the intermediate support plate G1. A side opening G102 is formed. That is, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space with the intermediate support plate G1 interposed therebetween, and the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate for partitioning the inside of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. There is. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the main display device 210 and the like, which will be described later. Further, the lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the reel unit RU, the main control board 71, and the like, which will be described later.

The cabinet G does not necessarily have to include the intermediate support plate G1. That is, as long as each device or the like is appropriately accommodated in the cabinet G, the upper space and the lower space may not be partitioned. Further, the cabinet G can be simply referred to as a "box body" or a "main body", and since it functions as a frame body for supporting or fixing the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, the "main body frame" and "main body" are used. It may also be referred to as a "support", a "support frame", a "fixed frame", or the like.

[1-1-2. Front door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and are provided so as to be able to close the upper space and the lower space of the opening in the cabinet G. That is, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as a front door (front door) provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, each of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD is attached to the cabinet G so as to be openable and closable by, for example, an opening / closing mechanism (not shown) such as a hinge provided on the left side wall G2. One of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be opened and closed by the above-mentioned opening / closing mechanism, and the other can be attached / detached only when one of the door mechanisms is opened. You can also do it.

The upper door mechanism UD has an effect display window UD1 provided at the center thereof and an upper lamp 23 provided above the effect display window UD1. The effect display window UD1 is configured as, for example, a transparent panel made of resin, and the effect image displayed on the screen device C constituting the main display device 210 described later provided on the back side thereof can be visually recognized. In the present embodiment, the main display device 210 that displays the effect via the effect display window UD1 may be described as the main effect display unit 21.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 provided in a substantially central portion of the upper portion thereof, and a reel unit RU on the back side of the main display window 4 and mounted on the inner side of the cabinet G. There is.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is composed of, for example, a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent reel band mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body, and a plurality of reel bands (for example, 20) are included in the reel band. The symbols (pieces) are drawn at predetermined intervals along the direction of rotation of the reel. Further, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are arranged in a parallel state (horizontally in a row) so that each of them can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. The main display window 4 is configured as, for example, a transparent panel made of resin, and at least a part (for example, three) of the symbols on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R can be visually recognized. Further, inside each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, a light source (reel lamp included in the lamps / LEDs described later) is provided at least at a position where the design can be visually recognized from the main display window 4, and at least each reel 3L, When the 3C and 3R are rotating, the visibility of the design is ensured by illuminating them from the inside with a constant brightness.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has a sub effect display unit 22 provided on the left side of the main display window 4 and an effect button 10b provided on the right side of the main display window 4. The sub-effect display unit 22 displays the effect image displayed on the sub-display device 220, which will be described later. The sub-effect display unit 22 can be configured as a touch panel to function not only as a function for displaying the effect but also as one of the buttons for effect. The effect button 10b is an operation unit that receives a player's effect operation (effect operation).

Further, the lower door mechanism DD is provided in a substantially horizontal pedestal portion formed below the main display window 4, a MAX bet button 6a, a 1-bet button 6b, a settlement button 9 provided on the left side, and a substantially central portion. It has an effect button 10a provided and a medal insertion slot 5 provided on the right side.

The MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b are player's game operations (bet operation, "insertion operation" and "hanging operation") for using the medals deposited (credited) inside the pachi-slot machine 1. It is also an operation unit that accepts). When the MAX bet button 6a is operated, if the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets (for example, 3) and the number of medals credited is equal to or greater than the difference, the maximum number of medals is bet. To. On the other hand, if there are no more credited medals than the difference, the medals will not be bet. Further, when the 1-bet button 6b is operated, the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, and if there is one or more credited medals, one medal is bet.

The settlement button 9 is an operation unit that accepts a player's game operation (settlement operation) for returning (settlement) a credited medal. If the checkout button 9 is operated without any credited medals, the medals to be inserted or paid out will be credited within the range of creditable medals (for example, 50). It may be possible to accept a player's game operation (C / P mode selection operation) for selecting either a mode (C mode) or a pay mode (P mode) in which the medal is not credited. That is, the settlement button 9 can be made to function as a so-called C / P button. The effect button 10a is an operation unit that receives a player's effect operation (effect operation).

The medal slot 5 receives medals inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The accepted medal is detected by the selector 31 described later, and it is determined whether or not the medal is appropriate. If one received medal is not appropriate, the accepted medal is returned from the medal payout exit 11, which will be described later. Further, if one received medal is appropriate and the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, one medal is bet. If the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets and the number of medals being credited has not reached the creditable number, one medal is credited. On the other hand, when the number of credited medals has reached the creditable number, the accepted medals are returned from the medal payment exit 11 described later.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has an information display unit 14 provided between the main display window 4 and the above-mentioned pedestal unit. The information display unit 14 is configured to include a plurality of lamps (LEDs) and 7-segment LEDs, and displays information about the game depending on the lighting mode thereof.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD is provided below the above-mentioned pedestal portion, with a start lever 7 provided on the left side, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R provided in the substantially central portion, and on the right side. It has a locking mechanism 15. The start lever 7 is an operation unit that is tiltably attached within a predetermined angle range and receives a player's game operation (start operation) for starting the game. Each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and is an operation unit that receives a player's game operation (stop operation) for stopping each rotation.

The locking mechanism 15 is composed of, for example, a key cylinder lock, and when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state, a manager on the game store side (for example, a store clerk of the game store, the same applies hereinafter) has a door key (not shown) in the keyhole. ) Is inserted and turned to the right to unlock and the lower door mechanism DD is opened. The locking mechanism 15 may have a function as a reset switch as well as a function of managing the opening and closing of the door mechanism. For example, when the administrator of the game store turns the door key to the left with the door key inserted in the keyhole, the same reset operation as the reset switch 53 described later may be detectable. Further, in the present embodiment, when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state, the upper door mechanism UD can also be configured to be in the open state in conjunction with this, and the lock corresponding to the upper door mechanism UD can be locked. It is also possible to provide a mechanism separately so that the opening and closing can be controlled independently.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD includes a lumbar panel 13 provided in the central portion of the lower portion thereof, a medal tray 12 provided below the lumbar panel 13, and a medal payout outlet 11 provided above the medal tray 12. , Has sound-transmitting holes 24a and 24b provided on the left and right of the medal payout outlet 11.

The waist panel 13 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information such as a logo representing the model name and a character representing a motif is drawn, and a light source for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side (for lamps and LEDs described later). Consists of a lumbar lamp included). The medal tray 12 stores medals paid out from the medal payout exit 11. The medal payout exit 11 discharges the medals paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 11 include those paid out from the hopper device 32 described later and those returned from the selector 31 described later through a cancel chute (not shown). The sound transmission holes 24a and 24b are on the back side of each, and are output from speakers 35a and 35b (speakers 35a are omitted in FIG. 2) mounted on the inner side of the cabinet G, and sound effects such as sound effects and BGM. Is transmitted toward the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

In the present embodiment, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided corresponding to the partitioning of the inside of the cabinet G into the upper space and the lower space, but the opening in the cabinet G is appropriately provided. As long as it can be opened and closed, it can be configured as a single door mechanism or as three or more door mechanisms. Further, it can be configured as a door mechanism (for example, an outer door and an inner door, etc.) which are doubly configured in the front-rear direction. Further, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be simply referred to as a "door" or a "door", and since they function as a member that can open and close the opening in the cabinet G, the "opening / closing member" and the "door". It can also be referred to as a "member" or a "door member".

[1-1-3. Fluctuation display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a main display window 4. When the start lever 7 is operated (when the start operation is performed by the player), the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start to rotate by the drive control of the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R described later. As a result, the design displayed on the main display window 4 is variablely displayed. Further, in each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, when the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R are operated (when the stop operation is performed by the player), the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R described later are driven and controlled. By doing so, each rotation is stopped. As a result, the symbol displayed on the main display window 4 is stopped and displayed.

That is, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 have a variable display unit (means) capable of variable display (and stop display) of a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, or variable display (and stop display) of a plurality of symbols. ) Configure a plurality of possible variable display units (means). The variable display unit (means) can also be referred to as a "design display unit (means)", a "variable display unit (means)", or the like. Further, the design can also be referred to as a "picture", a "pattern", or the like, and can also be referred to as "identification information" or the like in that sense as long as the information is visually identifiable by the player.

Further, the main display window 4 is configured so that when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, three symbols arranged continuously for each are displayed in the frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one symbol (three in total) in each of the upper, middle, and lower areas in each column (3 rows × 3 columns in the frame of the main display window 4). The design is displayed in the mode of). The main display window 4 may be referred to as a "design display area", a "window portion", or the like.

Further, an effective line is defined in the main display window 4. The valid line is a line for determining whether or not the specified combination of symbols is displayed when the symbols in all the columns are stopped and displayed in response to the player's stop operation. In that sense, the effective line can also be referred to as a "winning line", a "judgment line", or the like. Further, the effective line is configured as a line connecting any of the areas of each column. That is, when the main display window 4 is configured to display a symbol in a mode of 3 rows × 3 columns, it is possible to define a maximum of 27 effective lines. However, in reality, one or more of these lines can be defined as valid lines, and the other lines can be defined as invalid lines that are not valid lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle region of the reel 3L, the middle region of the reel 3C, and the middle region of the reel 3R is a "center line", the upper region of the reel 3L, the upper region of the reel 3C, and the upper region of the reel 3R. The connecting line is the "top line", the lower region of the reel 3L, the lower region of the reel 3C, and the line connecting the lower region of the reel 3R is the "bottom line", the lower region of the reel 3L, the middle region of the reel 3C, and the reel 3R. The line connecting the upper area is called "cross-up line", the line connecting the upper area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called "cross-down line", and these are called "cross down line". Since it is a line connecting each region with a straight line, one or more of these lines are often defined as an effective line. However, as described above, a so-called irregular line connecting each region of each column with a polygonal line can be defined as an effective line.

In addition, in order for the valid line to be activated, it is necessary to bet the number of medals required for this game (the number of cards that can be started) prior to the start operation of the player, but this is valid. The number of valid lines to be converted may be the same regardless of the number of bets, or may vary depending on the number of bets. For example, if the above-mentioned three lines of "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are defined as valid lines, in the former case, the number of bets is any of 1 to 3. Even so, the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" should be enabled. On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only the "center line" is activated, if the number of bets is 2, the "center line" and the "top line" are activated, and the number of bets is 3. If (maximum number of bets), enable "center line", "top line", and "bottom line".

In this embodiment, the variable display unit has three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a main display window 4 capable of displaying three symbols in each column, whereby three rows × 3 Although it was supposed that the symbol was displayed in the mode of the column, the symbol display mode in the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels is 1, 2, or 4 or more, and the number of symbols displayed in each column is 1, 2, or 4 or more, which is different from the above aspect. You can also display the design with. In this case, the number of valid lines that can be defined is also increased or decreased as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display unit is supposed to display the symbol in a variable manner by rotating each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, but the configuration of the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, a configuration using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220 described later may be used, or a configuration using other display devices (for example, an organic EL, a 7-segment LED, etc.) may be used. .. Further, for example, a configuration using another physical device (for example, a belt or the like) may be used. In addition, the arrangement and size of the variable display unit can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display unit functions as a main side display unit directly related to the game, which is controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later, but at the same time, the sub control circuit 200 described later is used. A variable display unit as a sub-side display unit related to an effect not directly related to the game, which is controlled by the game, may be provided. The sub-side display unit may be configured by using, for example, a main display device 210 or a sub-display device 220. That is, a variable display unit that changes and displays the symbol according to the player's start operation (or other start condition is satisfied) and stops and displays the symbol according to the player's stop operation (or other stop condition is satisfied). As a result, not only the main side display unit but also the sub side display unit may be provided. In this case, in order to enable the player to identify whether or not the variable display unit is directly related to the game, characters such as "rotary cylinder" or "main reel" are placed in the vicinity of the main display unit. It suffices to attach an identification display in which is displayed so that it is possible to identify that the variable display unit is the main display unit. It should be noted that such an identification display may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220.

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a medal slot 5 for receiving medals to be inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by a player. Since the medal insertion slot 5 and the selector 31 described later have a function of betting the number of medals required for one game, like the MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b, such an insertion operation is performed. , For example, it can be paraphrased as a betting operation. Therefore, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 5 is a bet operation detecting unit (means) capable of detecting the betting operation of the player. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal slot can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

In the present embodiment, it is described as an example that a medal as a game medium is used as a game value used for a game or given according to a game result, but the game value used in this way is Not limited to this. For example, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be used. Further, the game value may be simply referred to as "value", "game value", or the like.

[1-1-5. Operation unit]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following operation units as operation units that can be operated by the player. It should be noted that each of the operation units shown below is merely an example, and may be configured to include an operation unit different from these, or may be configured not to include an operation unit that is not necessarily essential. ..

[1-1-5-1. Bet button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a MAX bet button 6a and a 1-bet button 6b that accept a player's betting operation for using the (credited) medal deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, such a bet operation is detected by the bet switch 6S described later. Therefore, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1-bet button 6b, and the bet switch 6S constitute a bet operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the bet operation of the player. The bet button may be used as long as it can detect the betting operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be appropriately changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b are provided, but only the MAX bet button 6a may be provided without providing the 1-bet button 6b. Further, a 2-bet button on which two medals are bet may be separately provided.

[1-1-5-2. Start lever]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a start lever 7 that receives a player's start operation for starting the game. Further, such a start operation is detected by the start switch 7S described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S form a start operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the start operation of the player. The start lever only needs to be able to detect the start operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be appropriately changed.

[1-1-5-3. Stop button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and includes each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R for receiving a player's stop operation for stopping each rotation. Further, such a start operation is detected by the stop switch 8S described later. Therefore, each of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R and the stop switch 8S constitutes a stop operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the stop operation of the player. The stop button only needs to be able to detect the player's stop operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-4. Settlement button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a settlement button 9 that accepts a player's settlement operation (return operation) for returning (settlement) a credited medal. Further, such a settlement operation is detected by the settlement switch 9S described later. Therefore, the settlement button 9 and the settlement switch 9S constitute a settlement operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the settlement operation of the player. The settlement button may be used as long as it can detect the settlement operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be appropriately changed.

[1-1-5-5. Button for production]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes effect buttons 10a and 10b for receiving the effect operation of the player. It should be noted that such an effect operation is detected by a detection switch (not shown) provided corresponding to each effect button. Therefore, the effect buttons 10a and 10b and the detection switch constitute an effect operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the effect operation of the player. It should be noted that the effect button only needs to be able to detect the effect operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be appropriately changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the two effect buttons 10a and 10b are provided, but they can be configured without any of them, or only one of them can be provided. can. Further, it can be configured to provide three or more effect buttons.

The main uses of the effect button are to change the effect mode when executing a specific effect (for example, an operation-linked effect described later), to perform a selection / decision operation in a user menu described later, and the like. Therefore, it can be configured to provide an effect button according to the application. For example, in the former use, the effect buttons 10a and 10b are used, and in the latter use, the above-mentioned touch panel may be used. In addition, in order to use it for the latter purpose, it is also possible to provide a jog dial, a cross key, or the like capable of accepting selection / determination operations as another effect button.

[1-1-6. Medal payment exit]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a medal payout outlet 11 for discharging medals to be paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1. In addition, when a prize is generated and the medal is paid out, the medal payout exit 11 grants the medal paid out from the hopper device 32 described later to the player, and thus gives the player a privilege. It can be said that it is a part of the means. In addition, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal payout outlet can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

[1-1-7. Medal tray]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a medal tray 12 for storing medals paid out from the medal payout exit 11. That is, the medal tray 12 constitutes a storage unit (means) capable of storing the given game value. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal tray can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

[1-1-8. Lumbar panel]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information is drawn, and a waist panel 13 composed of a waist lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side. The waist panel 13 basically indicates to the player what kind of model the pachislot machine 1 is, but for example, depending on the lighting mode of the waist lamp or the waist panel 13 itself. Can also be configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing the effect by configuring the image with an image display device or the like.

[1-1-9. Information display unit]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes an information display unit 14 that displays information about the game depending on the lighting mode thereof. That is, the information display unit 14 constitutes an information display unit (means) capable of displaying information related to the game.

The information display unit 14 includes, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet number lamp, a credit lamp, a payout number lamp, an instruction monitor, a limit lamp, and the like.

The insert lamp lights up to indicate that medals can be inserted. When the start lamp lights up, it indicates that the game can be started by operating the start lever 7. The replay lamp lights up to indicate that the medal has been automatically inserted due to the operation of the replay. The bet number lamp lights up to display the number of medals bet. The credit lamp displays the number of medals credited according to the lighting mode. The payout number lamp displays the number of medals paid out (number of payouts) according to the game result depending on the lighting mode.

Further, the instruction monitor includes a notification lamp (stop operation display unit) and a section lamp (status display unit). The notification lamp lights up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified in a situation where the information of the stop operation is notified to the player (for example, AT state), so that the information of the stop operation is notified. Is displayed. The "mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified" is, for example, the push order (in this embodiment, this may be described as "hit order") "1st (first stop operation). When notifying the reel 3L) ”, the numerical value“ 1 ”is displayed on the instruction monitor, and when the push order“ 2nd (performing the first stop operation to the reel 3C) ”is notified. Displays the numerical value "2" on the instruction monitor, and displays the numerical value "3" on the instruction monitor when notifying the push order "3rd (performing the first stop operation on the reel 3R)". That is. The notification lamp does not necessarily have to be provided separately from the credit lamp and the payout number lamp. For example, either the credit lamp or the payout number lamp may be used to display information on the stop operation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, under the situation where the information of the stop operation is notified to the player, the sub-side notification means controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described later (for example, the main effect display unit 21). Not only that, the information of the stop operation is also notified in the instruction monitor as the main side notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later. The mode of notification in the main side notification means and the mode of notification in the sub-side notification means may be different from each other. That is, the main-side notifying means may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", even if the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, there is a possibility that the notification content cannot be specified depending on the player. On the other hand, the sub-side notifying means may directly notify the information of the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", the main effect display unit 21 may directly notify the instruction information for causing the reel 3L to perform the first stop operation.

In addition, the section lamp lights up to indicate that the current state is in the advantageous section described later. For example, when the section lamp shifts from the non-advantageous section described later to the advantageous section, the section lamp lights up at an arbitrary timing until the game of the advantageous section starts, and the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section. At that time, the light is turned off at an arbitrary timing until the game of the non-advantageous section is started. The lighting timing of the section lamp is not limited to this. For example, when shifting from the effect section (normally advantageous section) described later in the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section to the increase section (AT state) described later in the advantageous section for the first time, any game until the game of the increase section is started. It may be turned on at the timing. That is, the section ramp may indicate that the section is in the advantageous section regardless of whether it is the production section or the increase section, or at least the advantageous section including this from the start of the first increase section. It may inform the period until the end of.

Further, the limit lamp indicates that the limit process described later has been executed or the possibility thereof depending on the lighting mode. For example, by turning on the light when the limit process is executed, it is notified to the player that the state advantageous to the player (for example, the AT state) has been forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process. Further, for example, blinking when the execution of the limit processing is near indicates that the advantageous state is likely to be forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit processing. In addition to these, by providing an opportunity to turn on, blink, or turn off, other information regarding limit processing can be appropriately reported.

[1-1-10. Production display section]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a main effect display unit 21 and a sub effect display unit 22 for displaying the effect image. The main effect display unit 21 and the sub effect display unit 22 constitute an effect display unit (means) capable of performing the effect display. In addition, it is configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing the effect from a visual point of view to the player.

The main effect display unit 21 includes a main display device 210 that displays an effect via the effect display window UD1. Further, the main display device 210 includes a display unit A that is replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G, an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display, and irradiation from the irradiation unit B. It is configured as a so-called projection mapping device having a screen device C that causes an image to appear when irradiated with light. In the present embodiment, the main display device 210 is configured in this way to enable advanced and powerful effect display, but the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. That is, it suffices as long as it is possible to perform a visual effect on the player, and it can be configured as a liquid crystal display device, an image display device such as an organic EL, a display device such as a 7-segment LED, a sub reel, or the like. It can also be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Further, from such a viewpoint, the shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be appropriately changed. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is, for example, a game that is mainly entertained by a so-called roll, the main effect display unit 21 may not be provided (sub effect display unit). 22 is the same).

The sub-effect display unit 22 includes a sub-display device 220. Further, the sub display device 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display device. Similar to the main display device 210, the sub display device 220 can be configured as another image display device or display device, or can be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Further, from such a viewpoint, the shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be appropriately changed. Further, since the main effect display unit 21 is composed of a large screen, it mainly displays effects closely related to the current game such as push order notification, hit notification, continuous effect, etc., and is a sub effect display unit. Since 22 is composed of a small screen, it is possible to display the display contents separately according to the purpose, such as mainly displaying an effect that is not so closely related to the current game such as a game history. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the two effect display units of the main effect display unit 21 and the sub effect display unit 22 are provided, but they can be configured without any of these. It can also be configured to provide only one of them. Further, it may be configured to provide three or more effect display units.

[1-1-11. lamp]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes not only its light emitting mode (lighting, blinking, or extinguishing, but also its brightness and light emitting color when configured as a full-color LED, like the upper lamp 23 mentioned as an example. ) Is provided with one or more lamps (light emitting means) capable of producing the effect. Further, such a light emitting means is configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing the effect from a visual point of view to the player. From this point of view, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

Other lamps included in the lamps and LEDs described later include, for example, side lamps provided on both end faces of the upper door mechanism UD and both end faces of the lower door mechanism DD, and operation units provided in each operation unit. Lamps and the like can be mentioned. Since the latter includes a function of notifying the player whether or not each operation unit can be operated, the light emitting mode is not changed according to the content of the effect when such a function is exerted. , It can be controlled to emit light according to a unique light emitting mode.

[1-1-12. Speaker]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes speakers 35a and 35b that output sound effects and sounds such as BGM. The speakers 35a and 35b constitute an audio output means capable of producing an effect by outputting audio. In addition, it is configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing the effect from the auditory point of view to the player. From this point of view, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other production equipment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with an effect device other than the above-mentioned various effect devices (effect execution means). For example, it is possible to provide an effect device such as a movable effect device such as a so-called accessory, a vibration effect device that produces an effect by vibration, or an air effect device that produces an effect by injecting air, and execute the effect. That is, a production device capable of appealing to any of the player's five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, taste, and smell) (making the player recognizable that the production is being performed). If so, any of them can be used. Therefore, in the present embodiment, "to execute the effect" means to produce the effect using any one or more of the above-mentioned various effect devices (effect execution means) unless otherwise specified. Indicates that you may execute.

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. selector]
The selector 31 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 5, and is provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 has, for example, a medal sensor 31S described later and a sorting device.

The medal sensor 31S detects the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 5, and determines whether or not the detected medals are appropriate medals. When the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is an appropriate medal and the medal can be accepted, the distribution device moves the medal to the hopper device 32 side, which will be described later. The drive is controlled so as to be guided. In this case, the number of bets or the number of credits is added by 1. On the other hand, when the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is not an appropriate medal, or when the medal cannot be accepted, the distribution device passes the medal through the cancel shoot to the medal payout exit 11. It is driven and controlled so that it can be returned from. If an abnormality occurs in the medal detection by the medal sensor 31S, a selector error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, the medal jam).

That is, the selector 31 constitutes a game medium detection unit (means) capable of detecting the inserted game medium. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a determination means capable of determining whether or not the inserted game medium is appropriate. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a distribution means for storing the inserted game medium inside when it is appropriate, and discharging it to the outside when the inserted game medium is not appropriate. Further, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is provided in the lower space in the cabinet G. The hopper device 32 is provided, for example, with a bucket portion for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 5 and guided by the selector 31, and medals stored at the bottom of the bucket portion while stirring the medals. It has a disc unit that guides the medals to the discharge unit one by one, a discharge unit that discharges the medals guided by the disc unit one by one, and a count sensor that counts the medals discharged from the discharge unit.

The bucket section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. The medals exceeding a certain number are guided to the medal auxiliary storage 33, which will be described later, through the guide passage provided on the upper surface side. If the medals stored in the bucket are empty, a hopper empty error will occur. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after replenishing the medals.

A plurality of medal-shaped hollow portions are formed radially from the center of the disc portion, and the central axis is rotationally driven according to a drive signal to guide the medals fitted in the hollow portions to the discharge portion one by one. The rotation of the disk portion agitates the medals stored in the bucket portion. Further, if an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disk portion, a hopper jam error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, the medal jam).

The count sensor detects the medals ejected from the ejection unit and counts the number of medals. For example, when paying out one medal, the disc unit starts to rotate, and then the rotation of the disc unit stops according to the count sensor counting the payout of one medal. In this way, an appropriate number of medals are paid out.

That is, the hopper device 32 constitutes a game medium payout unit (means) capable of paying out the game medium. Further, as described above, it can be said that it is a part of the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player. Further, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the hopper device 32 can be appropriately changed. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

[1-2-3. Medal auxiliary storage]
The medal auxiliary storage 33 is provided in the lower space in the cabinet G. The medal auxiliary storage 33 is provided near, for example, a storage unit for storing medals guided from the bucket portion of the hopper device 32 and the storage unit, and detects the capacity of the medals stored in the storage unit. It has a storage switch 33S.

The storage unit is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. When it is determined by the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S that a certain number or more of the medals have been stored, a medal auxiliary storage error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after reducing the number of medals stored in the storage unit to at least a certain number.

That is, the medal auxiliary storage 33 constitutes a surplus game medium storage unit (means) capable of storing the surplus game medium. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal auxiliary storage 33 can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, it is not necessarily an indispensable configuration.

[1-2-4. Power supply]
The power supply device 34 is provided in the lower space in the cabinet G. The power supply device 34 has, for example, a power supply board 34a and a power supply switch 34b, and supplies electric power to the pachi-slot machine 1 when the power supply switch 34b is turned on. The power supply device 34 converts the AC voltage of 100 V supplied from the power cable (not shown) into the DC voltage required by each part, and supplies the converted power to each part, as in the case of household electric products. do. That is, the power supply device 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) capable of supplying the required electric power to the gaming machine. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the power supply device 34 can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the setting key type switch 52 and the reset switch 53 described later are configured to be provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case described later). The switch can also be configured to be provided in the power supply device 34.

[1-2-5. substrate]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following boards as boards required for various controls. It should be noted that each of the substrates shown below is merely an example, and may be configured to include a substrate different from these, or may be configured not to include a substrate that is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is mounted on the back side of the reel unit RU in the cabinet G. The main control board 71 is a game control board that controls games, and is inside a resin main control board case (not shown) that is transparent (or substantially transparent) so that its state can be visually recognized. Is housed in. The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

There are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, and basically various electronic components are DIP-mounted, but some or all of the various electronic components are SMT-mounted (surface mount). It may be configured by being implemented). Further, in this case, a test point for confirming the operation may be provided using a tester or an oscilloscope. Further, small electronic components not exceeding 6 mm2 may be used for a part or all of various electronic components. Further, the substrate surface of the main control board 71 may be multi-layered.

[1-2-5-2. Sub-control board]
The sub-control board 72 is attached to the back surface side of the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The sub-control board 72 is an effect control board that controls the effect, and is housed in a resin sub-control board case (not shown). The sub-control board case can be configured as a transparent (or substantially transparent) resin case like the main control board case, or another material configured to be opaque (or substantially opaque). It can also be configured as a case using. The electrical configuration of the sub-control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other boards]
(Main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is attached to a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), and is mainly controlled by various devices connected to the main relay board 73. It is an intermediate control board for relaying between the board 71 and between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Since the main relay board 73 is configured as a board different from the main control board 71 for the convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, all the functions of the main relay board 73 are mainly controlled unless there is a particular problem. It is also possible to provide the main relay board 73 on the board 71 without providing the main relay board 73. Further, from such a viewpoint, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve the control efficiency and the wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of boards may be provided as the main relay board.

(Secondary relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is attached to a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), and is between various devices and the like connected to the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72, and It is an intermediate control board for relaying between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Since the sub-relay board 74 is configured as a board separate from the sub-control board 72 for the convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, all the functions of the sub-relay board 74 are sub-controlled if there is no particular problem. It is also possible to support the board 72 without providing the auxiliary relay board 74. Further, from such a viewpoint, the sub-relay board 74 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve the control efficiency and the wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of boards may be provided as the sub-relay board.

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal plate 55 is attached to a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, the inner side of the lower space), and for example, signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal are transmitted. Output to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The output start conditions and output end conditions of the external signals 1 to 4 can be appropriately set, and the transition of the internal state (for example, bonus state or AT state) of the pachi-slot machine 1 can be set to the outside according to the game playability. It is possible to inform. Since the external centralized terminal plate 55 is usually connected to an external data display or hall computer, not only the status of inserting / paying medals and the status of error occurrence in the pachi-slot machine 1 also in these devices. , The transition status of such an internal state can be recognized.

(Interface board for testing machine)
The first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine are both relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the testing machine in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot machine 1. (Since these relay boards are not mounted on the pachislot machine 1 as a release product for sale, the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the second interface board for the testing machine. The various electronic components needed to connect to the interface board 302 are also not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling a main operation related to a game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via a first interface board 301 for a testing machine, and is determined by a main control board 71. The test signal and the like related to the pushed order navigation are output via the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

[2. Electrical configuration of pachislot machines]
Subsequently, the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71, a sub control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub relay board 74. The main control board 71 and the main relay board 73, the main relay board 73 and the sub relay board 74, and the sub relay board 74 and the sub control board 72 are electrically connected to each other. Further, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are electrically operated so as to enable one-way serial communication from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72 via the main relay board 73 and the sub relay board 74. Is connected.

A main control circuit 100 as a game control unit that controls games is mounted on the main control board 71. The main control circuit 100 includes, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), and the like. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program. The clock pulse generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU 101. The random number circuit generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255, etc.). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signal. In addition, one or more values are extracted as random numbers from the generated random numbers as needed. In this way, control related to the overall game operation is performed.

On the sub-control board 72, a sub-control circuit 200 as an effect control unit that controls the effect is mounted. The sub control circuit 200 includes, for example, a sub CPU 201, a sub RAM 203, and the like. Further, the ROM cartridge board 202 is connected to the sub control board 72. On the rom cartridge board 202, various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, various data tables, various production data (for example, video data and drive data related to the main display device 210, video data related to the sub display device 220, lamps, etc. Lamp data related to the LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.) are stored. The sub RAM 203 includes a storage area for registering the effect contents and various effect data determined by executing the control program, a storage area for storing data related to various control commands (commands) transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like. It will be provided. It should be noted that the random number value for production related to the production may be generated and extracted in the sub CPU 201 from the random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 32767, etc.), or may be the main control. A random number circuit may be provided in the same manner as the circuit 100 so that the generation and extraction thereof can be performed. Further, the sub ROM may be included in the sub control circuit 200 instead of the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs and the like may be stored in the sub ROM. Further, the ROM cartridge board 202 may be configured to store various effect data, and the sub ROM in the sub control circuit 200 may be configured to store various control programs and various data tables. Further, the sub-control circuit 200 includes an image-dedicated microprocessor such as a GPU (also referred to as “VDP”), whereby the image displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220 is displayed. May be configured to generate (edit).

The main control board 71 includes stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, setting key type switch 52, reset switch 53, role ratio monitoring device 54, external centralized terminal board 55, hopper device 32, medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, and power supply. The device 34 is electrically connected. Further, on the main control board 71, a door open / close monitoring switch 56, a medal sensor 31S, a bet switch 6S, a start switch 7S, a stop switch 8S, a settlement switch 9S, and an information display device 14 are electrically connected via the main relay board 73. It is connected to the. If the first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine are mounted, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71 via, for example, the main relay board 73.

The external centralized terminal plate 55, the hopper device 32, the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, the power supply device 34, the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, the stop switch 8S, the settlement switch 9S, the information display device 14, and the testing machine. Since the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine have already been described, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is connected to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio, and is driven by the gear to rotate and stop each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Since each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, the main CPU 101 is a stepping motor 51L, respectively. The number of times the pulse is output to the 51C and 51R is counted, and the symbol positions of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R are managed based on the count result. Further, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is provided with a reel index (not shown) that determines an initial position for performing such management, and an index sensor (not shown) for detecting the position of the reel index. ..

The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, setting 1 to setting 6 in 6 steps) (setting change) or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1 (setting confirmation). Used for. Here, the set value indicates the degree of the player's advantage regarding the game, and usually, the lower the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 1), the relative the degree of the player's advantage. The lower the value and the higher the setting value (for example, the closer to the setting 6), the higher the degree of the player's advantage is. The setting key type switch 52 is turned on when, for example, the administrator of the game store inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise from the initial position, and returns it from the state where it is turned counterclockwise to the initial position. And turn off. When the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is off, if the setting key type switch 52 is turned on and then the power is turned on, the setting can be changed and the pachi-slot machine 1 is set while the power is on. When the key type switch 52 is turned on, the setting can be confirmed.

The reset switch 53 can detect a reset operation by the administrator on the game store side. The reset operation is an operation for canceling various error states. Further, the reset switch 53 can detect a setting value determination operation by the administrator on the game store side in a state where the setting can be changed. When the reset switch 53 is operated in a state where the setting can be changed, the set value is sequentially increased by 1 each time the setting is changed (when the setting 6 is reached, the setting returns to the next setting 1). In this way, the set value determination operation can be performed. Further, the set value determined in this way is determined when the start lever 7 is subsequently operated once. That is, the start switch 7S can detect the set value confirmation operation by the administrator on the game store side. In this way, when changing the setting, the setting key type switch 52 is turned on, the reset switch 53 is operated to select the set value, and the start lever 7 is operated to confirm the selected set value. After that, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation such as turning off the setting key type switch 52. Note that this is an example of a setting change operation, and it can be configured so that the setting can be changed by another operation. Further, when changing the setting or confirming the setting, for example, the current setting value may be displayed on the above-mentioned credit lamp or the payout number lamp.

The role ratio monitoring device 54 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED and is provided inside the main control board case. The combination ratio monitoring device 54 sequentially displays various ratio information related to the game aggregated and calculated by the main CPU 101. These ratio information is used when the manager of the amusement shop confirms whether or not the pachi-slot machine 1 has been tampered with. The role ratio monitoring device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. You may. Further, if it is in the cabinet G, it may be provided in another place. For example, it may be provided on the main control board case. Further, even if a management switch for starting the display on the role ratio monitoring device 54 or switching the contents thereof is provided in the cabinet G so that the above-mentioned various ratio information is displayed when this is operated. good. Further, on the premise that such a management switch is used, for example, the information display device 14 may be used in combination with the role ratio monitoring device 54. Further, immediately after the power is turned on or after a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds, which is a buffer time considering the time required for starting the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200) has elapsed from the power on, the role ratio monitoring device 54 In order to make it possible to confirm that the 4-digit 7-segment LED is functioning normally, a test pattern such as "8.8." (a pattern in which all seg and desimal LEDs are lit) is specified. It is desirable to have a configuration that lights (or blinks) for a period of time.

In the role ratio monitoring device 54, for example, the type of the ratio information is displayed in the upper two digits, and the value (%) indicating the ratio information is displayed in the lower two digits. Here, the various ratio information displayed on the combination ratio monitoring device 54 includes, for example, cumulative specific section ratio information, continuous character ratio information and character ratio information between the latest 6000 games, and cumulative continuous character ratio information. And there is information on the proportion of characters.

The specific section ratio information is a stop operation that is advantageous to the player in the game section of the target number of games (for example, 175,000 games if it is "cumulative", 6000 games if it is "most recent 6000 games", and the same applies hereinafter). This is information indicating the ratio of the number of games (or the number of games in the advantageous section) in the game section (for example, the AT state) in which the information of the above has been notified. Further, the continuous bonus ratio information is the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target number of games, and the first-class special bonus (RB) is in operation (consecutive bonuses related to the first-class special bonus). This is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out to (including the operation of the first-class special accessory (RB) in the state where the actuating device (BB) is operating). In addition, the bonus ratio information includes the first-class special bonus (RB), the second-class special bonus (CB), and the ordinary bonus (SB) among the medals paid out in the game section of the target game number. ) Is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation, and here, the operation of the first-class special bonus (RB) is the continuous operation device for the first-class special bonus (RB). It is a concept including the operation of the first-class special bonus (RB) in the state where the BB) is operating, and the operation of the second-class special bonus (CB) is the second-class special bonus. It is a concept including the operation of the type 2 special accessory (CB) in the state where the accessory continuous actuating device (MB) is operating.

It should be noted that the game section (for example, the AT state) in which the information on the stop operation advantageous to the player was notified is regarded as the operation of the accessory or the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and in each ratio information. It can also be the target of aggregation / calculation. That is, the combination ratio monitoring device 54 may only appropriately display the necessary ratio information, and the various ratio information that can be displayed is not limited to these. Further, for example, when the continuous character ratio information is displayed on the model not equipped with the first-class special accessory (RB), or the specific section ratio information is displayed on the model not equipped with the advantageous section function (AT function). For models that do not have the corresponding numerical information (corresponding information), such as when displaying, the last two digits that display the numerical information (% information indicating the ratio) of the 4-digit 7-segment LED when displaying the item. In the 7-segment LED of No. 1, for example, by displaying the identification for non-correspondence information such as lighting and displaying the two vertical bars in the center, it is confirmed that the model does not have the correspondence information. It is desirable that the person can recognize it at a glance.

The door open / close monitoring switch 56 is provided, for example, on the open / close side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. In addition, it may be configured to be provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD, or may be configured to be provided on the cabinet G side. Further, the upper door mechanism UD may be configured to be provided with a similar door open / close monitoring switch. The door open / close monitoring switch 56 is turned on when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state and turned off when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state, thereby monitoring the opening / closing of the lower door mechanism DD. When the door open / close monitoring switch 56 is turned on, a door open error occurs. In this case, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the error state is canceled.

The ROM cartridge board 202, the main display device 210, and the sub display device 220 are electrically connected to the sub control board 72. Further, on the sub control board 72, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 61, a group of effect buttons such as effect buttons 10a and 10b, lamps / LEDs such as an upper lamp 23, a speaker 35a, etc. A group of speakers such as 35b is electrically connected.

Since the ROM cartridge board 202, the main display device 210, the sub display device 220, the effect button group, the lamps / LEDs, and the speaker group have already been described, the description thereof is omitted here.

The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 61 is provided, for example, on the open / close side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD, similarly to the door open / close monitoring switch 56. The door opening / closing monitoring switch 56 is the same as the door opening / closing monitoring switch 56 in that it has a function of monitoring the opening / closing of the lower door mechanism DD. The opening / closing history of the door mechanism DD can be stored for a certain period of time. The opening / closing history can be confirmed from the hall menu described later. Therefore, for example, if there is an opening history after the manager of the game store leaves after business hours, or if there is an opening / closing history that has been opened for a long time during business hours, this is illegal. It is possible to recognize that the act is likely to have taken place.

[3. Function flow of pachislot machine]
Subsequently, the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1.

When a medal is inserted into the pachislot machine 1 by the player (bet operation is performed) and the start lever 7 is operated (start operation is performed), a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535) is used. One random number value (in the present embodiment, this may be described as an "internal lottery random number value") is extracted.

The internal lottery means (main CPU101 that performs the internal lottery process described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number values, and determines the internal winning combination. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed on the valid line is determined in advance. The types of symbol combinations are those related to "winning" where benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "missing". Such things are provided. The role related to the payout of medals is called a "small role", the role related to the operation of the replay (replay) is called the "replay role", and the role related to the operation of the bonus (bonus state) is called the "bonus role". Refer to. In addition, a combination that can be won internally (that is, a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established) may be simply referred to as a "role". In addition, the internal winning combination may be referred to as a "winning combination", a "preliminary decision result", a "derivation allowable condition", or the like. Further, the internal lottery means may be referred to as a "combination determination means", a "winning combination determination means", a "preliminary determination means", a "deriving allowable condition determination means", or the like.

Further, when the start lever 7 is operated (the start operation is performed), the plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the player operates the stop buttons (each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to the reels (each reel 3L, 3C, 3R) (stop operation is performed), the reel stop control means (described later). The main CPU101) that performs the reel stop control process controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing (or the pressing order thereof) when the stop button is pressed. The operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever-shaped one such as the start lever 7, and any operation means can be used as long as the player can perform the start operation. good. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to those having a button shape such as the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, and any operation as long as the player can perform the stop operation. It may be a means.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as "the number of sliding pieces". Then, in the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols.

When the internal winning combination that permits the display of the combination of symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually has the combination of the symbols valid within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible on the top. Further, the reel stop control means uses a specified time to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed on the effective line. The symbol displayed when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be referred to as "stop display" or "display result". Further, displaying a symbol when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be referred to as "derivation of stop display" or "derivation of display result".

Further, the reel stop control means automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time elapses after the reels rotate, even if the player does not perform the stop operation. The stop control may be performed. In this case, the reels will be stopped without the player's stop operation, so even if one of the internal winning combinations is decided, the combination of symbols related to any winning is effective. It is desirable to stop the rotation of the reel so that it is not displayed along the line.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU101 that performs the winning operation determination processing described later) has a combination of symbols displayed on the effective line related to the winning. (Or other predetermined ones) is determined. That is, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols related to the winning (or the combination of other predetermined symbols) is established. Then, the displayed combination of symbols is a combination of symbols related to winning (or other predetermined one) by the winning determination means (that is, a combination of symbols related to winning (or a combination of other predetermined symbols). ) Is established), the player is given a privilege such as paying out a medal, or various controls are performed with that as an opportunity. In the pachi-slot machine 1, as an example, one game (unit game) is performed in the above-mentioned series of flows.

The winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the valid line corresponds to any combination of symbols among a plurality of predetermined combinations of symbols. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means is applicable. That is, in the former, it may be determined whether or not it is a combination of symbols related to winning, separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately stops and controls the stop, the prevention of the occurrence of erroneous winning can be sufficiently guaranteed, so that the control burden related to the detection of erroneous winning can be reduced. On the other hand, in the latter case, it is possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols related to the winning is the combination of the symbols for which the winning is permitted. Can be detected, so it is possible to improve security.

Further, in the pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, the display of the image by the display device (for example, the main display device 210, the sub display device 220, etc.) and the light by various lamps (for example, the upper lamp 23, etc.) Output, sound output from a speaker (for example, speakers 35a, 35b, etc.), or a combination of these is used to perform various effects. That is, these are effect execution means for executing the effect. The content of the effect executed by the effect execution means may be determined on the main control circuit 100 side (main side) or on the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). That is, any of these can be a means for determining the content of the production.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (the start operation is performed), the effect random value is extracted separately from the internal lottery random value. When the random value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determining means draws the effect to be executed this time from the plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination (or according to a predetermined determination condition). decide.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determination means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel rotation starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, by executing the effect content associated with the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination determined (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at, the push order to be operated, etc.). The opportunity to know or anticipate is provided to the player, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

[4. Basic specifications regarding the playability of pachislot machines]
Subsequently, the basic specifications regarding the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

[4-1. Design arrangement]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a specification in which a game is played by displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and a stop display. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured so that it can be grasped which symbol is arranged at which position in each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, in the main ROM 102, at least data for identifying the type of the symbol at each symbol position of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stored. As long as such an object is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, but in the present embodiment, a symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9) described later is used as an example thereof.

In the symbol arrangement table, symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19") indicating each symbol position in the rotation direction of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is defined. In addition, data for specifying the type of symbol (for example, symbol code) is associated with each symbol position data. Further, in the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as "0". The number of symbols in each row, the number of types of symbols, the maximum number of sliding pieces, and the like can be appropriately changed and specified.

[4-2. Symbol combination]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the specifications are such that the combination of the displayed symbols affects the game result. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 grants various benefits according to the combination of the displayed symbols, shifts from the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or changes from the current state to a relatively disadvantageous state. It is possible to make a transition. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured so as to be able to grasp such a combination of symbols. Therefore, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such a combination of symbols. As long as such an object is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, but in the present embodiment, a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 11 to 14) described later is used as an example thereof. ing.

The symbol combination table defines data (for example, "display combination" or "winning operation flag") indicating the type of a plurality of predetermined symbol combinations among the combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the valid line. ing. The symbols constituting each combination of symbols can be specified by using, for example, the above-mentioned symbol code or the like. In addition, data indicating the type of privilege or the like (for example, "payout or the like") is associated with each combination of symbols. Further, the symbol combination table basically has a data structure corresponding to a winning flag storage area, a winning operation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 17), which will be described later. In addition, the number of types of combinations of symbols, the content of granting benefits, etc. can be changed and specified as appropriate.

[4-3. Internal winning role]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is a specification that which combination of symbols is permitted to be displayed (whether it is determined in advance) affects the game result. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 determines the internal winning combination (that is, the type of combination of symbols that can be displayed (or the type of privilege that can be granted)) prior to the player's stop operation (in advance). It is possible. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured so as to be able to grasp such an internal winning combination. Therefore, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such an internal winning combination. As long as such an object is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, but in the present embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 10) described later is used as an example thereof.

In the internal lottery table, data indicating a plurality of predetermined types of internal winning combinations (for example, "No." or "winning number") and a lottery value at which each internal winning combination is determined in each game state are displayed. Is stipulated. The lottery value may vary depending on the set value. In addition, the types of symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed (corresponding) for each internal winning combination are associated with each other. In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to associate a combination of a plurality of symbols with one internal winning combination, and when such an internal winning combination is determined, which combination of symbols is displayed. Is determined by stop control.

Here, for example, in the internal lottery process described later in the present embodiment (see FIG. 26; more specifically, the internal winning combination determination process of S64), first, in the range of numerical values predetermined by the random number circuit (for example, 0). The random number values extracted from ~ 65535) are sequentially added and updated with the lottery values specified for each internal winning combination. Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result overflows). Then, in the predetermined internal winning combination, when the result of the determination exceeds 65535, the internal winning combination is awarded (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if none of the internal winning combinations exceeds 65535 even after making the determination, the internal winning combination in this game is "missing". It should be noted that this is just an example of the internal lottery process, and as long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (winning probability), various methods can be adopted for the lottery process. For example, the extracted random value is sequentially subtracted and updated with the lottery value specified for each internal winning combination, and then whether or not the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than 0 (lottery result underflows). Whether or not) may be determined to determine the internal winning combination.

As described above, in the internal lottery table, the probability of being determined (winning probability) increases as the value of the defined lottery value is larger. The winning probability of each internal winning combination can be expressed by "the lottery value specified in each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

[4-4. Stop control]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, among the combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed by the determination of the internal winning combination, which symbol combination is finally displayed by the player's stop operation is the game result. It is a specification that affects. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 is finally displayed not only by the determined type of internal winning combination, but also by the player's stop operation timing and push order (also referred to as "stop operation mode" or "stop operation procedure"). It is possible to perform control (stop control) to change (determine) the type of combination of symbols to be performed. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured so as to be able to grasp in what mode the stop control is performed for each internal winning combination according to the stop operation mode of the player. Therefore, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such a stop control mode. As long as such an object is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, but in the present embodiment, a stop table, a pull-in priority table (not shown), or the like is used as an example. There is.

In the stop table, data indicating the amount of movement of the symbol (for example, "number of sliding pieces") is defined for each symbol position data of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. For example, it is assumed that a predetermined stop table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Next, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position (the symbol position data in the middle region of the reel 3L when the stop operation is performed) is "0". Then, it is assumed that the number of sliding pieces specified in the symbol position data "0" is "4" in the predetermined stop table. Then, the main control circuit 100 controls so that the reel 3L is stopped (the scheduled stop position becomes "4") at the symbol position (the position of the symbol position data "4") moved by four symbols. In this way, the stop table defines data (number of slip pieces) that makes it possible to directly determine the stop position. It should be noted that such a data structure is just an example. Further, performing stop control using such a stop table is generally referred to as "table control".

If there are multiple combinations of symbols that are allowed to be displayed in the attraction priority table, data indicating which combination of symbols should be displayed preferentially (retraction) (for example, "retraction priority"). ") Is stipulated. For example, it is assumed that a predetermined attraction priority table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Here, the predetermined internal winning combination permits the display of the symbol combination A and the symbol combination B, and the predetermined attraction priority table is attracted so that the symbol combination B is displayed with priority over the symbol combination A. Priority shall be specified. Next, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position is "0".

Then, in the main control circuit 100, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, "4") including the stop start position, the symbol constituting the symbol combination A and the symbol constituting the symbol combination B are displayed. Search for the existence. If there are no symbols on both sides, the position to stop is determined according to a predetermined rule (for example, stopping at a closer position, stopping at a farther position, etc.). If there is only a symbol constituting the symbol combination A, it is determined to stop at the position corresponding to the symbol. If there is only a symbol constituting the symbol combination B, it is determined to stop at the position corresponding to the symbol. If there are both symbols, the symbol combination B is displayed with priority over the symbol combination A. Therefore, it is determined to stop at the position corresponding to the symbols constituting the symbol combination B. The pull-in priority may be stored for all symbol positions during rotation of the target reel according to the selected pull-in priority table, or a stop operation may be performed on the target reel. When it is broken, it may be stored for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces including the stop start position. Moreover, such a data structure is just an example. Further, performing stop control using such a pull-in priority table is generally referred to as "control control".

In the present embodiment, the stop control may be executed by performing only the "table control", or the stop control may be executed by performing only the "control control". Alternatively, first perform "table control" to tentatively determine the stop position, then perform "control control" to search for a more appropriate stop position, and change the stop position depending on the search result. It is also possible to configure the configuration to execute the stop control that enables the operation.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, which symbol combination is finally displayed on the effective line is determined based on, for example, the following three factors.

The first element is the determined internal winning combination (lottery result of the internal lottery process). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "missing", the combination of symbols related to any of the replay combinations, the combination of symbols related to the small combination, or the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination is finally on the valid line. It will not be displayed. It should be noted that the "missing" can be regarded as one of the internal winning combinations, or can be regarded as a lottery result in which the internal winning combination has not been determined.

The second element is the stop operation timing of the player (the position of the symbol (pressing position) when the player operates any of the stop buttons). For example, in the present embodiment, since the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for four symbols, display is permitted even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery processing. If the symbols that make up the combination of symbols are arranged in excess of four effective lines (or each effective line if there are multiple), the combination of the symbols depends on the stop operation timing of the player. May not be displayed. This is the so-called "missing".

The third element is the push order of the player (the order in which the player operates the stop button). For example, in the present embodiment, an internal winning combination to which a combination of a plurality of symbols is associated may be determined, and in this case, it is finally displayed on the effective line according to the pushing order of the player. The combination of symbols may vary. In addition, such an internal winning combination is called a "pushing order role", and if it is a replay role, it may be called a "pushing order replay", and if it is a small role, it is called a "pushing order small role". May be called.

[4-5. Game state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, various gaming states can be provided as states for playing a game in order to change the degree of advantage of the player or to obtain the intended game performance. Hereinafter, an example of the gaming state will be described.

[4-5-1. Bonus state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a bonus combination is won and a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line, it is possible to shift to the bonus state (activate the bonus state). It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such a bonus state is not provided. Further, by providing a plurality of types of bonus combinations, it is possible to configure a plurality of bonus states to be provided. When a bonus combination is won, a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination (carry-over state) occurs over a plurality of games until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line. Such a bonus role is sometimes referred to as a "carry-over role". In addition, such a carry-over state may be referred to as "between (bonus) flags" or "inside (bonus)".

In the bonus state, it is possible to change the lottery mode of the small winning combination (including the winning probability and its contents, the mode of stop control, etc., the same applies hereinafter) with respect to the state in which the bonus state is not activated (non-bonus state). (Since it is also possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination, the bonus state can be regarded as one mode of the RT state described later). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the bonus state becomes a more advantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state becomes a more disadvantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state.

As the bonus role, for example, the first-class special bonus (RB), the first-class special bonus continuous operation device (BB), and the second-class special bonus (CB) (however, it is not a carry-over role). , A bonus continuous operation device (MB) related to a second-class special bonus, an ordinary bonus (SB) (but not a carry-over role), and the like. Further, for example, the bonus state corresponding to each bonus combination is configured as follows. The RB state is a game state that ends when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, the upper limit is 8 times) or a predetermined number of games (for example, the upper limit is 12 times) is played. It is composed. The BB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when a predetermined number of medals to be paid out (for example, the upper limit is 285) is paid out.

The CB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game is played. The MB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when the number of medals to be paid out exceeds an arbitrary predetermined number (for example, the upper limit is 153), or when the RB or SB is won during the MB state. To. The SB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when one game is played.

The operating condition of the bonus state is not limited to the fact that the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line. For example, during the operation of the bonus continuous actuating device (BB) related to the first-class special bonus, when the operation of the bonus continuous actuation device (BB) related to the first-class special bonus is started, the first-class special bonus It can also be configured to automatically activate the first-class special bonus (RB) at the start of the game when the object is not in operation, or at the end of the first-class special bonus. That is, it is also possible to control so that the RB is always in operation while the BB is in operation, without specifying the combination of the symbols related to the RB. Here, the RB in operation of BB may be referred to as "JAC" or the like, and the specification in which the RB in operation of BB is automatically operated in this way may be referred to as "auto JAC" or the like. Further, during the operation of the BB, it is possible to control the operation of the RB when the combination of symbols related to the specified RB is displayed on the effective line. The specification in which the RB operates based on the display of the combination of the corresponding symbols is sometimes referred to as "manual JAC" or the like. Further, the relationship between the accessory continuous operation device (MB) related to the type 2 special accessory and the type 2 special accessory (CB) is also the same. That is, it is possible to control so that the CB is always in operation while the MB is operating without specifying the combination of the symbols related to the CB, and during the operation of the MB, the specified symbol related to the CB can be controlled. It is also possible to control the operation of the CB when the combination is displayed on the effective line.

[4-5-2. RT state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to the RT state (operate the RT state). It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such an RT state is not provided. It can also be configured to provide a plurality of RT states. The RT state is a state in which the lottery mode of the replay combination can be changed with respect to the state in which the RT state is not operating (non-RT state). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a more advantageous gaming state than the non-RT state. On the other hand, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a more disadvantageous gaming state than the non-RT state. Further, when a plurality of RT states are provided, the same applies to the plurality of RT states. In this case, the RT state in which the lottery mode (particularly, the winning probability) of the replay role is relatively advantageous to the player is called "high RT state" or "high probability replay state", and the lottery of the replay role is performed. An RT state in which the aspect (particularly, the winning probability) is relatively disadvantageous to the player may be referred to as a "low RT state", a "low probability replay state", or the like.

The RT state can be transferred, for example, by satisfying any of the following transition conditions. Further, when a plurality of RT states are provided, the same applies to the plurality of RT states.
(1) When winning RB, BB or MB (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB or MB is displayed (3) When the RB state, BB state or MB state ends (4) RB, When a specific symbol combination is displayed when the BB or MB has not been won (not carried over) and is not in the RB state, BB state or MB state (5) (3) or (4). When a predetermined number of games have been played after the transition condition of

[4-5-3. AT state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to the AT state (operate the AT state). It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such an AT state is not provided. It can also be configured to provide a plurality of AT states. The AT state is more advantageous than the state in which the AT state is not operating (non-AT state), for example, by notifying the player of information on the stop operation advantageous to the player when the push order combination described above is won. It is a gaming state configured as a state.

In addition, when a plurality of AT states are provided, the game period of each AT state (including the ease of extension when it is possible to extend the period (or "addition"; the same applies hereinafter)). The degree of advantage of the player can be varied by setting the type of the notification target combination to which the information of the stop operation is notified, the probability of occurrence of the notification of the information of the stop operation, and the like different from each other. Further, the transition condition and the end condition of the AT state can be appropriately set according to the playability (however, the end by executing the limit process described later is excluded). Further, the AT state may be treated as if it were the above-mentioned bonus state, and in this case, it may be referred to as a "pseudo-bonus state" or the like.

Further, the game period in the AT state may be managed by the number of games (number of games) as long as the period is appropriately managed (game number management), and the predetermined number of games is set as one set and the number of sets. It may be managed by (set number management). Further, it may be managed by the number of payouts or the net increase (difference number) in the AT state (payout number management, difference number management). Further, it may be managed by the number of times (navigation number of times) that the notification (for example, the push order navigation at the time of winning the push order small winning combination) that affects the payout of medals is performed in the AT state (navigation number management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. Further, the game period given when the AT state is changed may be managed by a management method different from the game period given when the AT state is extended. Further, when a plurality of AT states are provided, they may be managed by the same management method or may be managed by different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to an ART state that combines the above-mentioned high RT state and AT state (operate the ART state). That is, since the ART state means the AT state performed in the high RT state, at least a low RT state and a high RT state are provided as the RT state, and the state is shifted to the high RT state (or to the low RT state). Although it differs from the AT state in that the control is performed (the transition is avoided), the basic control is the same as the AT state (high RT as a result of being notified of the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player). If it shifts to a state (or avoids shifting to a low RT state), it can be said to be synonymous with an AT state). When the transition condition of the ART state is satisfied, the state may be changed to the ART state by first shifting to the AT state and then to the high RT state, or at the same time in the high RT state and the AT state ( Alternatively, it may shift to the ART state by shifting to (almost simultaneously).

[4-5-5. Other game status]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, a gaming state other than the above-mentioned various gaming states can be provided. For example, each mode (see FIGS. 5 and 6) in the advantageous section described later is also a state in which the player plays a game, and it is advantageous whether or not to shift to the AT state as a pseudo bonus state. Since the degree can be varied, these can be regarded as a gaming state. Further, from the same viewpoint, for example, it is possible to provide a gaming state in which the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to the bonus state can be changed. For example, when the bonus combination is won (carried over), the game state in which the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination is easily displayed by the stop control and the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination are relative to each other. It is also possible to configure the player so that the degree of advantage can be changed by providing a gaming state that is difficult to be displayed in. Further, for example, a gaming state in which the bonus combination is won with a predetermined probability (easy to win) and a gaming state in which the bonus combination is won with a probability lower than the predetermined probability (relatively difficult to win) are provided. Therefore, it can be configured so that the degree of advantage of the player can be varied.

In addition, the following method is adopted as a method that can change the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to the AT state (including whether or not to extend the game period of the AT state in the AT state. The same shall apply hereinafter). You can also do it. For example, a "specific role" can be determined as an internal winning combination. The number of medals awarded to the specific combination varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (stop operation timing, push order, or a combination thereof). (For example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct answer), 8 cards are paid out, and if inappropriate (incorrect answer), 1 card is paid out or not paid out).

Then, if the specific combination is won in a specific game state, and if eight cards are paid out, whether or not to change the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to the AT state in this game to an advantageous one. (It may also include a decision on whether or not to directly shift to the AT state or whether or not to directly extend the gaming period in the AT state. Hereinafter, it will be described as an "advantageous decision"). On the other hand, if eight cards are not paid out, the advantageous decision is made in this game. Alternatively, if the specific combination is won in the above-mentioned specific game state, and if eight cards are paid out, the advantageous decision is made in this game. On the other hand, if eight cards are not paid out, the advantageous decision will not be made in this game.

In this way, when the player plays a game by a specific game method, the advantageous decision is made in the current game as a result of the game, and the advantageous decision is not made (the limitation is that the advantageous decision is made). It can also be configured to be) in some cases. In addition, the player may change between this game and the next game, and if such restrictions continue after the next game, the (next) player may suffer a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions are limited to this game and will not continue after the next game. Also, such restrictions are sometimes referred to as "penalties".

[4-6. Game section]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high, it is possible to provide various game sections as a state in which the game is played with a concept different from the above-mentioned game state. Hereinafter, an example of the game section will be described. The game section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section.

(Non-advantageous section)
The non-advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is not possible to notify the player of the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. The following requirements are just examples, and can be changed as appropriate if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened.

(1) It is not possible to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode (for example, push order navigation). Therefore, it is not possible to control the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.
(2) When the set value is changed (setting change), or when the initialization condition such as "RAM error" described later is satisfied, the non-advantageous section is set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit processing described later is executed in the advantageous section (that is, a predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter described later). When the value) becomes a specified value (for example, 1500 games or 2400 sheets), a non-advantageous section is set as an initial state. In addition, the non-advantageous section may be set on the condition that the predetermined value is referred to and the predetermined value is a specific update value even before the predetermined value becomes the specified value. In addition, when a predetermined end condition is satisfied during the advantageous section and the end is determined (for example, when the advantageous section end lottery is configured to be performed and the winning is won, etc.), that is the condition. A non-advantageous section may be set.
(4) In the non-advantageous section, the processing related to the advantageous section (for example, the processing for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section) can be derived only by referring to the determined internal winning combination. It is not possible to perform processing that refers to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the non-advantageous section (or the advantageous section before the transition). In addition, which internal winning combination is determined can be referred to the data indicating the internal winning combination directly such as the winning number, or the sub-flag (multiple roles) generated or converted from the data of the internal winning combination. It is also possible to refer to the data indicating the internal winning combination indirectly, such as (the data in which is used as one determination target data).
(5) The non-advantageous section is basically one state, and a plurality of states cannot be set in the non-advantageous section. For example, the non-advantageous section after the end of the advantageous section cannot be set as the non-advantageous section A, and the non-advantageous section after the setting change cannot be set as the non-advantageous section B.

(Advantageous section)
The advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is possible to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and has the following requirements. The following requirements are just examples, and can be changed as appropriate if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened.

(1) It is possible to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode (for example, push order navigation). Therefore, it is possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.
(2) When the set value is changed (setting change), or when the initialization condition such as "RAM error" described later is satisfied, the advantageous section cannot be set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit processing described later is executed in the advantageous section, it is necessary to end the advantageous section.
(4) In the advantageous section, the process related to the advantageous section (for example, the process of determining whether to shift the gaming state (mode) during the advantageous section, or whether to extend a specific gaming state (mode), etc.) is performed. , Not only the processing referring to the determined internal winning combination, but also the processing referring to various parameters other than the internal winning combination such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the advantageous section can be performed. .. As another example of various parameters that can be referred to, for example, privilege information such as points that can be given according to the above-mentioned various parameters, a type of bonus state, a type of RT state, and a stop operation timing of any of the reels. , Or the push order and the like.
(5) Multiple states can be set within the advantageous section. For example, it is possible to set a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a CZ state that easily shifts to the AT state, or an AT state in which the expected value of medal increase becomes positive when the stop operation is performed according to the notification. Further, for example, in response to the determination of the transition to the CZ state in the normal state, the CZ precursor is set as a standby state until the transition to the CZ state is actually performed, and a precursor effect suggesting the transition to the CZ state can be performed. Depending on whether the AT state transition is determined in the state, the normal state, or the CZ state, it is set as a standby state until the actual transition to the AT state, and a precursory effect suggesting the transition to the AT state can be performed. The state such as the AT precursor state can also be set according to the playability.
(6) By lighting the section lamp (status display unit) that can notify which section is the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section, it is possible to notify that the section is in the advantageous section (the section lamp is off). If so, it can be notified that the section is in a non-advantageous section). As described above, the lighting start timing of the section lamp can be set to any timing to some extent. Basically, the lighting may be started when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section and may be continued until the non-advantageous section shifts, or the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section (the advantageous section starts). However, if the transitioned advantageous section is in the normal state, the lighting may not be started, but the lighting may be started from the time when the AT state is first reached. If the shifted advantageous section is in the AT state, lighting may be started from that time.

[4-7. limiter]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous section continuing for too long, an upper limit (limit) is set for the period in which the advantageous section continues continuously. Is possible. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter". Further, in the present embodiment, ending the advantageous section by such a limiter is described as execution of limit processing or operation of the limiter. Hereinafter, an example of the limiter will be described.

(Game number limiter)
The game number limiter is configured as a limiter in which limit processing is executed when the number of games (number of games) in the advantageous section reaches "1500" times. For example, the advantageous section game number counter, which will be described later, starts counting from the time when the advantageous section is started, and adds one count each time one game is digested. Then, based on the value of the advantageous section game number counter becoming a specified value (for example, "1500" or more) (for example, even when the game period in the AT state remains), the advantageous section is forcibly set. End and shift to a non-advantageous section. The number of games in which the number of games limiter is activated can be set to any number as long as the number of games is "1500" or less, which is the upper limit. In addition, if the requirements for such a game number limiter are relaxed or tightened, they can be changed as appropriate. Further, the gambling may be suppressed stepwise according to the number of games in the advantageous section.

(Payout number limiter)
The payout number limiter is configured as a limiter in which the limit process is executed when the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section reaches "2400". For example, the advantageous section payout counter, which will be described later, starts counting from the start of the advantageous section, and each time a medal is paid out, the corresponding number of medals (more specifically, the net increase obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts). (Several minutes) Add the count. Then, based on the value of the advantageous section payout counter becoming a specified value (for example, "2400" or more) (for example, even when the game period in the AT state remains), the advantageous section is forcibly set. End and shift to a non-advantageous section. The number of payouts for which the payout number limiter operates can be set to any number as long as the number of payouts is "2400" or less, which is the upper limit. In addition, if the requirements for such payout limiters are relaxed or tightened, they can be changed as appropriate. Further, the gambling may be suppressed stepwise according to the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section.

Further, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter, which will be described later, counts the plus amount from the latest lowest point, with the point where the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section as the lowest point (starting point). (That is, if there is no payout, the count is subtracted, etc.). That is, the payout number limiter executes the limit process when a maximum of "2400" medals are paid out from the time when the number of medals increases in the advantageous section (for example, when the AT state is started). It can also be configured as a limiter to be used. Further, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter described later may simply count the actual payout number (that is, the payout number does not subtract the bet number) instead of the net increase number described above.

The pachislot machine 1 may execute the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter, or may execute the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of payout limiters, and may execute the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of payout limiters. The limit processing of the advantageous section may be executed by using both of the number limiters. When both limiters are used, it is desirable to end the advantageous section when the operating conditions of either limiter are satisfied after the advantageous section starts.

Further, the type of limiter is not limited to the above-mentioned game number limiter and payout number limiter. For example, the number of times of navigation of the push order small combination in the AT state (that is, the number of times when the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified about the combination related to the payout of medals) is a predetermined number of times (for example, "400" times). A navigation count limiter may be provided so that the limit process is executed when the limit processing is performed. That is, it is possible to execute the limit process using various conditions related to the game as long as the gambling can be appropriately suppressed.

[4-8. External signal]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has specifications that can output a plurality of types of external signals to the outside. For example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the bonus state and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the bonus state, the external data display can also be turned on. It is possible to perform an effect during the linked bonus state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the BB state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the BB state, and the MB state is started. If the external signal 2 is turned on and the external signal 2 is turned off based on the end of the MB state, the external data display not only performs the above-mentioned effect during the bonus state, but also gives a bonus. The number of times can be counted by the type.

Further, for example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the AT state and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the AT state, the external data display can also be used. In conjunction with this, it is possible to perform an effect during the AT state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the predetermined AT state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the predetermined AT state, and the specific AT state is set. If the external signal 2 is turned on based on the start and the external signal 2 is turned off based on the end of the specific AT state, the external data display is also in the above-mentioned AT state. Not only can the effect be performed, but the number of ATs can be counted for each type.

Further, for example, the AT state is configured as the AT state for managing the number of sets, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the AT state of the first first set, and the set is started for the second and subsequent sets. If the external signal 2 is turned on each time, the number of initial hits in the AT state and the number of extensions in the AT state can be counted even in the external data display. The timing of turning on and the timing of turning off each external signal can be appropriately set. That is, as long as the situation is appropriately recognized by an external data display, a hall computer, or the like, the output mode of each external signal can be appropriately set. For example, various conditions such as a predetermined time, one game, and a change in the state can be adopted for the period from the off state to the on state and then to the off state again.

[4-9. command]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed so that a plurality of types of commands can be transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200 cannot communicate with each other, and it is a requirement that the main control circuit 100 communicates only in one direction of the sub control circuit 200. ing. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to transmit information (command) for notifying the change of the state in the pachi-slot machine 1 to the sub control circuit 200 in a timely manner. An example of such a command will be described below.

The main control circuit 100 transmits an initialization command to the sub control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command is configured to include parameters that specify setting values, game states, and the like. Further, for example, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command is transmitted. The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of bets and the like. Also, for example, when a start operation is performed, a start command is transmitted. The start command is configured to include parameters for specifying an internal winning combination, a game state, and the like. Further, for example, a lock command is transmitted when a lock effect is performed. The lock command is configured to include parameters that specify the content of the lock effect and the like. Further, for example, when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts, a reel rotation start command is transmitted. The reel rotation start command is configured to include parameters that specify that the reel rotation has started and the like.

Further, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is transmitted. The reel stop command is configured to include parameters for specifying the reel to be stopped, the position where the reel is stopped, and the like. Further, for example, when all the reels are stopped and the display combination (winning operation flag) is confirmed, the winning operation command is transmitted. The winning operation command is configured to include parameters that specify the type of display combination, the content of the privilege to be given, and the like. Further, for example, when starting an advantageous section, an advantageous section start command is transmitted. The advantageous section start command is configured to include parameters for specifying the start of the advantageous section, the mode (game state), and the like. Further, for example, when the advantageous section is ended, the advantageous section end command is transmitted. The advantageous section end command is configured to include parameters for specifying the end of the advantageous section and the factors for ending the advantageous section. Further, for example, when a settlement operation is performed, a settlement command is transmitted. The settlement command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of returns and the like. Note that these are just examples, and commands other than these can be sent as needed, and unnecessary commands can be prevented from being sent.

[4-10. Direction]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, various effects are executed by using various effect devices in order to enhance the interest of the game, to inform the player of useful information, or to make the game playable as intended. It is possible. Hereinafter, an example of such an effect will be described.

[4-10-1. Main side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the following effects can be performed by controlling the main control circuit 100 side (main side). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to notify the information of the stop operation by the instruction monitor, which is also included in the production in a broad sense.

(Rock production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the progress of the game can be stopped for a predetermined period (the player's game operation is invalidated for a predetermined period). Such an effect is referred to as a "rock effect (or simply" rock ")", or is also referred to as a "freeze effect (or simply" freeze ")" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such a lock effect is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of lock effects can be performed.

Further, the game operation to be invalidated may be, for example, a start operation, a stop operation, or another operation. For example, when the start operation is invalidated for a predetermined period, the progress of the game is stopped in a predetermined period after all the stop operations are performed. Further, for example, when the stop operation is invalidated for a predetermined period, the progress of the game is stopped in a predetermined period after the start operation is performed. In addition, when a plurality of types of lock effects are provided, a period during which the progress of the game is stopped (a period during which the player's game operation is invalidated), a type of game operation to be invalidated, etc. are set for each lock effect. You can do it.

(Reel production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the effect display mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (not only the variable display mode but also the stop display mode) is combined during the execution of the lock effect described above. Can be performed by). Such an effect is referred to as a "reel effect" as well as a "design effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such a reel effect is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of reel effects can be performed. In addition, the case of "performing (executing) the lock effect" includes both the case where the reel effect is performed and the case where the reel effect is not performed.

In short, the reel effect is to rotate or stop (temporarily stop) each reel 3L, 3C, 3R regardless of the player's game operation during the period when the player's game operation is invalidated. It is intended to produce with. Therefore, it is possible to set an operation pattern for performing such an effect operation without considering the rotation speed, the maximum number of sliding pieces, and the like. Further, if a plurality of operation patterns are set, a plurality of types of reel effects can be provided. Further, a wider range of effect patterns can be set by combining a plurality of types of reel effects and a plurality of types of lock effects. It should be noted that only any one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be used for the reel effect, any two may be used, or all three may be used.

(Pseudo game)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform an effect of performing a pseudo game during the execution of the above-mentioned lock effect. Such a production is called a "pseudo game". It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such a pseudo game is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of pseudo games can be performed. Further, the case of "performing (executing) the lock effect" includes both the case where the pseudo game is performed and the case where the pseudo game is not performed.

In short, the pseudo game receives the player's game operation in a pseudo manner during the period in which the player's game operation is invalidated, thereby rotating or stopping (temporarily stopping) each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The production is done by doing things like that. That is, in addition to the above-mentioned reel effect, the player's game operation is further intervened to perform the effect. For example, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1-bet button 6b, the start lever 7, each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement button 9, etc. are basically provided for the purpose of being used for game operation. Therefore, it is not desirable to use it for any other purpose. However, in the simulated game, it is possible to accept these operations on the premise that measures are taken so that the player does not misunderstand that the game is actually being played.

Here, the flow of the pseudo game will be described with an example. The pseudo game is performed, for example, in the following flow.
(1) The actual start operation of the player (the execution condition is satisfied here and the pseudo game starts)
(2) Each reel rotates in a pseudo manner (during a pseudo game)
(3) A pseudo stop operation is accepted, which causes each reel to temporarily stop (during a pseudo game).
(4) Each reel actually starts rotating after undergoing random delay processing (pseudo-game ends and actual game starts).

The random delay process is, for example, a state in which specific symbols are displayed side by side in the situation (3) described above, and when each reel starts normal rotation in the situation (4) described above as it is, the player However, it may be easier to stop the operation using a specific symbol as a mark (it becomes an aid to so-called "pressing"), so in order to correct this, a delay period is randomly set for each reel. It is a process for starting rotation after it is generated (such a delay period is also referred to as a "relocation period"). Further, when each reel is temporarily stopped in the above-mentioned situations (3) and (4), the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor is always predetermined so as not to be mistaken for being completely stopped. It is desirable to alternate the reels forward and backward for less than an hour (eg, 500 ms).

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, when any combination of symbols is temporarily stopped in the situation of (3) above (when the third reel is temporarily stopped and all the reels are temporarily stopped). In the situation (4) described above, each reel may be slightly vibrated (swinged) up and down until the random delay processing is started. As long as the phase signal changes within the above-mentioned predetermined time, such fluctuation does not occur when the first reel temporarily stops and when the second reel temporarily stops. You may do it.

Further, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game lamp for notifying that the pseudo-game is in progress is provided, and after the pseudo-game is started in the above-mentioned situation (1), the above-mentioned (4). ), The pseudo-game lamp may be turned on until the random delay process is started. It is desirable that the pseudo-game lamp is installed above the operation unit that receives the game operation of the player and at a position that can be visually recognized during the game. Further, the pseudo-game lamp is an independent lamp that is not used for other purposes, and it is desirable that the entire display portion of the pseudo-game lamp is covered with a monochromatic edge. Further, it is desirable that the pseudo-game lamp has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm and the surface area exceeds 642 square mm) including the explanatory portion of the pseudo-game lamp. Further, the description portion of the pseudo-game lamp is a description that can be recognized as a lamp for notifying that the pseudo-game lamp is in the pseudo-game (for example, "FREEPLAY", "during pseudo-game production", or ". It is desirable that the description such as "during automatic reel production"), and it is desirable that such a description portion occupies 1/3 or more of the surface area. The pseudo game lamp may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or the sub control circuit 200.

Further, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game in-game display for notifying that the pseudo-game is in progress is displayed after the pseudo-game is started in the above-mentioned situation (1), and then the above-mentioned (4). ), The main display device 210 and / or the sub display device 220 may be used until the random delay processing is started. It is desirable that the pseudo-game display is displayed above the operation unit that receives the player's game operation and at a position that can be visually recognized during the game (in the present embodiment, the main display device 210 and the sub-display device). Since all of the 220s are above the operation unit, any of them may be used). Further, in the simulated game display, the display range including the explanation portion has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm, and when the display screen is less than 7 inches, the surface area exceeds 642 square mm. , When the display screen is 7 inches or more, the surface area is 8.2% or more of the entire screen, etc.). Further, the explanation portion of the pseudo-game display is a description that can be recognized as a display for notifying that the pseudo-game display is in the pseudo-game (for example, "FREEPLAY", "pseudo-game effect", etc. Alternatively, it is desirable that the description is "during automatic reel production" or the like), and it is desirable that the size is such that the player can read it without concealing it.

Further, for example, during the pseudo game (for example, from the start of the pseudo game in the situation (1) described above to the start of the random delay process in the situation (4) described above), the instruction monitor is displayed. It is desirable to configure so that the stop operation information is not notified (when it is necessary to display the stop operation information on the instruction monitor in the game, the display is started at the timing when the random delay processing is started). By doing so, it is possible to further suppress the player's misunderstanding that the game is actually being played during the simulated game. If any of the above measures are taken, the stop operation information may be notified to the sub-side effect device (for example, the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220) during the simulated game. good. Similarly, during the pseudo-game, the effect device on the sub-side may perform an effect (linked to the pseudo-game operation) according to the game result of the pseudo-game.

Further, in the actual game, the game operation of the player or the test signal corresponding to the state in which the game operation is possible is output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, but during the simulated game. Does not output a test signal corresponding to the player's pseudo-game operation or the state in which the pseudo-game operation is possible. Therefore, during the pseudo-game, a test signal (pseudo-game signal) may be output so that the tester can recognize that the pseudo-game is in progress. When the first interface board 301 for the testing machine receives the pseudo game signal from the main control board 71, the first interface board 301 outputs the signal for pseudo game progress control to the main control board 71, so that the first interface board 301 is simulated on the main control board 71 side. The game may be advanced (that is, the first interface board 301 for the testing machine may be provided with a pseudo game progress function). Further, when the first interface board 301 for a testing machine is provided with such a pseudo game progress function, a changeover switch capable of switching on / off of the function may be provided. This makes it possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to confirm the effect content of the pseudo game in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachi-slot machine 1.

[4-10-2. Sub-side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the following effects can be performed by controlling the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to notify the stop operation information by the main display device 210 or the like, which is also included in the production in a broad sense.

(Normal production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform an effect that is completed in this game (that is, it ends in one game). Such an effect is referred to as a "normal effect" as well as a "single-shot effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such a normal effect is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of normal effects can be performed.

(Continuous production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, a continuous (that is, continuous for a plurality of games) effect can be performed over a plurality of games. Such an effect is referred to as a "continuous reading effect" as well as a "continuous effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such continuous production is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of continuous production can be performed.

(Operation interlocking production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform an effect capable of changing the effect content according to the effect operation of the player. Such an effect is referred to as an "operation-linked effect" and also called a "button effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such an operation-linked effect is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of operation-linked effects can be performed. Further, the operation-linked effect can be configured as a normal effect or a continuous effect. Further, the effect operation can include not only the operation for the effect button group but also various game operations.

The above-mentioned various effects can be used for various purposes. For example, it can be used to suggest or notify a set value, an internal winning combination, a game state, a game section, a content of granting a privilege, a period until the privilege is granted, and the like. Further, it can be used to suggest or notify the degree of advantage. Moreover, these uses are just an example.

(Other production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to perform an effect other than the above-mentioned various effects. For example, various notifications to the player or the game store (for example, immersive prevention notification, lost-and-found prevention notification, error status notification, demo status notification, etc.) are also included in the production in a broad sense as those used for purposes other than the above. .. It should be noted that, for example, when the advantageous section ends, a warning or the like indicating to that effect may be notified as the entanglement prevention notification. Further, the forgotten item prevention notification may be, for example, a warning or the like indicating that when the advantageous section ends or the settlement operation is performed. Further, in the error status notification, a warning or the like indicating to that effect can be notified from the time when the error occurs until the error is resolved. In addition, the demo status notification can be notified that the table is vacant or the like when the period during which the game is not played reaches a predetermined period or when the settlement operation is performed.

[5. First game machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 22, a specific example of the specifications relating to the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as a “first game machine”. It should be noted that, with respect to various specifications and functions described as the first gaming machine in the present embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to those described as other gaming machines in the present embodiment. With respect to various specifications, functions, and the like described as other gaming machines in the present embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to those described as the first gaming machine in the present embodiment. That is, an invention in which these are appropriately combined can be used as the invention according to the present embodiment.

First, in the first gaming machine, the effective line is defined as only one line of the above-mentioned "center line". Further, in the first gaming machine, a non-bonus state and a bonus state are provided as the gaming state. Further, the non-bonus state is between the 2BB flags where the later-described "F_2BB" (a bonus combination that can be won only in the two-card bet state. Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "2BB") is carried over, and later. "F_3BB" (a bonus role that can be won only in the state of 3 bets. Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "3BB") is carried over between the 3BB flags, and neither bonus role is won (carried over). It is configured to include (not) between non-flags. Further, the bonus state is configured to include a 2BB state that shifts according to the display of the symbol combination related to 2BB and a 3BB state that shifts according to the display of the symbol combination related to 3BB. To.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to play a game in a state where two medals are bet (two-card bet state) and a state where three medals are bet (three-card bet state). There is. The "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal slot 5 in order to use the game, and the player operates the MAX bet button 6a or the 1-bet button 6b. This includes both medals for two or three medals from credits and automatic medals for two or three medals depending on the winning of the replay role.

[5-1. Playability of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, the flow of the game in the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. Note that FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a transition flow of a gaming state in a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section in the first gaming machine, and FIG. 6 is for explaining an example of each mode in the first gaming machine. 7 and 8 are views showing an example of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the first gaming machine, the state in which the player plays a game is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section is further divided into an effect section (advantageous section / normal game) and a normal game. An increase section (advantageous section / pseudo bonus) is provided. The non-advantageous section is a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state disadvantageous to the player. The effect section is a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state disadvantageous to the player, which is the same as the non-advantageous section, as will be described later. , It differs from the non-advantageous section in that the mode transition is performed.

That is, the non-advantageous section is defined as an initial state controlled when the game in the advantageous section is completed, when a setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are satisfied, or when the product is shipped from the factory. In the control state of, the effect section is a control state as a normal state in which the expected degree of increase section transition (granting) can be changed by mode transition or the like, and the player plays a normal game.

On the other hand, the increased section is a gaming state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and is a gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, the increase section is a control state as an advantageous state in which the player can increase the medals. It should be noted that both the effect section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and by mutually shifting these sections, they are configured as a series of advantageous sections.

In the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7A, the non-advantageous section sub-flag as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later) in the non-advantageous section. Is determined. In addition, the sub-flag plays an internal winning role (whether or not it is a lottery target combination, its winning probability, etc.) in various lottery (various processes related to the advantageous section) related to playability by the main control circuit 100. It is information for making the group identifiable by grouping and assigning the same information. This eliminates the need to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination, so that the amount of data can be compressed and the capacity of the main ROM 102 can be avoided. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery using this non-advantageous section sub-flag is performed.

The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Ripbell" has internal winning combinations of "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2". "(No." 10 "to No." 33 "). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "weak che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_cherry" (No. "5"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "determined combination" is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_determined cherry" (No. "6") or "F_reach" (No. "8"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "middle che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_middle cherry" (No. "7"). It should be noted that the non-advantageous section can also be configured so that the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag can be determined as in the advantageous section. Further, these correspondences are not limited to those described above.

Further, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7A, the advantageous section winning sub-flag as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later) in the advantageous section. Is determined. Further, in the advantageous section, the sub flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined as the secondary information (sub flag) according to the combination of the displayed symbols. In the advantageous section, a lottery is performed using these advantageous section winning sub-flags and advantageous section winning sub-flags.

The sub-flag "bell" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is any one of "F_bell 123A1" to "F_bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The sub-flag "weak che" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_cherry" (No. "5"). The sub-flag "watermelon" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"). The sub-flag "fixed combination" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_fixed cherry" (No. "6") or "F_reach" (No. "8"). .. The sub-flag "middle che" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_middle cherry" (No. "7").

The sub-flag "Tsu Lip 1" at the time of winning the advantageous section is "right" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"). It is determined when the combination of the symbols of "rising lip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "rising right lip"). The sub-flag "Through Lip 2" at the time of winning the advantageous section is "parallel" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"). It is determined when the combination of the symbols of "rip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "parallel lip").

Here, in the first gaming machine, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_replay A" (No. "3"), the combination of the "right-up rip" symbols is used between the 3BB flags. It is displayed, and a combination of "parallel rip" symbols is displayed between the 2BB flags and between the non-flags.

That is, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Through Lip 1" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section between the 3BB flags, which is advantageous between the 2BB flags and the non-flags. "Tsu Lip 2" is determined as a sub-flag when winning a section. Then, in the first gaming machine, when the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section are different in this way, various lottery to be described later (for example, a pseudo-bonus transfer lottery using the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (c) or the figure). The degree of advantage in the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in 8 (f) is varied.

In the first gaming machine, for example, "F_replay A" (No. "3") serves as a role in which the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section changes depending on whether it is between the 3BB flags or between the 2BB flags. ) Is given as an example, but the mode in which the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section changes is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_bell 123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control is different depending on whether it is between the 3BB flags and the 2BB flags. Therefore, if you win such a role, the number of medals to be paid out will not be changed (or may be changed), and the combination of displayed symbols will be different. The sub-flag may be determined. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"), the pressing position (stop operation timing) regardless of which flag is between (non-flag). ) Is appropriate, the combination of "watermelon" symbols is displayed, and if the pressing position is not appropriate, a dropout occurs and the combination of "watermelon spills" symbols is displayed. If the winning combination is won, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, which is different depending on whether the winning is possible without the omission occurring or the omission occurs, may be determined. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is "F_replay A" (No. "3"), the stop operation is a specific mode (in this specific mode, for example, the stop operation is defined in advance) between the 3BB flags. If it is performed in the batting order (correct answer pressing order), the pressing position (timing of the stop operation) is appropriate, or a combination thereof, any aspect may be used). The combination of "parallel rip" symbols is displayed, and if it is not performed in a specific mode, the "right-up rip" symbol combination is displayed, which determines a different advantageous section winning sub-flag. You may do so. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

That is, in the first gaming machine, it is possible that the final stop display mode may differ depending on the number of bets, the game state, the mode of the stop operation, or any combination of these, with respect to the specific combination. It is possible to apply all the modes in which different secondary information can be determined according to different stop display modes, thereby varying the degree of advantage.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of the first gaming machine. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is performed for each game. Specifically, the advantageous section transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (b) is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and the non-advantageous section sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination. At a predetermined timing, the transition destination mode or the like is determined according to the non-game section sub-flag. In this determination, when only the type of the mode when shifting to the advantageous section is determined (“start of advantageous section” in FIG. 5), not only the type of the mode but also the pseudo bonus may be shifted. There is a case where it is decided (in FIG. 5, "advantageous section start + pseudo bonus start"). However, in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to make the specifications so that it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus.

Here, each mode in the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which may be rephrased as a gaming state or a control state) for changing the degree of expectation of the increase section (pseudo-bonus) transition (granting) in the production section (normal game). Yes, in the production section (normal game), whether or not there is a pseudo bonus transition is determined, the advantageous section is maintained, or the advantageous section is terminated and the transition to the non-advantageous section is determined according to this mode. It is designed to do.

The start mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (directing section), and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see the figure below). 7 (c)), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). Although not shown, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games" in the start mode. The number of ceiling games is used to forcibly shift to the pseudo bonus when the period of not shifting to the pseudo bonus reaches a certain period. Therefore, the smaller the number of ceiling games, the more advantageous to the player, and the larger the number of ceiling games, the more disadvantageous to the player.

Normally, the A mode is the mode in which the player is most likely to stay and is relatively disadvantageous in playing the game, and the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively low ((c) in FIG. 7 described later). (See), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). In the normal A mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games". Further, in FIG. 6, "about 999G after the pseudo-bonus" means that after the end of the pseudo-bonus, the mode shifts to the end A mode or the end B mode, which will be described later, and 32 games without shifting to the pseudo-bonus in the mode. If this normal A mode is selected when the game is played, once the game is transferred to the non-advantageous section, and then the normal A mode is selected when the game is transferred from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, the apparent number of ceiling games is "965 games" + end A. This is expressed because it is the game period "32 games" in the mode or the end B mode + the number of games required to shift from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. Hereinafter, the same applies to the normal B mode, the heaven preparation mode, and the chance mode.

Normally B mode is a mode that is relatively easy for the player to stay in playing a game and is relatively disadvantageous, but it is a mode that is more advantageous than normal A mode, and the degree of expectation to shift to a pseudo bonus is high. It is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). In the normal B mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games".

In the heaven preparation mode, the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), but the number of ceiling games is set to "466 games", and when shifting to the pseudo bonus. After that, it is confirmed that the mode will shift to the heaven mode (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later), so that the mode is relatively advantageous in that sense.

In the chance mode, the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the number of ceiling games is set to "222 games", which is relatively advantageous in that sense. Mode. However, the expectation for shifting to the heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later).

End A mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay if you do not shift to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after the transition to the pseudo bonus, and you expect to shift to the pseudo bonus. The degree is the lowest (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8 described later). In the end A mode, when the game of 32 games is performed without shifting to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section.

The end B mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode, but it is more advantageous than the end A mode because it is easy to stay if the transition to the pseudo bonus does not occur after the transition to the heaven mode (including the heaven preparation mode). Since it is a mode, the expectation of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see the figure described later). 8 (f)). In the end B mode, as in the end A mode, when the game of 32 games is performed without shifting to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section. The end A mode and the end B mode can also be collectively referred to as the "end mode".

The guarantee mode is a mode in which the player stays when the heaven C mode ends, and the expectation for shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the number of ceiling games is "32 games". Since it is set to, it is a relatively advantageous mode in that sense. However, the expectation for shifting to the heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). That is, when the heaven C mode ends, it is positioned as a mode for maintaining (guaranteeing) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time in order to prevent the deterioration of the interest caused by it.

The heaven A mode may also include a pseudo-bonus (in the case of a specification in which the AT state is continued by a decision to extend (add) during the AT state, the extension (addition)). It is a mode in which the same can be expected (the same applies hereinafter), the probability of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), the number of ceiling games is set to "32 games", and the ceiling is also expected. It is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability that the mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to a medium level. Although not shown in FIG. 6, for example, a setting difference may be provided for the ceiling mode loop rate. For example, when the set value is an odd number (1,3,5), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the set value is an even number (2,4,6), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%. The lottery value can be set so as to be, or the lottery value can be set so that the higher the set value is, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate is. The same applies to the heaven B mode and the heaven C mode, which will be described later, and a setting difference can be provided in the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which pseudo-bonus can be expected to be in a row, and the expectation of shifting to pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Fig. 7 below), and the number of ceiling games is "32 games". It is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set high. That is, it is a mode that is even more advantageous than the heaven A mode in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which you can expect a series of pseudo-bonus, and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Fig. 7 below), and the number of ceiling games is "32 games." It is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to be considerably high. That is, the mode is more advantageous than the heaven A mode and the heaven B mode in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate. The heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, and the heaven C mode can be collectively referred to as the "heaven mode".

It should be noted that each of the above modes is merely an example, and the mode configuration is not limited to this. It is possible to set a mode other than each of the above-mentioned modes, or it is possible not to set some of the above-mentioned modes.

Further, up to this point, the non-advantageous section has been described as having a relatively lower advantage than the advantageous section, but the relationship between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the non-advantageous section, the rate of transition to the increasing section is higher or the average number of games required to shift to the increasing section is shorter than in the case where at least one or more modes are set in the advantageous section. It is also possible to make a specification such as a squeeze, or a specification in which a non-advantageous section is most likely to be an increase section. By doing so, there is an incentive to play the game even in a state where it is confirmed that the section is not advantageous, such as after changing the setting, so that it is a motivation to start the game even when the store is opened. In addition, even if the lighting of the section lamp ends when 32 games have passed after the end of the pseudo bonus, it is not determined that the state will be the most disadvantageous, so that the motivation for continuing the game even in such a case. It becomes. Further, up to this point, the effect section has been described as a gaming state in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, but a disadvantageous aspect as compared with the increase section (for example, the frequency of notification is reduced or the target of notification is targeted). If it is (such as changing the role to be), it is possible to set the game state in which the information of the stop operation is notified.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of the first gaming machine. In the production section (normal game), first, a pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game by referring to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Specifically, during the game after the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (c) is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and the advantageous section winning sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination. At a predetermined timing of, it is determined whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In addition, in (c) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means not shifting to the pseudo-bonus, and "winning (this time game)" means shifting from this game to the pseudo-bonus. "Winning (next game)" means shifting to a pseudo bonus from the next game.

In the first gaming machine, if the "winning (current game)" is determined, the game is started at the start of the current game, and if the "winning (next game)" is determined, the game is started at the start of the next game. After the operation (stop operation) is invalidated for a certain period of time and the reel effect ("red 7 aligned" effect) in which the "red 7" symbols are displayed in the main display window 4 is performed during the invalid period. , If it is necessary to notify the information of the stop operation in the game in which the pseudo bonus is started and the "Red 7 match" effect is performed, at least the invalid period ends and the game operation (stop operation) is effective. (It may be before that, but it is not the timing before the above-mentioned random delay processing is started), the information of the stop operation is notified.

In the production section (normal game), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. It should be noted that this transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo-bonus, or may be a mode after the end of the pseudo-bonus. In addition, as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery described later will be performed. (At the time of winning) and mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) will not be held.

In the production section (normal game), if it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), for each game (more specifically, "F_replay A" or "F_replay"). In the game that wins "B"), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Specifically, during the game (next time) after the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (c) is referred to, the winning combination is determined, and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined according to the winning combination. At a predetermined timing (before the start of the game), it is determined whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

In the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (c), "passing lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, rather than "passing lip 1" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In this case, the percentage of decisions to shift to a pseudo-bonus is higher. However, the mode in which "Tsu Lip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsu Lip 1" is not limited to this. For example, if "passing lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, it may be decided to shift to the pseudo bonus with a predetermined probability, but "passing lip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. If so, it may not be possible to decide to move to a pseudo-bonus.

In the production section (normal game), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. It should be noted that this transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo-bonus, or may be a mode after the end of the pseudo-bonus. Further, as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), when it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) described later is not performed.

In the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f), "passing lip 2" was determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, rather than "passing lip 1" was determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In the case, the rate at which it is decided to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player is higher. However, the mode in which "Tsu Lip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsu Lip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Through Lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, it may be decided to shift to the mode relatively advantageous to the player with a predetermined probability, but as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, " When the "passing lip 1" is determined, it may not be possible to determine to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

In the production section (normal game), if it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the number of ceiling games is updated (addition method or subtraction method may be used), and the ceiling game. When the number reaches the number of ceiling games associated with the current mode (or predetermined at the time of transition to the advantageous section, etc.), it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus. In this case, it is possible to make sure that the "winning (current game)" is decided, or it is possible to make sure that the "winning (next game)" is decided. Also, any of these can be determined by lottery.

In the production section (normal game), when it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus due to the arrival of the number of ceiling games, a mode transition lottery (at the time of the ceiling) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode. It should be noted that this transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo-bonus, or may be a mode after the end of the pseudo-bonus.

The processing related to the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest is the same processing content, so the same lottery table and control flow. Can be controlled using. In addition, the processing related to the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of the sub flag, and the rest is the same processing content, so the same lottery table and control flow are used. Can be controlled.

In addition, if "winning (this time game)" is not provided as the type of winning of the pseudo bonus, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section has already been decided at the timing when the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined, and also. Since the number of ceiling games can also be updated, the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), and the pseudo-bonus transfer process at the time of reaching the ceiling can be performed together in one process. can. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) can be collectively performed in one process.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of the first gaming machine. As described above, in the production section (normal game), when it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus and the pseudo bonus is started (“pseudo bonus start” in FIG. 5), it shifts to the increase section (pseudo bonus). .. Further, as described above, in the production section (normal game), when the game is controlled to the end A mode or the end B mode and the game of 32 games is digested without shifting to the pseudo bonus (in FIG. 5, "the end of the advantageous section". (Via End A / B) ”), shift to a non-advantageous section. Further, when the condition of the limit processing shown in FIG. 16 described later is satisfied, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (“end of advantageous section (limit processing)” in FIG. 5), and as a result, Move to a non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a ceiling shortening lottery is performed when the pseudo-bonus is started. Specifically, the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (e) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the number of ceiling games after the end of the pseudo bonus according to the current mode. In FIG. 8 (e), "non-winning" means that the number of ceiling games is not shortened, and "winning (number of ceiling games = 0 update)" means that the number of ceiling games is not shortened, regardless of the mode after the pseudo bonus ends. , Means that the number of ceiling games to be set is set to "0" (shortened). The ceiling shortening lottery can be performed not only when the pseudo-bonus is started, but also every game during the pseudo-bonus.

If it is decided not to shorten the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling shortening lottery, and if you do not have the 1G consecutive stock described later when the pseudo bonus ends, the number of ceiling games according to the current mode Is set (in the end mode, the advantageous section ends after 32 games have elapsed (cleared accordingly), so it is not set, but the number of ceiling games may be temporarily set here). , The pseudo-bonus ends (“pseudo-bonus end” in FIG. 5), and the game shifts to the production section (normal game). On the other hand, if it is decided to shorten the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling shortening lottery, "0 games" is set as the number of ceiling games when the pseudo bonus ends. As a result, the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus is started when the number of ceiling games is reached, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in the game in which "fixed role" or "middle che" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section). .. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. It should be noted that the transition destination mode may be determined even when the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section other than the above is determined, but in this case, in principle, the mode relatively disadvantageous compared to the current mode is migrated. In order not to be determined as the destination mode, another mode transition lottery table having a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) may be referred to.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in the game that wins "F_replay A" or "F_replay B"). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In this case, as in the above, in principle, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is a lottery value so that a mode relatively disadvantageous to the current mode is not determined as the transition destination mode. It may be referred to another mode transition lottery table with a different mode.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), 1G consecutive lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (d) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to generate the 1G consecutive lottery according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section or the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Will be done. In addition, in (d) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means that 1G series is not generated, and "winning (1G series + 1)" has one right to generate 1G series (1G series stock). It means that it is given (1G continuous stock counter is added by 1). A plurality of (maximum 255) 1G continuous stocks can be stocked (stored) by the 1G continuous stock counter. Therefore, a plurality of 1G continuous stocks may be given in one pseudo bonus. It is also possible to configure the 1G consecutive lottery table so that a plurality of 1G consecutive stocks can be given by one 1G consecutive lottery.

If the value of the 1G series stock counter is 1 or more (that is, if you have 1G series stock) at the end of the pseudo bonus, one 1G series stock is consumed (1G series stock counter is used). 1 is subtracted), and the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus according to the right of 1G continuous stock is started, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery is not performed. On the other hand, if the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is not 1 or more at the end of the pseudo bonus (that is, if you do not have 1G consecutive stock), or if you have not won the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, The number of ceiling games is set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous section ends after 32 games have elapsed (cleared accordingly), so it is not set, but the number of ceiling games is provisional here. It may be set), the pseudo-bonus ends (“pseudo-bonus end” in FIG. 5), and the game shifts to the production section (normal game).

If you win the ceiling shortening lottery and also have 1G consecutive stock, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery will be given priority, and after the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the 1G consecutive stock will be given. It may be executed, or the 1G continuous stock may be prioritized, and after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G continuous stock is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening may be executed. In the latter case, it is sufficient to separately store the information that can be carried forward that there is a ceiling shortening.

In the first gaming machine, as an example, the configuration of the increase section (pseudo-bonus) is that it continues for "55 games" and a maximum of 275 cards can be obtained, but the configuration of the pseudo-bonus is limited to this. No. For example, the pseudo-bonus is configured as a "pseudo-BB (big bonus)", and "pseudo-RB (regular bonus)", which is a pseudo-bonus that can be continued for "22 games" and can acquire up to 110 cards, is installed. You may do so. In this case, when it is decided to transfer to the pseudo-bonus (grant the right) in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transfer lottery, when the ceiling is reached, and in the 1G continuous lottery, the type (for example, "pseudo-BB") is used. Whether to do it or to make it a "pseudo RB") may be determined with a predetermined probability (for example, 50% each). The value of the "pseudo RB" may be different from that of the "pseudo BB" (more specifically, the value is lower than that of the "pseudo BB"). Therefore, for example, the number of continuous games is "pseudo". It is the same as "BB", but by setting the bell navigation rate (probability of notification that information on the stop operation is notified) to be low, it is possible to make a difference in the maximum number of sheets that can be acquired and make the values different. Further, when starting the "pseudo RB", a reel effect in which the "BAR" symbols are displayed in the main display window 4 or a reel effect in which "red 7-red 7-BAR" is displayed is performed. You can do it like this. Furthermore, the increased interval is not limited to what is configured as a pseudo-bonus. For example, it can be configured as an AT state or an ART state in which the number of continuous games (game period) can be changed.

Further, if the execution condition of the limit processing shown in FIG. 16 described later is satisfied during the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (in FIG. 5, "end of advantageous section by limit processing"). ), As a result, it shifts to a non-advantageous section.

In the first gaming machine, the above-mentioned game flow is basically based on the premise that the game is played in a three-card bet state. Therefore, when the game is played in the state of two bets, for example, various lottery using (a) to (d) of FIG. 7, (e) and (f) of FIG. 8 and the like are not performed, and the lottery is not performed. The number of ceiling games is also not updated. Further, when the game is played in the two-card bet state during the pseudo-bonus, the medal is not increased in the two-card bet state, so that the pseudo-bonus is not an increase section. That is, the first gaming machine is configured so that the player is basically disadvantaged when playing a game in a two-card bet state.

Here, when the game is played in a two-card bet state, a lottery related to the advantageous section (AT) (for example, (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8 and the like are used. Although various lottery) and processing (for example, updating the number of ceiling games, etc.) are not performed, the above-mentioned advantageous section game number counter for the number of games limiter and the above-mentioned advantageous section payout number counter for the payout number limiter are updated. Should be done. Since these limiters have a function of appropriately suppressing gambling by limiting the number of games staying in the advantageous section and the upper limit of the number of acquired cards, these counters are not updated in the two-card bet state. If this is the case, the number of games staying in the advantageous section and the upper limit of the number of acquired games may be exceeded due to the intervention of the game in the two-card bet state, and as a result, the gambling may not be appropriately suppressed. To get. Therefore, it is desirable that the limiter counter is configured to be updatable every game regardless of the number of bets.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the above-mentioned game flow is basically based on the premise that the gaming is performed in a non-bonus state. Therefore, when the game is played in the bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), for example, various lottery using (a) to (d) of FIG. 7, (e) and (f) of FIG. It will not be played, and the number of ceiling games will not be updated. In addition, when the bonus state is reached during the pseudo-bonus, the bonus state is configured as a state in which the expected increase value of medals is lower than the non-bonus state (more specifically, the non-bonus state 3-card bet state). , During the pseudo-bonus may not be the increase section. That is, the first gaming machine is configured so that the player may be disadvantaged if he / she plays a game in a bonus state.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, it is recommended to play the game in the state of three bets between the 2BB flags (in the present embodiment, the state of three bets between the two BB flags is the "recommended game". It may be described as a "state" and other states as a "deprecated gaming state"). That is, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus winning combination only in the 2-card bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 2BB between the 2BB flags wins only in the 2-card bet state and wins in the 3-card bet state. It is not configured. Further, 3BB is a bonus winning combination only in the 3-card bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 3BB between the 3BB flags wins only in the 3-card bet state and does not win in the 2-card bet state. Further, there is no case where 3BB wins between the 2BB flags, and there is no case where 2BB wins between the 3BB flags.

Then, in the first gaming machine, using these configurations, for example, 2BB is won in a two-card bet state between non-flags (without winning 2BB) to make a twoBB flag interval, and then a three-card bet state. If the game is played in, it is possible to play the game in the above-mentioned recommended game state without worrying about whether or not to win the bonus role.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the ceiling shortening lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Looking at the ceiling shortened lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (e), when the current mode is one of the guaranteed mode, the heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, and the heaven C mode, 1 The ceiling shortening lottery is won with a probability of / 8 (32/256), while the ceiling shortening lottery is not won in other modes. That is, in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games", and in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is larger than that, the "32 games" may be shortened. The number of ceiling games is not shortened.

Even in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is larger than "32 games", the number of ceiling games has a lower probability (for example, 1/64) than in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games". May be determined to be shortened.

Further, the mode of reducing the number of ceiling games is not limited to the above. For example, if "32 games" is shortened to a smaller number of predetermined games (0 to 31 games), the same effect can be exerted, so that the number of games to be shortened when the ceiling shortening lottery is won is further determined. Alternatively, in the ceiling shortening lottery, the number of games to be shortened may be determined in advance.

Further, the opportunity for the ceiling shortening lottery to be performed is not limited to the above. For example, during the pseudo-bonus, a ceiling shortening lottery may be performed for each game. Also, in the advantageous section (normal game), when the current mode is one of the guaranteed mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, the ceiling shortening lottery is performed for each game. You may do it. In these cases, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section may be referred to to determine whether or not to win the ceiling shortening lottery.

Further, as described above, in the first gaming machine, 1G continuous lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the 1G continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (d), the 1G continuous stock may be given regardless of the current mode. That is, regardless of whether or not the mode is such that the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the right to continue the pseudo bonus can be granted.

The mode of granting the right is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the 1G continuous lottery is prevented in consideration of the fact that the ceiling shortening lottery is performed, and the number of ceiling games is larger than "32 games". It may be possible to prevent the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high by allowing the 1G continuous lottery to be performed at this time.

Further, the opportunity for the 1G continuous lottery to be performed is not limited to the above. For example, the 1G continuous lottery may be performed in the advantageous section (directing section) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G continuous stock stocked as a result may be consumed in the next pseudo bonus.

Although not shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the first gaming machine is in an advantageous state at the start of the pseudo-bonus or during the pseudo-bonus when the current mode is the heaven mode. A special bonus medium effect to suggest that there is a certain probability is executed. Therefore, when the effect during the special bonus is executed, it can be expected that the ceiling shortening lottery will be executed. In addition, the effect during this special bonus may be executed with a 100% probability when the ceiling shortening lottery is won. In this way, for example, if the special bonus mid-effect is performed at the start of the pseudo-bonus, it is suggested that you are at least staying in heaven mode, and you expect that you may have won the ceiling shortening lottery. It can make you feel. Further, the effect during the special bonus may be executed with a predetermined probability or with a probability of 100% even when the 1G continuous lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. In this way, (1) heaven mode only, (2) heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning, (3) heaven mode + 1G consecutive winning, (4) heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning + 1G consecutive winning, (5) 1G consecutive winning It is possible to suggest various possibilities such as winning only, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, when it is determined that the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) is controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) ends (for example). , In heaven mode), the period may be further shortened, so that even if the playing period of a series of advantageous sections is limited (for example, when the limit processing is executed), the player It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating by making it possible to play the game in a state where the degree of advantage is as high as possible.

Further, in the first gaming machine, even if it is not determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends (for example, in the case of the end mode), the right (for example, in the case of the end mode). Since the advantageous state may be started again by granting (1G continuous stock), it is possible to raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

Further, although not shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the "determined combination" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section (that is, "F_determined cherry" or "F_". If "reach" is determined as an internal winning combination) and it is decided to shift to heaven C mode as a result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, there is a 1/2 probability (this probability is arbitrary). It is possible to execute a special lock effect. In addition, even when the sub-flag "middle check" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined (that is, when "F_middle cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination), the player also has the "fixed combination" as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Since you can receive the same benefits as when "" is determined, when the advantageous section winning sub-flag "Middle Che" is determined, when the "fixed combination" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Similarly, a special lock effect may be made feasible.

Here, since the "fixed role" is a role that also confirms the pseudo bonus transition (see (c) in FIG. 7), the player shifts to the pseudo bonus and shifts to the heaven C mode when the special lock effect is executed. It has become possible to recognize that there was a problem, and it has become very interesting for players. The special lock effect is configured as, for example, an effect in which the game operation (stop operation) is invalidated for about 20 seconds at the start of the game. During this period, a special reel effect such that each reel vibrates or rotates in the reverse direction may be performed, or a special image or the like that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the main effect display unit 21. You may do it. Further, a special music that is not normally output may be output. Of course, it is also possible to produce by combining these. Further, although the game operation is not invalidated, these effects can be performed until the player performs the next game operation (that is, the effects are executed to the end or canceled halfway. It is also possible to leave it to the player to decide whether to proceed with the game).

However, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 16 described later, for example, even if the player stays in the heaven C mode, the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated by executing the limit process. In some cases, it may not be desirable to perform the above-mentioned special lock effect many times.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous sections. Specifically, if it is decided to execute the special lock effect first in a series of advantageous sections, the special lock effect is executed, but the same conditions are satisfied within the same series of advantageous sections thereafter. Even if it is established, it is controlled so that the special lock effect is not executed. As a method, once the special lock effect is executed, information indicating that fact is stored, and if the information is stored within the same series of advantageous sections after that, the special lock is originally performed. It may be possible not to make a decision as to whether or not to execute the effect, or the decision is made, but if the information is stored, it indicates that the decision result is executed. However, it may be rewritten to indicate that it is not executed. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous section ends.

The mode in which the execution of the special lock effect is restricted is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit of the number of times that the execution of the special lock effect is restricted may be set as "2 times" or "3 times" instead of "1 time". That is, the execution of the special lock effect is restricted, but the upper limit may be set to a plurality of times. This can be appropriately set according to the expected value of the ball output per special lock effect.

Further, the conditions for determining whether or not the special lock effect is executed are not limited to those described above. That is, in the above, the mode transition is performed with the winning of the "fixed role" as an opportunity, and it is determined whether or not the special lock effect is executed on condition that the mode is the heaven C mode. However, for example, since the mode may shift to heaven C mode due to an opportunity other than the winning of the "fixed role" (see (f) in FIG. 8), a special lock effect is also executed in these cases. It is assumed that a decision is made as to whether or not to play, and the special lock effect is executed with a predetermined probability (the probability may be the same as when the winning of the "fixed role" is triggered, or it may be a different probability). It may be decided that it will be done.

In addition, for example, it is assumed that whether or not the special lock effect is executed is first determined by the winning of the "fixed role", and when it is decided that the special lock effect is executed, heaven. You may shift to C mode. That is, the special lock effect may be executed according to the decision to shift to the heaven C mode, or the heaven C mode may be executed according to the decision to execute the special lock effect. You may want to move to.

Further, for example, the degree of progress of the game in the advantageous section may be adopted as a condition for determining whether or not the special lock effect is executed. For example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later is less than "750", or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter or the control payout number counter described later is less than "1201". , When the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later becomes "750" or more after the determination of whether or not the special lock effect is executed is performed as described above, or the advantage described later. When the value of the section payout counter or the control payout counter becomes "1201" or more, it is not determined whether or not the special lock effect is executed in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter. You can also do it.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the gaming period of a series of advantageous sections is limited to a certain period (see FIG. 16 described later). Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if control information having a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, heaven C mode) is set a plurality of times, a special effect (for example, a special lock effect) is set each time. Is controlled so that it is never done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game while suppressing the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is determined that the pachinko machine is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) in a series of advantageous sections, triggered by the winning of a specific combination (for example, "determined combination"). , Control information with a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, heaven C mode) may be set. Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if such a case occurs a plurality of times, it is controlled so that the special effect (for example, the special lock effect) is not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game while suppressing the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine the secondary information (for example, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section) according to the determined internal winning combination, and the secondary information according to the combination of the displayed symbols (for example). For example, it is possible to determine (sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section), and whether or not to give an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information on the player's stop operation is notified according to the determined secondary information. It is possible to decide.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, not only when the internal winning combination is determined, but also when the combination of symbols is displayed, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation regarding the granting of an advantageous state, so that the advantageous state can be obtained. It is possible to diversify the playability related to granting.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the combination of the displayed symbols are both managed as common secondary information, so that it is in an advantageous state. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the bet game value is the first amount (for example, 3 cards), the first special combination (for example, 3BB) can be won, while the second special combination (for example, 3 cards) can be won. , 2BB) is not possible to win. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount (for example, two cards), the second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. In addition, when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won, a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "upward right rip") is displayed in the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags), and the first 2 It is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel rip") in the special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) (see FIG. 15 described later).

Then, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine different secondary information depending on whether the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed or the combination of specific symbols is displayed. That is, in the first gaming machine, even if the same specific combination is determined, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed depending on which special permission state is set, which is advantageous. It is possible to further diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition of the state.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed.

Here, in the first gaming machine, since the combination of predetermined symbols and the combination of specific symbols are both combinations of symbols related to the re-game, it is said that the re-game is activated regardless of which one is displayed. The same benefits will be granted.

The mode of granting the same privilege is not limited to the above. For example, a specific role is configured as a specific small role related to the addition of game value. Then, when winning a specific small winning combination, for example, in the first special permission state, one card (this value is arbitrary and may be another value equal to or less than the bet game value, or bet. The combination of predetermined symbols to which the game value of (which may exceed the value of the game value) (the combination of the symbols related to the addition of the game value corresponding to the "right-up lip") is displayed, and the second special permission is given. If it is in the state, the combination of specific symbols to which the same number of game values as when the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed (the combination of symbols related to the addition of the game value corresponding to the "parallel lip") is displayed. You may.

In addition, both the combination of predetermined symbols and the combination of specific symbols are "off" symbol combinations (although it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state, so the symbols are different from the pure "off" cases. It may be configured as a combination of identifiable symbols). Even in this case, the values are still the same.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is set. It is possible to diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition of an advantageous state. In addition, in a game in which a specific role is determined, the same privilege is given regardless of the special permission state, so even if the game playability is changed, the player has a direct disadvantage. It is possible to prevent it from being covered.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won, it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode in the case of the second special permission state, and it is possible to display a specific combination. It may be configured so that it is not possible to display a combination of specific symbols when the stop operation is not performed in the embodiment.

Then, at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, it may be possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state. When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to make the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state different between when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and when the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed. good.

In addition, when a specific combination is won, a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in the case of the first special permission state, and the stop operation is performed in the specific mode in the second special permission state. Is performed, a combination of specific symbols may be displayed, and when the stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, a predetermined combination of symbols may be displayed.

In this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (in the present embodiment, this may be described as "pressing position ○", "pressing position correct answer", etc.). When the combination of specific symbols is displayed and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be explained as "pressing position ×", "incorrect answer of pressing position", etc.), the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed due to the stop operation (timing) of the player, so that the player can concentrate more on the game and improve the interest of the game. can.

Further, as described above, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination, and in this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (when the pressing position is ○), the specific symbol is used. The combination is displayed and a predetermined number of game values are given, and when the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (when the pressing position ×), the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values are given. can do. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Further, the predetermined number may be given more game value than the specific number. Further, the predetermined number may be given a game value less than the specific number. Further, at least one of a combination of specific symbols and a combination of predetermined symbols may be used as a combination of symbols when a dropout occurs. That is, either a predetermined number or a specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state be changed due to (timing) the player's stop operation, but also the content of the direct privilege can be changed, so that the player can change. It is possible to concentrate more on the game, further diversify the playability, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, if there is only one type of specific combination, the timing at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate is also limited. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations at different timings at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. For example, in one reel, when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing, the combination of specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the timing is other than the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed. When the first specific combination is not displayed and the timing of the stop operation is the second timing different from the first timing, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation. And when the timing is other than the second timing, the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed without proper stop operation, and the timing of the stop operation is the first timing and the second timing. When the third timing is different, the combination of specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the timing is other than the third timing, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed without the appropriate stop operation. A third specific combination is provided, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

Further, in this case, the specific combination is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct answer pressing order), and when the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of the incorrect answer pressing order), the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed due to the player's stop operation (procedure), so that the player can concentrate more on the game and improve the interest of the game. can.

In addition, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination as described above. In this case, when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct answer pressing order), a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of games are played. When the value is given and the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of incorrect batting order), a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values can be given. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Further, the predetermined number may be given more game value than the specific number. Further, the predetermined number may be given a game value less than the specific number. Further, at least one of a combination of specific symbols and a combination of predetermined symbols may be used as a combination of symbols when a dropout occurs. That is, either a predetermined number or a specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state be changed due to the stop operation (procedure) of the player, but also the content of the direct privilege can be changed, so that the player can change. It is possible to concentrate more on the game, further diversify the playability, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, if there is only one type of specific combination, the appropriate batting order is also limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations with different appropriate batting orders. For example, when the left first stop is performed, the combination of specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the middle / right first stop is performed, the specific symbol combination is not displayed without the appropriate stop operation. When it is the first specific combination and the middle first stop, the combination of the specific symbol is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when it is the left / right first stop, the specific symbol is not an appropriate stop operation. The combination is not displayed. When the second specific combination is not displayed and the right first stop is performed, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the left / middle first stop is performed, the appropriate stop operation is not performed. There is a third specific combination that does not display the combination of specific symbols, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

Up to this point, in the unit game that wins the specific combination, the transition determination process to the advantageous section in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing and batting order of the stop operation) and the advantageous section. Although it was stated that the judgment process regarding the granting of the advantageous state in (including the pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the mode transition lottery, and other processes for changing the advantage of the gaming situation in the advantageous section) is changed. Of these, changes that are relatively disadvantageous to the player (which may result in disadvantage) can be regarded as the above-mentioned penalties. Therefore, when such a change occurs, an arbitrary effect (warning notification) for calling attention may be generated.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won, it is more likely that an advantageous state will be given when the combination of specific symbols is displayed than when the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. It has become. That is, on the premise of betting three cards, the second special permission state (for example, between the 2BB flags) is given preferential treatment over the first special permission state (for example, between the 3BB flags). Is.

Further, in the first game machine, when a predetermined combination (for example, "pushing order bell B" described later) is won, a combination of assigned symbols (for example, eight payouts) can be given regardless of the batting order in the first special permission state. The combination of symbols that becomes If the correct answer is not in the correct batting order, the combination of the given symbols will not be displayed, and the game value will not be given. It is configured to display a combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols to be paid out). That is, if the operation of the advantageous state is not taken into consideration, the first special permission state is a state in which the granting of the game value is given preferential treatment over the second special permission state.

That is, if the player plays a game in a three-card bet state between the 3BB flags even in a deprecated gaming state, the probability of granting an advantageous state is not given preferential treatment, but the game value when the advantageous state is not operating. Since the grant probability is given preferential treatment, the game can be advanced in a state where the difference in the inclination value between when the advantageous state is operating and when it is not operating is relatively small. As described above, although the possibility that the player can rapidly increase the game value is reduced, the state in which the player's game value is difficult to decrease can be defined as, for example, a "stable state".

On the other hand, if the player plays a game in the recommended gaming state, the probability of granting the advantageous state is given preferential treatment, but the probability of granting the game value when the advantageous state is not operating is not given preferential treatment, so that the advantageous state operates. The game can be advanced in a state where the difference in the inclination value between when it is operating and when it is not operating is relatively large. As described above, a state in which the player is likely to be able to rapidly increase the game value but the player's game value is likely to decrease can be defined as, for example, a "rough wave state".

Here, the method for creating two states, a stable state and a rough wave state, is not limited to the above. For example, in the "stable state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the transition probability of the pseudo-bonus is higher than in the "rough wave state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of the heaven mode is higher than in the "rough wave state". Lower. Further, in the "rough wave state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the transition probability of the pseudo-bonus is lower than in the "stable state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of the heaven mode is lower than in the "stable state". Increase. In this way, in the "stable state", it is easy to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time, but it is difficult to make a series of villas. Can be created. As described above, the stop control of the predetermined combination may be changed between the 2BB flags and the 3BB flags, or may be different from this (that is, no preferential treatment is given between the 3BB flags).

[5-2. First game machine design layout configuration]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 9, the symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first gaming machine, "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "red blank", "yellow blank", "red blank", " Ten kinds of symbols of "white blank 1" and "white blank 2" are arranged at the positions shown in FIG. 9 on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Further, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[5-3. Internal winning combination of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. 11 to 14 are diagrams showing an example of the symbol combination table of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination of the first gaming machine, the stop operation mode, the display combination, and the like. That is, in the following, any symbol is used according to the type of the internal winning combination drawn in the first gaming machine and the stop operation mode (that is, batting order, stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won. (Display combination, winning combination, stop display mode, display result, etc.) will be described.

First, in the first gaming machine, in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 26) described later, each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 10 wins with the probability (lottery value / probability denominator: 65536) shown in FIG. It should be noted that the combinations of symbols that are permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. Further, in FIGS. 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols related to the small combination. Is shown.

"F_2BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a two-card bet state in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), while a game is played in a three-card bet state. It is configured so that if it is broken, it will not be decided as an internal winning role. In a game in which "F_2BB" is won in a two-card bet state, or in a game in which "missing" is made between the 2BB flags, "BB01" is displayed if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, and the 2BB state (based on 2BB). It shifts to the bonus state). On the other hand, even between the 2BB flags, "BB01" may not be displayed in the 3-card bet state.

"F_3BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a 3-card bet state in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), while a game is played in a 2-card bet state. It is configured so that if it is broken, it will not be decided as an internal winning role. In the game where "F_3BB" wins in the 3-card bet state, or in the game where "missing" is made between the 3BB flags, "BB02" is displayed if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, and the 3BB state (based on 3BB). It shifts to the bonus state). On the other hand, even between the 3BB flags, "BB02" may not be displayed in the two-card bet state.

In the 2BB state and the 3BB state, the lottery value in the column of "bonus state" is referred to in FIG. 10, and the internal winning combination is determined (the number of possible game starts is only 3 bets). During the 2BB state and the 3BB state, it is always controlled to the state in which the RB, which is the first-class special accessory, is operating (RB state). In the RB state, control is repeated such that when two prizes are generated or two games are played after the operation, the RB state is once terminated and then activated again. Further, in the first gaming machine, the end condition of the 2BB state is defined as that more than one medal has been paid out in the 2BB state, and the end condition of the 3BB state is the end condition of more than 176 medals in the 3BB state. Is stipulated to have been paid out.

Here, when the 2BB state or the 3BB state ends, the special mode transition process is performed. For example, if the mode is changed to the bonus state (the mode is not changed during the bonus state, which is synonymous with the end of the bonus state), that is, if the current mode is "start mode", the transition destination The mode of is "start mode". If the current mode is any of "normal A mode", "normal B mode", "heaven preparation mode", and "chance mode", the destination mode is "normal A mode". If the current mode is either "end A mode" or "end B mode", the transition destination mode is "end A mode". If the current mode is any of "guaranteed mode", "heaven A mode", "heaven B mode", and "heaven C mode", the transition destination mode is "guaranteed mode".

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, between the non-flags and between the 2BB flags, either "REP64" to "REP72" (these are the "replay" symbols in the lower straight line or the middle straight line. Since they are to be displayed, they can be collectively referred to as "parallel rip". Further, "REP64" to "REP71" can be collectively referred to as "lower rip", and "REP72" is "middle rip". (Can be called "rip") is displayed, and a replay is given. On the other hand, between the 3BB flags, "REP73" (this can be referred to as "right-up rip" because the "replay" symbol is displayed upward to the right) regardless of the stop operation mode. It is displayed and a replay is given.

"F_Replay B" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, "parallel rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in any state, and a replay is given.

"F_cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, the "middle rip" is displayed and a replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing position is at least for the left reel 3L, either "REP28" or "REP60" to "REP63" (these are to display the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L at the bottom. Therefore, these can be collectively referred to as "cherry lip"), and a replay is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position ×, other rips (for example, “REP57” to “REP59”) are displayed, and a replay is given.

The "F_confirmed cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, the "middle rip" is displayed and a replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", and if the pushing position is at least for the left reel 3L, any of "REP42" to "REP56" (these are). On the left reel 3L, the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the lower row, and for example, a symbol such as "REP42" that can raise the expectations of the player on other reels is also displayed. "Confirmed cherry lip") is displayed, and a replay is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position x, other rips (for example, the above-mentioned "cherry rip" and "REP29" to "REP41") are displayed, and a replay is given. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

"F_middle cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, the "middle rip" is displayed and a replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", and if the pushing position is at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP15" to "REP19" (these are). Since the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the middle row on the left reel 3L, these can be collectively referred to as "middle row cherry lip"), and a replay is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position ×, other rips (for example, “REP20” to “REP27”) are displayed, and a replay is given. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

The "F_reach eye" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, the "middle rip" is displayed and a replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", any of "REP01" to "REP14" regardless of the stop operation mode (these are customarily a player). It is configured as a combination of symbols that can definitely notify (or suggest) the transition to a state that is advantageous to the player, and these can be collectively referred to as "reach eye lip"), and the replay is displayed. Granted. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

"F_watermelon" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, any of "FRU10" to "FRU12" (since these are for displaying "watermelon" symbols side by side, these are displayed. "Watermelon") is displayed, and if a 3-card bet state, 3 medals are paid out, and if a 2-card bet state, 2 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, either “FRU08” or “FRU09” (these are not displayed side by side with the “watermelon” symbols, so these can be collectively referred to as “watermelon spills”). Is displayed and one medal is paid out. It should be noted that, in the case of the pressed position ×, it is also possible to generate a dropout so that the number of medals paid out is 0.

"F_Bell 123A1", "F_Bell 123A2", "F_Bell 132A1", "F_Bell 132A2", "F_Bell 213A1", "F_Bell 213A2", "F_Bell 231A1", "F_Bell 231A2", "F_ "Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" are configured to be determinable as internal winnings regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In addition, these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell A".

As shown in FIG. 15, the "pushing order bell A" is a small combination of 6 choices (the batting order of any one of "batting order 1" to "batting order 6" is the correct batting order). If the internal winning combination is determined and the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct batting order, the "right-down bell" ("FRU03"), "upper bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02") ), "Middle bell" ("FRU04"), "Right-up bell" ("FRU05"), "Koyama bell" ("FRU06"), and "Lower bell" ("FRU07"). Is displayed, 8 medals are paid out if the bet is 3 cards, and 2 medals are paid out if the bet is 2 cards. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the pressing position is ○ with a probability of 1/2 in the remaining stopping operations, and the pressing position is ○. If there is, any of the winning "one-card combination" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") is displayed, and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the medals will not be paid out due to omission. If the first stop operation is not correct, there is a 1/8 chance that the pressing position will be ○ in the remaining stop operations, and if the pressing position is ○, any of the winning "one-card combination" will be displayed. One medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the medals will not be paid out due to omission.

"F_Bell 123B1", "F_Bell 123B2", "F_Bell 132B1", "F_Bell 132B2", "F_Bell 213B1", "F_Bell 213B2", "F_Bell 231B1", "F_Bell 231B2", "F_" The "bell 312B1", "F_bell 312B2", "F_bell 321B1", and "F_bell 321B2" are configured to be determinable as internal winnings regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In addition, these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell B".

As shown in FIG. 15, the "push order bell B" does not have a push order small combination between the 3BB flags in the two-card bet state and the three-card bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, any of the above "bells" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, 8 medals will be paid out if the 3-card bet state, and 2 if the 2-card bet state. One medal is paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the "pushing order bell B" is pushed in a state other than between the 3BB flags in the 3-bet state (between the non-flags in the 3-bet state and between the 2BB flags in the 3-bet state). It is a small winning combination, and if it is decided as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct answer pressing order, one of the above "bells" will be displayed and eight medals will be displayed. It will be paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the pressing position is ○ with a probability of 1/2 in the remaining stopping operations, and the pressing position is ○. If there is, one of the winning "one-card combination" is displayed and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the medals will not be paid out due to omission. If the first stop operation is not correct, there is a 1/8 chance that the pressing position will be ○ in the remaining stop operations, and if the pressing position is ○, any of the winning "one-card combination" will be displayed. One medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the medals will not be paid out due to omission.

"8 F_RB combinations" are configured to be determinable as internal winning combinations in the bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, any of the above "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and eight medals are paid out.

"One F_RB combination" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, any of the above-mentioned "one-card combination" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and one card is displayed. Medal is paid out.

The correspondence between the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 10, the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, and the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 15, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. is only an example and is shown in these. The mode is not limited to the above.

For example, in the first gaming machine, "BB02" can be displayed when "BB01" is dropped and becomes "missing" in a 2-bet state where "BB01" can be displayed when it is pure "off". In the 3-bet state, when "BB02" is missed and becomes "missing", when it becomes "missing" due to being in the 3-bet state between the 2BB flags, it is in the 2-bet state between the 3BB flags. As a result, "off" may occur in various states, such as when "off" occurs, when "pushing order small winning combination" is missed and "out" occurs. Therefore, in order to make the combination of symbols displayed as "missing" different in some or all of these cases, the combination of these different symbols is specified in advance in the symbol combination table, and the internal winning combination is determined. By allowing the display as a "corresponding symbol combination" according to the situation, it is possible to make the combination of the symbols related to the "missing" displayed according to the state or the like different.

[5-4. Limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 16, the limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of each limit processing in the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 16, in the first gaming machine, normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), and quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) Each limit processing of the number of games) and the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is executed. Note that this is an example of executable limit processing, and it is possible to execute limit processing other than each of these limit processing, and some of these limit processing are executed. You can also prevent it from being done.

The normal limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous section are continuously played 1500 times). The advantageous section game number counter starts counting the number of games from the start of the advantageous section (including the effect section), and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The counting is completed and cleared (initialized). Further, the advantageous section game number counter counts the number of bets regardless of whether the number of bets is 2 or 3. Further, the advantageous section game number counter also counts in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

When the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates), the advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of whether it is in the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus), and the non-advantageous section is executed. To migrate to. At this time, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the production section or the increase section, information on the current mode, information on the game period of the pseudo-bonus, the number of ceiling games, and the presence / absence of ceiling shortening). All the information (information, various information obtained during the advantageous section such as the value of the 1G continuous stock counter, and various information necessary for controlling the advantageous section) are also cleared (initialized).

The normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the payout number counter in the advantageous section becomes "2401" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2400). In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase number (difference number)") from the time when the advantageous section (including the production section) is started, and is advantageous. When the section is terminated (including the termination due to the operation of the limit processing), the counting is terminated and cleared (initialized). Further, the advantageous section payout number counter counts the number of bets regardless of whether the number of bets is 2 or 3. Further, the advantageous section payout number counter counts even in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. In addition, the advantageous section payout counter counts appropriately according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-2" or "-3") when "missing" or "missing" occurs during the advantageous section. The value to be subtracted. Therefore, if the number of medals does not increase and decreases after the start of the advantageous section, it may become a negative value (or if it becomes a negative value, "0" is always maintained. Can also be configured to be). That is, the advantageous section payout number counter can count from the lowest point of the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section to the defined highest point (difference number: 2400).

When the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates), the advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of whether it is in the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus), and the non-advantageous section is executed. To migrate to. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes "1445" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous section are continuously played 1445 times). The control game number counter starts counting the number of games from the start of the advantageous section (including the effect section), and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The counting is completed and cleared (initialized). Further, the control game number counter counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. Further, the control game number counter counts the number when it is in the non-bonus state, and does not count it when it is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. However, the control game number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section game number counter.

When the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, during the increase section), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the pseudo bonus. When is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not in the pseudo-bonus (that is, in the production section), first, it is forcibly shifted to the pseudo-bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the pseudo-bonus is transferred by executing this special limit process (number of games). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the transition is made to the non-advantageous section. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

Here, while the value of the advantageous section game number counter where the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates) is "1500", the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates). Focusing on the point that the value of the control game number counter is "1445", in the first game machine, the maximum number of games (sustainable period) in the pseudo bonus is "55 games" (Fig.). 5), this difference takes into account the playable period during the pseudo-bonus.

That is, the normal limit process (number of games) is executed when the game is played for a predetermined regulation period in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit process (number of games) is executed immediately after the start of the pseudo-bonus or in the middle of the pseudo-bonus, the player feels distrust or loss, and the interest of the game is lowered. In some cases. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, special limit processing (number of games) is performed in the game before the continuous period (55 games) per increase section, compared to the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. By executing this, it is prevented that the pseudo bonus ends in the middle and the player feels distrust or loss.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of games) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit processing (number of games) is executed in the game before the continuous period (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) for each increase section 2 times before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. It may be done. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the continuation period (55 games) + grace period (2 games) per increase section is before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed in the game of. Further, for example, in the case of a specification such as passing through a precursor state before shifting to a pseudo bonus, and if the maximum number of games in this precursor state is "4 games", normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed in the game that is continuous (55 games) + maximum precursor period (4 games) before the game to be played. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operated) may be any timing as long as it is before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed, and is individual. It shall be possible to set as appropriate according to the game specifications and the like.

The special limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter becomes "2126" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2125). The control payout counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase (difference number)") from the time when the advantageous section (including the effect section) is started, which is advantageous. When the section is terminated (including the termination due to the operation of the limit processing), the counting is terminated and cleared (initialized). Further, the control payout number counter counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. Further, the control payout counter counts the number when it is in the non-bonus state, and does not count it when it is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

Further, in the control payout number counter, when a "missing" occurs during the advantageous section, a value to be appropriately counted is subtracted according to the actual payout number (for example, "-3"). However, the control payout counter does not cause "missing" (or difference) when "missing" occurs during the advantageous section (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum number of medals paid out). As a result, the number of medals paid out is counted. Specifically, for example, in a game in which a "push order bell A" is won with a 3-card bet, if the hitting order is appropriate, the number of medals paid out (maximum value) is "8" (the difference is "8"). On the other hand, if the hitting order is not appropriate, the number of medals to be paid out will be "1" (the difference is "-2") if the pressing position is appropriate, and if the pressing position is not appropriate. The number of medals to be paid out will be "0" (the difference is "-3") due to the omission, but the control payout counter will be the difference in any case in the game. +5 sheets "is counted.

Further, for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes larger than the value of the control payout number counter due to the operation of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, the value of the control payout number counter is advantageous. It is corrected to the value of the section payout counter. The control payout counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section payout counter.

When the special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates), if it is in the pseudo bonus (that is, if it is in the increase section), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly terminated in the middle. When is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not in the pseudo-bonus (that is, in the production section), first, it is forcibly shifted to the pseudo-bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the pseudo-bonus is transferred by executing this special limit process (number of payouts). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the transition to the non-advantageous section is performed. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

Here, while the value of the advantageous section payout number counter where the normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates) is "2401", the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates). Focusing on the point that the value of the control game number counter is "2126", in the first game machine, the maximum number of acquired cards (the amount of game value that can be granted) in the pseudo bonus is "275". (See FIG. 5), this difference takes into account the amount of game value that can be granted during the pseudo-bonus.

That is, the normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the game value corresponding to the predetermined regulated game value amount is given in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed immediately after or during the start of the pseudo bonus, the player feels distrust or loss, and the interest of the game is reduced. It may end up. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, a game value amount that is smaller than the game value amount that can be granted per increase section (275 sheets) is given to the game value amount that is normally executed by the limit process (number of payouts). By sometimes executing a special limit process (number of payouts), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss due to the pseudo bonus ending in the middle.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, when a game value amount that is smaller than the game value amount that can be granted per two increase sections (275 sheets x 2 sets = 550 sheets) is given, compared to the game value amount that is normally executed by the limit process (number of payouts). A special limit process (number of payouts) may be executed. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the amount of game value that can be granted per increase section (275 sheets) + the grace period is equivalent to the amount of game value for which normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed when a game value amount smaller than the game value amount (8 sheets) to be played is given. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operated) may be any timing as long as it is before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed, and is individual. It shall be possible to set as appropriate according to the game specifications and the like.

In the quasi-limit processing (number of games), the value of the 1G continuous counter (when the ceiling shortening lottery is won and "with ceiling shortening" is added, "1" is further added to the value of the control game number counter. ) Multiplied by "55" (that is, the duration of the pseudo bonus), and is executed when the addition result is "1390" or more. For example, when the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "55 x 2 = 110", so the value of the control game number counter is "1280". , The quasi-limit process (number of games) will be executed (operated).

For the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts), add "1" to the value of the control payout counter value (if the ceiling shortening lottery is won and "ceiling shortening is available". ) Is multiplied by "275" (that is, the amount of game value that can be given a pseudo bonus), and this is executed when the addition result is "1851" or more. For example, when the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "275 x 2 = 550", so the value of the control payout counter is "1301". , The quasi-limit process (number of payouts) will be executed (operated). Since the quasi-limit processing (number of games) and the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) both regulate the same contents, after one operating condition is satisfied and the other operating condition is activated, the other operating condition is applied. Even if is established, it is not necessary to operate in duplicate.

When the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the preparation limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates), the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery and ceiling shortening lottery are executed during the pseudo bonus in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. Will not be done. That is, the extension of the game period in the increased section is suppressed. The method of suppressing the extension of the gaming period in the increasing section is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery, the winning probability of the 1G consecutive lottery may be lower than usual, or in the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the winning probability of the ceiling shortening may be lower than usual. .. That is, although the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery and ceiling shortening lottery itself are executed, it may be difficult to win these lottery. Further, for example, in the effect section after the execution of the quasi-limit process (number of games), the lottery value that is the winning in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to shift to the pseudo-bonus. Alternatively, the lottery value at which the mode transition advantageous to the player is determined in the mode transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult for the pseudo bonus to be consecutively villaged.

Further, when the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates), in the subsequent series of advantageous sections, during the production section, a "fixed combination" ((FIG. 7) Special processing is performed at the time of winning a)). Hereinafter, this special process will be described by taking as an example the case where the “determined combination” is “F_determined cherry” (hereinafter, may be simply described as “determined cherry”).

When neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, if the "confirmed cherry" is won during the production section (may be during the increase section), a pseudo bonus transition lottery is drawn. In, the "winning (next game)" is determined (see (c) in FIG. 7). Further, in the first gaming machine, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a symbol with high expectations for the player, so in a game in which the stop operation information is not notified, the player is on the left. The general procedure is to stop at one stop and aim at the "cherry" symbol (aiming at the "BAR" symbol as a guide). Therefore, when the game is played by a general procedure, when the "determined cherry" is won, the "cherry" symbol is first stopped at the lower stage of the left reel 3L at the left first stop. If neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating and the "fixed cherry" is won, the left first stop ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2"). ") May be notified to the effect that it should be done. Further, the "winning (next game)" is not limited to the one in which the pseudo bonus is started from the next game, and the pseudo bonus may be started from the game after the next game.

Here, the skilled player stops aiming at the "BAR" symbol even in the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, for example, in order to further determine whether the player is a "weak che" or a "confirmed cherry". Perform the operation. As a result, it can be recognized that the "BAR" symbols are aligned in the middle of each reel and the "confirmed cherry" is won (for example, see "REP42" in FIG. 11). On the other hand, the player without skill does not perform the stop operation aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, or cannot perform the stop operation, so that the stop display mode is "weak check". It may not be possible to determine whether it is a "confirmed cherry" (for example, see "REP28" in FIG. 11).

In the first gaming machine, when neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, the "confirmed cherry" is won, and the "confirmed cherry lip". When the combination of the symbols of is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Also, in the case of winning the "confirmed cherry", the combination of the "confirmed cherry rip" symbols was not displayed, but the special winning sound was also displayed when the combination of the "cherry rip" symbols was displayed. It is designed to be output. The output of the special winning sound may be performed with a probability of 100% or may be performed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

In any case, if neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, and if you win the "confirmed cherry", "Red 7 will be aligned" at the start of the next game. It is notified that the production is performed and the pseudo bonus is started, and the pseudo bonus is started.

On the other hand, if either the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated and then the "confirmed cherry" is won during the production section (which may be during the increase section), a pseudo bonus shift is made. Although the "winning (next game)" is once determined in the lottery (see (c) in FIG. 7), this determination result is rewritten to "winning (current game)" by executing the special process. Then, at the start of the game this time, it is notified that the "red 7 matching" effect is performed and the pseudo bonus is started, and the pseudo bonus is started.

At this time, in this game, the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "middle stage lip" without displaying the combination of the symbols of the "determined cherry lip" (including the combination of the symbols of the "cherry lip") is performed. Information notification (special notification) is performed. For example, in the first gaming machine, a special notification is given to the effect that the first right stop (“batting order 5” and “batting order 6”) should be performed (see FIG. 15). As a result, when neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, the flow of the game is that "confirmed cherry lip" is displayed → the pseudo bonus starts from the next game. After either the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the game is called "middle rip" display by performing the pseudo bonus start → stop operation according to the special notification from this game. It is changed to the flow of. It should be noted that the special notification may be performed by the control of the main (main control board 71) side, and as a result, the player does not suffer any disadvantage regardless of the shift to the pseudo bonus. It may be performed by the control only on the sub (sub control board 72) side.

It should be noted that, after either the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the "confirmed cherry" is won, and even though the special notification is performed, the "confirmed" is performed. When the combination of "Cherry Lip" symbols is displayed, the special winning sound is not output.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when "F_replay A" or "F_replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, basically the procedure of the stop operation is not notified. Therefore, assuming that the procedure of the stop operation is notified and the "middle stage lip" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, if such a state occurs, one of them is performed. There is a possibility that the player will be clearly aware that the quasi-limit process has been activated, and as a result, the interest of the game will be reduced. Therefore, during the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not any of the quasi-limit processes is activated (or even after the operation of any of the quasi-limit processes), "F_replay A" or When "F_replay B" is determined as an internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification may be performed with a predetermined probability. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural about the special notification being performed. Further, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification is performed even when the pseudo bonus transition lottery is won. Further, in this case, in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, even if the "winning (this time game)" can be determined with a predetermined probability. good.

Up to this point, in order to operate the normal limit processing, the special limit processing, and the quasi-limit processing, the game period of the advantageous section is monitored by using the "number of games" and the "number of payouts" as an example. The conditions under which each limit process is executed are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, and the value of the 1G continuous counter, assuming that each limit process is executed. And whether or not the ceiling is shortened (that is, a variable for operating the quasi-limit processing) and the like can be appropriately changed according to the game specifications, market trends, and the like.

Further, the method for monitoring the gaming period of the advantageous section is not limited to the above. For example, if the "navigation count" is used to monitor the game period of the advantageous section, the normal limit processing (navigation count), the special limit processing (navigation count), or the quasi-limit processing (navigation count) is performed in the same manner as above. The number of times) can also be executed. That is, any element (parameter) whose value can be counted can be adopted in order to monitor the game period of the advantageous section, and the value for which the normal limit processing is normally executed for the adopted element. By defining the value at which the special limit processing is executed and the value at which the quasi-limit processing is executed, it is possible to assume that each limit processing is executed in the same manner as described above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, the effect section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example). , When the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more, or the game value amount given in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more). ), This series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but the game period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445"". When the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the payout number counter for control is "2126" or more). In the case of an advantageous state, a series of advantageous sections are terminated when shifting to a specific state.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period by the natural flow accompanying the termination of the advantageous state. It is possible to make it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is supposed to be.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, the effect section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example, advantageous). When the value of the section game number counter becomes "1500" or more, or when the game value amount given in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more). When this happens, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but the game period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more). When, or when the game value amount given in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the payout number counter for control is "2126" or more), the advantageous state. If not, it shifts to an advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to a specific state, a series of advantageous sections are terminated.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period by the natural flow accompanying the termination of the advantageous state. It is possible to make it. Further, when ending a series of advantageous sections in this way, if it is not in an advantageous state, it is shifted to an advantageous state and then terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is supposed to be.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the sustainable period of the advantageous state (for example, "55 games") or the amount of game value that can be granted (for example, "275 cards"). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely restricted while giving consideration to the emotions of the player.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights (for example, "1G continuous stock" and "ceiling shortening"), but the gaming period in a series of advantageous sections is a specific period. When the special period is shorter than that and is set according to the number of rights granted (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes the value at which the quasi-limit processing (number of games) is executed). Or, when the amount of game value given in a series of advantageous sections is less than a specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of rights granted (for example, the value of the payout number counter for control is a quasi-limit). When the processing (number of payouts) reaches a value to be executed), the granting of rights is suppressed in the subsequent advantageous section. As a result, for example, a right that cannot be consumed by the player is granted, and as a result of forcibly ending a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to take into consideration the emotions of the player while suppressing the excessive increase in gambling.

Further, in the first gaming machine, in counting the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount", for example, it should be originally given due to an operation error of the player, ignoring of instructions, and the like. Even if there is a difference between the amount of game value that was actually given and the amount of game value that was actually given, the count is based on the amount of game value that was originally supposed to be given without considering this difference. It is supposed to be done. As a result, a series of advantageous sections may be extended more than necessary due to the actions of such a player, and unfairness may occur between the player who has performed such an action and the player who has not performed such an action. Since it is possible to prevent it from being lost, it is possible to take into consideration the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the winning combination (for example, "determined cherry") is determined to shift to the advantageous state in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed (for example, the state after the quasi-limit processing operation). At that time, a special notification is performed so as not to display a combination of special symbols (for example, "determined cherry lip") in which the winning of the definite combination can be clearly recognized. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling that, for example, the winning of the definite role was a useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when the advantageous state is started in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game is suppressed while suppressing the excessively high gambling. It is possible to consider the emotions of the person. It should be noted that any effect executing means may be used to perform the special notification.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the special notification is performed, the advantageous state that was originally supposed to be started from the next game is started from this game. As a result, the player can be made to perform the stop operation according to the special notification in a natural flow, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable even when such a special notification is performed. can.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the combination of special symbols is displayed in the winning combination in a state where the grant of the right is not suppressed, a special notification (for example, output of a special winning sound) is performed. On the other hand, it is not possible to give a special notification when a combination of special symbols is displayed by winning a fixed role in a state where the grant of rights is suppressed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling that, for example, the winning of the definite role was a useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when the advantageous state is started in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game is suppressed while suppressing the excessively high gambling. It is possible to consider the emotions of the person. It should be noted that any effect executing means may be used to perform the special notification.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, whether or not to perform special notification is determined according to whether or not the winning combination has been won, whether or not a combination of special symbols has been displayed, and whether or not special notification has been performed. I try to decide. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately manage the situation in which the special notification is performed.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous section game number counter and the advantageous section payout number counter count regardless of the amount of game value bet, and as a result, not only in the 3-card bet state but also in the 2-card bet state. It is possible to execute normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (number of payouts).

Further, in the first gaming machine, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter count in the three-card bet state, but do not count in the two-card bet state. Therefore, it is possible to execute special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (number of payouts) in the 3-card bet state, but special limit processing (number of games) and special limit in the 2-card bet state. It does not allow processing (number of payouts) to be performed. Therefore, in the two-card bet state, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated even during the pseudo bonus by executing the normal limit processing (number of games) or the normal limit processing (number of payouts).

In the first gaming machine, for example, the winning probability of a small winning combination and the number of medals paid out differ between the 3-card bet state and the 2-card bet state (see FIGS. 10 to 15), and the 3-card bet state. It is more disadvantageous for the player to play the game in the state of two bets than to play the game in. However, in this way, the method that is more disadvantageous to the player when playing the game in the state of two bets is not limited to this. For example, when the game is played in the state of two bets during the pseudo bonus, the player may be configured to be disadvantageous by not notifying the procedure of the stop operation.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, when the gaming value of the first amount (for example, "3 cards") is bet and the game is played, a series of advantageous sections is forced in the middle of the advantageous state. It is possible to end a series of advantageous sections within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state without being terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is supposed to be. On the other hand, when a second amount (for example, "2 cards") of the game value is bet and the game is played, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player aware that the game was not performed by the intended game method, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game by the intended game method.

In a series of advantageous sections, it is more disadvantageous for the player when the game is played with the second amount of game value bet than when the game is played with the first amount of game value bet. Therefore, by enabling such an alert, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a more advantageous state, and the player should play the game in a game method not intended by the player. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the above.

[5-5. Storage area configuration of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, the storage area configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a winning flag storage area, a winning operation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a carry-over combination storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a gaming state flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a pressing order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning flag storage area, winning operation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area)
First, with reference to FIG. 17, the configuration of the winning flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), the winning operation flag storage area (display combination storage area), and the symbol code storage area will be described. In the first gaming machine, the winning flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data structure.

Each of the above-mentioned storage areas is composed of storage areas 1 to 26 represented by 1 byte of data. The data stored in each storage area is only the 1-byte data in the "data" column in FIG. 17, but in FIG. 17, for convenience of explanation, a symbol combination associated with the bits of each storage area is used. The "combination" shown (in FIG. 17, the symbol of the reel 3L, the symbol of the reel 3C, and the symbol of the reel 3R are described in this order) and the contents thereof (see FIGS. 11 to 14) are also described.

The data stored in the winning flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination (that is, the type of symbol combination permitted to be displayed in this game). It is used to. For example, when 2BB is won in this game (when it is carried over), "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 1.

The data stored in the winning operation flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the display combination (that is, the type of symbol combination displayed on the valid line in this game). Used to do. For example, when the combination of symbols related to 2BB is displayed on the valid line in this game, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 1.

The data stored in the symbol code storage area makes it possible for the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination that can still be displayed on the valid line in this game while the main CPU 101 is rotating at least one of the reels. Used for. For example, when at least one of the reels is rotating in this game, if the combination of symbols related to 2BB can be displayed on the effective line, "1" is set to bit 0 of the storage area 1. Is stored.

(Carryover storage area)
Subsequently, the configuration of the carry-over combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The carry-over combination storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data.

As a result of the internal lottery process, when the bonus combination of "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) is determined as the internal winning combination, these bonus combinations are stored in the carry-over combination storage area as the carry-over combination ( "1" is stored in the corresponding bit). The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is retained without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the valid line. Further, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, in addition to the internal winning combination (small combination / replay combination) determined by the internal lottery process, the carry-over combination (bonus combination) is stored in the winning flag request storage area. It is stored.

(Game status flag storage area)
Subsequently, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The game state flag storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. For example, when the current gaming state is the 2BB state, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

Since the first gaming machine is not provided with the RT state, the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 19 is not provided with an area indicating the type of RT state, but for example, an RT state is provided. If so, "1" is stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. In the first gaming machine, data indicating the type of gaming state (mode) in the advantageous section is separately stored in the mode flag storage area described later, but the data is stored and managed in this game state flag storage area. You can also do it. The same applies to the non-advantageous section and the game section of the advantageous section. An advantageous section flag storage area (not shown) can be provided and managed, or can be stored and managed in this game state flag storage area. The same applies to the gaming state such as the AT state and the ART state. An AT state (ART state) flag storage area (not shown) can be provided and managed, or can be stored and managed in this game state flag storage area.

(Mode flag storage area)
Subsequently, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The mode flag storage area is composed of a storage area 1 and a storage area 2 represented by 1 byte of data, respectively. For example, when the current mode is the start mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 1. Further, for example, when the current mode is the heaven A mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 2. In the first gaming machine, the pseudo-bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(Activity stop button storage area)
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 21. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Bits 0 to 2 in the operation stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (type of reel that has stopped), and bits 4 to 6 of the stop button that has not been operated yet. Stores data indicating the type (type of reel being rotated).

For example, when the stop button 8L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the stop button 8L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in the bit 4. The main CPU 101 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not been pressed yet, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

(Press order storage area)
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 22. The press order storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. The pressing order indicates the order in which the stop buttons are pressed, that is, the pressing order (batting order).

For example, when all the reels are rotating, "1" is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the pressing order storage area. Then, when the stop button 8L is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop), "1" remains stored in bits 0 and 1, but "0" is stored in bits 2-5. Will be stored. Then, when the stop button 8C is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop and the "middle" second stop), "1" remains stored in bit 0, but bit 1 remains stored. "0" will be stored. The main CPU 101 identifies the push order of the current game based on the data stored in the push order storage area.

[6. Processing by the main control circuit]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be described. In the description of the various processes shown below, a specific example of the processing contents may be described using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the processing contents of the various processes shown below are limited to this. It's not a thing.

[6-1. Main processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 23, the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing procedure. Further, FIG. 23 also shows the power-on processing executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachi-slot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs a power-on processing (S1). In this process, various processes required when the power is turned on are performed. The details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. The designated storage area here is a storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game), such as a winning flag storage area and a winning operation flag storage area.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs medal reception / start check processing (S3). In this process, for example, the input states of the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6, the start switch 7S, and the like are checked, and various processes necessary at the start of the game are performed. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value acquisition process (S4). In this process, an internal lottery random value (for example, in the range of 0 to 65535) and a production random value used in various lottery related to playability (other lottery random values) (for example, in the range of 0 to 65535, or 0 to 0). (Range of 255) and the like are extracted, and the extracted various random value values are stored in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The acquisition mode of various random numbers is not limited to the above. A required number of random values can be appropriately obtained from each predetermined numerical range (for example, a range of 0 to 65535, a range of 0 to 32767, a range of 0 to 255, a range of 0 to 127, etc.). ..

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, various processes necessary for determining the internal winning combination are performed based on the internal lottery table according to the current game state and the random value for the internal lottery. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a game start state control process (S6). In this process, for various game states, when the game is started, if the transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on the determined internal winning combination, etc.), the game state is transferred according to the established transition condition. Or, perform various processes necessary for managing the game period of the current game state. The details of the state control process at the start of the game will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation / storage process (S7). In this process, the data of the start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see S204 in FIG. 32) described later. The data generation, storage, and transmission methods for other commands are basically the same.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs the main side effect control process at the start of the game (S8). In this process, when various effects are performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) when the game is started, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when the lock effect is performed at the start of the game, the execution of the lock effect is controlled. Further, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification regarding the pseudo game) is controlled. Further, for example, when the stop operation information is notified by the instruction monitor in the AT state, the notification mode is controlled. Further, although details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation / storage process is performed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S9). In this process, various information necessary for stop control such as the type of the stop table used in the current game and the type of the attraction priority table is set based on the internal winning combination, the game state, and the like.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel rotation start process (S10). This process requires the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled by the reel control process (see S203 in FIG. 32) described later, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are controlled. The rotation starts. Each reel that has started rotation is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained. Further, although details are omitted, in this process, a reel rotation start command generation / storage process is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S11). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) of the rotating reel (in this case, all reels), the attraction priority is set by referring to the set internal winning combination and the set attraction priority table. The indicated data is acquired and stored in the pull-in priority data storage area (not shown). Although not shown, the symbol code storage process described later is performed prior to this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop control process (S12). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop controls set accordingly) and the stop operation mode of each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R. Perform various processing necessary for this. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation determination process (S13). In this process, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the valid line is a combination of any of the symbols specified in the symbol combination table. For example, it is determined whether or not there is a bit in which "1" is stored in the winning operation flag storage area. Further, although details are omitted, in this process, a winning operation command generation / storage process is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a medal payout / replay operation process (S14). In this process, if the combination of symbols determined in the above-mentioned winning operation determination process is a combination of symbols related to a small winning combination, the corresponding number of medals is paid out, and if it is a combination of symbols related to a replay combination, the next time. Performs various processes necessary for operating the re-game in the game. For example, when the combination of symbols determined in the above-mentioned winning operation determination process is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, the same number of values as the number of bets in this game is set in the automatic insertion medal counter described later. Perform the processing. Further, in this process, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external centralized terminal plate 55.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a state control process at the end of the game (S15). In this process, for various gaming states, when the transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on the combination of displayed symbols) when the game is completed, the gaming state is shifted according to the established transition condition. , Or perform various processes necessary for managing the game period of the current game state. The details of the state control process at the end of the game will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs the main side effect control process at the end of the game (S16). In this process, when various effects are performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) at the end of the game, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when the lock effect is performed at the end of the game, the execution of the lock effect is controlled. Further, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification regarding the pseudo game) is controlled. Further, although details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation / storage process is performed in this process.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, one unit game is controlled by performing the above-mentioned processes S2 to S16, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that processes other than these processes are appropriately performed as needed, or it is possible to configure it so that some of these processes are not performed. That is, the above-mentioned various processes are merely examples.

(Processing when power is turned on)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 24, the power-on processing performed in S2 of the above-mentioned main processing will be described. Note that FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for power-on processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a write test of the main RAM 103 after performing an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (not shown), and as a result of the test, determines whether or not the write to the main RAM 103 is normally performed ( S21). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has been normally performed (YES in S21), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 52 is in the ON state (S22). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting can be changed.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 52 is in the ON state (YES in S22), the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the time of changing the setting (S23). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area in which data needs to be erased when the settings of the carry-over combination storage area, the game state flag storage area, the mode flag storage area, and the like are changed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs initialization command generation and storage processing (S24). In this process, the data of the initialization command indicating that the setting change process to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 has been started is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (S25). In this process, by accepting the above-mentioned setting value determination operation and setting value confirmation operation, after the main RAM 103 is initialized, a new setting value is set (stored) in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. Will be done. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 52 is in the off state (S26). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the state in which the setting can be changed has ended after the setting value is newly set.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 52 is not in the off state (NO in S26), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until the setting key type switch 52 is in the off state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting key type switch 52 is in the off state (YES in S26), the initialization command generation / storage process is performed (S27). In this process, the data of the initialization command indicating that the setting change process to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is completed is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on processing.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the setting key type switch 52 is not in the ON state (NO in S22), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup data is normal (S28). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the various information backed up when the power supply to the pachi-slot machine 1 is cut off (at the time of the power cutoff) is normal.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (YES in S28), the main CPU 101 performs a game return process (S29). In this process, the pachi-slot machine 1 is restored to the state before the power failure. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on processing.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that writing to the main RAM 103 was not normally performed (S21 is NO), and in S28, when it is determined that the backup data is not normal (S28 is NO), a power-on error occurs. Processing is performed (S30). It should be noted that the error generated by this power-on error processing is not resolved by the above-mentioned reset operation, but is resolved according to the newly set value. Therefore, in the main CPU 101, after the error processing at the time of power-on, the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned off once, and then until a new set value is set (until the above-mentioned processes S22 to S26 are performed), the normal operation is performed. It does not shift to the process (after S2 in FIG. 23).

(Medal reception / start check processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 25, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for medal acceptance / start check processing.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (S41). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the replay combination has been won (whether the replay has been activated) in the previous unit game.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (S41 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs automatic insertion processing (S42). In this process, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted. Further, although details are omitted, when automatic insertion is performed, a medal insertion command generation / storage process is performed in this process. Further, in this process, the medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal plate 55.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S41 that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (YES in S41), and after the processing in S42, the medal auxiliary storage switch check processing is performed (S43). In this process, it is determined whether the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is in the ON state (that is, whether a certain number or more of medals are stored in the medal auxiliary storage 33), and the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is used. If it is determined that it is in the ON state, a medal auxiliary storage error is generated. In this case, the process waits until the error is resolved. If it is determined that the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is not in the ON state, this process is terminated.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion status check process (S44). In this process, the current number of bets and credits is checked, and it is also determined whether medals are prohibited or a selector error has occurred. If medals can be accepted, the medals will be accepted. Make it possible to accept (accept bet operations) (allow medal acceptance). If a selector error has occurred, the process waits until the error is resolved.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal can be accepted (S45). When the main CPU 101 determines that the medal can be accepted (YES in S45), the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion check process (S46). In this process, the number of bets and the number of credits are updated based on the detection result of the medal sensor 31S and the detection result of the bet switch 6S. Further, although details are omitted, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation / storage process is performed in this process. Further, in this process, the medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal plate 55.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted or credited (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is not "50". When the main CPU 101 determines that medals cannot be inserted or credits can be inserted (that is, the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is "50") (S49 is NO). , The acceptance of medals is prohibited (S48). That is, the main CPU 101 is in a state in which medals cannot be accepted (a state in which betting operations cannot be accepted).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S45 that medals cannot be accepted (S45 is NO), in S47 it determines that medals can be inserted or credited (S47 is YES), and After the processing of S48, it is determined whether or not the number of inserted cards is the number of cards that can start the game (S49). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the current number of bets is "2" or "3".

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (YES in S49), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 7S is in the ON state (S50). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start operation has been performed by the player.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S is in the ON state (YES in S50), the main CPU 101 prohibits the acceptance of medals (S51). Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the medal acceptance / start check processing.

The main CPU 101 processes when it is determined in S49 that the number of inserted sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (S49 is NO), and when it is determined in S50 that the start switch 7S is not in the ON state (S50 is NO). Is returned to S44.

(Internal lottery processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 26, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a set value / medal insertion number check process (S61). In this process, the set value and the number of bets in this unit game are checked. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to a set value, a number of bets, a game state, and the like (S62). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 acquires an internal lottery random number value from the random number value storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 acquires the data of the random number value for internal lottery acquired in S4 of the above-mentioned main process. In this process, if it is determined that the set value is other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is other than "1" to "3", a serious error has occurred in the main CPU 101. Then, the above-mentioned power-on error processing (see S30 in FIG. 24) is executed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an internal winning combination determination process (S64). In this process, the acquired random number values for internal lottery are sequentially updated (for example, addition update) using the lottery values of each internal winning combination specified in the set internal lottery table, and the update result becomes a predetermined result. It is determined whether or not it has overflowed (for example, whether it has overflowed). When a predetermined result is obtained, the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination of this unit game. If the predetermined result is not obtained even if all the internal winning combinations are determined, the result of this unit game is "missing" ("missing" is determined as the internal winning combination).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the internal winning combination has been determined (S65). When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has not been determined (S65 is NO), the process returns to S64. That is, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combination to be determined (the random number value for internal lottery is also sequentially updated), and until the determination is made for all the internal winning combination (or the internal winning combination is in the middle of the determination). The process of S64 is repeated (until it is determined).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has been determined (YES in S65), is the determined internal winning combination a non-carry-over non-target role (that is, a small role or a replay instead of a bonus role that is a carry-over role)? Whether or not it is a role) is determined (S66). When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is a carry-over non-target combination (YES in S66), the main CPU 101 updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, the data in the winning flag storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data corresponding to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed corresponding to the determined internal winning combination in the winning flag storage area.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S66 that the determined internal winning combination is not a carry-over non-target combination (S66 is NO), and after the processing of S67, is the determined internal winning combination a carry-over target combination (? That is, it is determined whether or not it is a bonus role that is a carry-over role (S68).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is the carry-over target combination (YES in S68), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data in the carry-over combination storage area is “0” (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not any bonus combination has been carried over yet. When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carry-over combination storage area is "0" (YES in S69), the main CPU 101 updates the carry-over combination storage area (S70). In this process, the data in the carry-over combination storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, in the carry-over combination storage area, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data corresponding to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed corresponding to the determined internal winning combination.

In S68, the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is not a carry-over target combination (S68 is NO), and in S69, determines that the data in the carry-over combination storage area is not "0" (S69 is NO). ), And after the processing of S70, it is determined again whether or not the data in the carry-over combination storage area is “0” (S71).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carry-over combination storage area is not "0" (NO in S71), the main CPU 101 updates the winning flag storage area (S72). In this process, the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is reflected in the data in the winning flag storage area. That is, when the bonus combination is carried over (or won in the unit game this time), the main CPU 101 is the data corresponding to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed corresponding to the bonus combination in the winning flag storage area. Stores "1" in the bit.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carry-over combination storage area is "0" (YES in S71), and after the processing in S72, the main CPU 101 performs a sub-flag setting process (S73). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a non-advantageous section sub-flag and an advantageous section winning sub-flag are set based on the internal winning combination. In this process, for example, when in the AT state, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor may be set. Then, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery process after this process.

(State control process at the start of the game)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 27, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the state control process at the start of the game.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition establishment check process (S81). In this process, when the game is started, it is checked whether or not the transition condition for shifting from any game state to any game state is satisfied. For example, when shifting between the flags as a predetermined RT state based on winning a predetermined bonus combination, it is checked whether or not the predetermined bonus combination has been won in this process. In the case of the first gaming machine, since the flag is not configured as an RT state (that is, as a gaming state stored in the gaming state flag storage area), the check here is unnecessary. Further, for example, when there is a specific RT state that starts or ends by playing a specific number of games from the establishment of a specific transition condition, this specific number of games can be managed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is satisfied (S82). When the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is satisfied (YES in S82), the main CPU 101 updates the gaming state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state according to the established transition condition. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S84). In this process, it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state or the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process according to the transition of the game state. In some cases, such setting processing is performed as appropriate.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S82 that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is not satisfied (S82 is NO), and after the processing of S84, the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether or not there is (S85). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section (YES in S85), the main CPU 101 performs an advantageous section start condition establishment check process (S86). In this process, when the game is started, it is checked whether or not the transition condition (start condition of the advantageous section) for shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section is satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and it is checked whether or not the lottery result is to start the advantageous section.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (S87). When it is determined that the start condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (S87 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when it is determined that the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S87), the main CPU 101 performs the setting process at the start of the advantageous section (S88). That is, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) an advantageous section. In this process, for example, counting of various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes is started (that is, monitoring of a game period of a series of advantageous sections is started) in response to the start of the advantageous section. Perform the setting process of.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) in the started advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S90). In this process, the game period (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode is set according to the set mode, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. If necessary, such a setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, according to the set transition destination mode, when shifting to the pseudo bonus, "55 games" is set as the gaming period, and the game shifts to the end mode. In that case, "32 games" is set as the game period, and when shifting to other modes, the number of ceiling games corresponding to each is set. Further, a lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery (see FIGS. 7 and 8 and the like) is set. Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

When it is determined in S85 that the current gaming section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (S85 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a game start processing during the advantageous section (S91). The details of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an advantageous section end condition establishment check process (S92). In this process, when the game is started, it is checked whether or not the transition condition (end condition of the advantageous section) for shifting from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section is satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, whether the operating conditions of various limit processings are satisfied based on the number of games in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or when the current mode is the end mode. It is checked whether or not 32 games have passed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (S93). When it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S93), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets the non-advantageous section. In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), a mode in the advantageous section (game state), and a game period (number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode, depending on the end of the advantageous section. Initialization processing is performed to clear all the information related to (including) etc. (that is, the information related to the advantageous section). Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (S93 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

(Processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 28, the game start time processing during the advantageous section performed in the above-mentioned game start time state control process S91 will be described. Note that FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure at the start of the game during the advantageous section.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processes (at the start of the game) (S101). In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes based on the number of games in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), various counters for managing the game period such as various modes (game state) in the advantageous section, or others. Various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, subtraction (addition) by 1 for each game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the specific mode (AT state) (S102). When it is determined that the main CPU 101 is in the specific mode (YES in S102), the main CPU 101 performs an AT period management process (at the start of the game) (S103). In this process, for example, when it is possible to extend the game period in the AT state (for example, extension of the number of games, addition of the number of sets, etc.) at the start of the game, whether or not the execution condition of such extension is satisfied. (If it is possible to shorten the game period in the AT state, the process related to the shortening is performed). Further, in this process, the game period in the AT state may be managed regardless of whether or not it is extended, or the game period in the AT state is managed in the above-mentioned process of S101, and in this process, only the process related to the extension is managed. May be done. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery is performed based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag, the 1G continuous lottery is performed, and the pseudo bonus is extended according to the lottery result. Processing is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a navigation setting process (S104). In this process, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor, information corresponding to the stop operation information included in the start command, and the like are set. In this process, it may be possible to determine whether or not to generate navigation. That is, when the notification target combination wins in the AT state, navigation may not always occur, and whether or not navigation is generated in this process is a predetermined condition (for example, the type of notification target combination or a predetermined navigation). It may be determined according to the probability of occurrence).

The main CPU 101 determines in S102 whether or not the mode transition condition is satisfied when it is determined that the specific mode is not in progress (S102 is NO) and after S104 (S105). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the transition destination mode is determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (YES in S105), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) in the shifted advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S107). In this process, the game period (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode is set according to the set mode, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. If necessary, such a setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, the same processing as the above-mentioned processing of S90 is performed in this processing. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section. Further, when it is determined that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (S105 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game start processing during the advantageous section.

The game start state control process shown in FIG. 27, the game end state control process shown in FIG. 30, the game start process during the advantageous section shown in FIG. 28, and the game end process during the advantageous section shown in FIG. 31 are performed. The processing configuration is basically the same. This is a process that may be performed at either the start of the game or the end of the game (for example, the process of referring to the determined internal winning combination such as the game state or the transition of the mode). Regarding the processing that the processing result should be reflected until the end of this game (or until the next game starts), it means that either one should be performed, and both are the same. It does not mean that the processing of is performed in duplicate. Therefore, such processing may be performed either when the game is started or when the game is finished.

On the other hand, for those that need to be processed when the game is started (for example, the above-mentioned navigation setting process, etc.), it is assumed that the processing is performed when the game is started, and when the game is finished. For those that need to be processed (for example, processing that refers to a combination of displayed symbols), it may be performed when the game is completed. Further, for example, a process that needs to be processed at a predetermined time after the start of the game and before the end of the game, or a process that should be processed (for example, a process that refers to a stop operation mode of the first stop operation, etc.) ) May be performed at that time.

(Reel stop control process)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 29, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotation speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute) (that is, whether they are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). When it is determined that all the reels are not rotating at a constant speed (NO in S111), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until all the reels rotate at a constant speed. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the reels are rotating at a constant speed (YES in S111), the stop of each reel is permitted (S112). That is, the main CPU 101 activates each stop button. Further, the operation stop button storage area is updated accordingly (in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, "1" is stored in bits 4 to 6 of the operation stop button storage area).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been operated (S113). When the main CPU 101 determines that the valid stop button has not been operated (NO in S113), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until the valid stop button is operated. When performing automatic stop control, it is possible to measure this standby time and configure the automatic stop control to be performed when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

When the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been operated (YES in S113), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and the push-button storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on the reel 3L (when the stop button 8L is pressed), in this process, the bit in the operation stop button storage area is used. "1" is stored in 0, and bit 4 is updated to "0". Further, the bits 2 to 5 of the pressing order storage area are updated to "0".

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled from the operation stop button (S115). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the reel 3L is determined as the control target reel.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for grasping symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data in the middle region of the reel 3L when the stop button 8L is pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S117). In this process, for example, the most appropriate number of sliding pieces (movement amount of the symbol) is determined by referring to the number of sliding pieces specified in the above-mentioned stop table, the data of the above-mentioned attraction priority data storage area, and the like.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 stores the stop scheduled position from the stop start position and the number of slip pieces (S118). In this process, the stop start position stored in the process of S116 described above and the symbol position data of the position where the symbol finally stops from the number of sliding pieces determined in the process of S117 described above are stored as the scheduled stop positions. ..

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop command generation / storage process (S119). In this process, the data of the reel stop command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The reel stop command can be configured to include not only the scheduled stop position but also a parameter that can specify the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol code storage process (S120). In this process, the symbol code storage area is updated while also referring to the symbol type (symbol code) of the scheduled stop position on the reel whose scheduled stop position has already been determined. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a valid stop button (S121). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there are reels that are still rotating (whether or not the stop operation is performed for all reels).

When the main CPU 101 determines that there is a valid stop button (YES in S121), the main CPU 101 performs a control change process (S122). In this process, for example, when it is necessary to change the stop table, the pull-in priority table, etc. set in the above-mentioned reel stop initial setting process according to the stop operation mode of the player up to this point, such a process is performed. Reset various information required for stop control.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S123). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) of the rotating reel, the set internal winning combination is set while referring to the type of the symbol at the scheduled stop position in the reel whose scheduled stop position has already been determined. The data indicating the pull-in priority is acquired by referring to the pull-in priority table and stored in the pull-in priority data storage area. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to S113. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no valid stop button (NO in S121), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process.

(State control processing at the end of the game)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 30, the game end state state control process performed in S15 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the state control process at the end of the game.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition establishment check process (S131). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether or not the transition condition for shifting from any game state to any game state is satisfied. For example, when shifting to a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state based on the display of a predetermined combination of symbols, it is checked whether or not the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed in this process. Further, in the case of a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state, it is checked whether or not the end conditions of these gaming states are satisfied in this process. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is checked whether or not the combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, it is checked whether or not the end conditions of these gaming states are satisfied by paying out the medals.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is satisfied (S132). When the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is satisfied (YES in S132), the main CPU 101 updates the gaming state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state according to the established transition condition. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, when a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area, and 2BB. Set the state or 3BB state. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, when the end conditions of these gaming states are satisfied, bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area is updated to "0".

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S134). In this process, it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state or the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process according to the transition of the game state. In some cases, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the 2BB state is set, "1" is set in the payout number as the end condition, and the 3BB state is set. If the number of payouts as the end condition is set to "176".

When the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is not satisfied (S132 is NO), and after the processing of S134, the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether or not there is (S135). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section (YES in S135), the main CPU 101 performs an advantageous section start condition establishment check process (S136). As described above, since only the processing referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible in the non-advantageous section, this processing is the same as the processing of S86 described above (state control processing at the start of the game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (S137). When it is determined that the start condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (S137 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when it is determined that the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S137), the main CPU 101 performs the setting process at the start of the advantageous section (S138). As described above, since only the processing referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible in the non-advantageous section, this processing is the same as the processing of S88 (state control processing at the start of the game) described above.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) in the started advantageous section. As described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the processing referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S89 described above (state control processing at the start of the game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S140). In this process, the game period (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode is set according to the set mode, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. If necessary, such a setting process is appropriately performed. As described above, since only the processing referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible in the non-advantageous section, this processing is the same as the processing of S90 described above (state control processing at the start of the game).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current gaming section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (S135 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a game end processing during the advantageous section (S141). The details of the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an advantageous section end condition establishment check process (S142). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether or not the transition condition (end condition of the advantageous section) for shifting from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section is satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, whether the operating conditions of various limit processings are satisfied based on the number of payouts in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or when the current mode is the end mode. It is checked whether or not 32 games have passed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (S143). When it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S143), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets the non-advantageous section. In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), a mode in the advantageous section (game state), and a game period (number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode, depending on the end of the advantageous section. Initialization processing is performed to clear all the information related to (including) etc. (that is, the information related to the advantageous section). Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (NO in S143), the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process.

(Processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 31, the game end time processing during the advantageous section performed in S141 of the above-mentioned game end state state control process will be described. Note that FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure at the end of the game during the advantageous section.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processes (at the end of the game) (S151). In this processing, for example, various counters related to various limit processing based on the number of payouts in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), various counters for managing the game period such as various modes (game state) in the advantageous section, or others. Various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the number of payouts, the number of times a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed, the stop operation mode, etc.).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the specific mode (AT state) (S152). When it is determined that the main CPU 101 is in the specific mode (YES in S152), the main CPU 101 performs an AT period management process (at the end of the game) (S153). In this process, for example, when it is possible to extend the game period in the AT state (for example, extension of the number of games, addition of the number of sets, etc.) at the end of the game, whether or not the execution condition of such extension is satisfied. (If it is possible to shorten the game period in the AT state, the process related to the shortening is performed). Further, in this process, the game period in the AT state may be managed regardless of whether or not it is extended, or the game period in the AT state is managed in the above-mentioned process of S151, and in this process, only the process related to the extension is managed. May be done. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery is performed based on the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, and a process for extending the pseudo bonus is performed according to the lottery result.

The main CPU 101 determines whether or not the mode transition condition is satisfied when it is determined that the mode is not in the specific mode (S152 is NO) and after S153 (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the transition destination mode is determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag.

When it is determined that the mode transition condition is satisfied (S154 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) in the shifted advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S156). In this process, the game period (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode is set according to the set mode, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. If necessary, such a setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, the same processing as the above-mentioned processing of S140 is performed in this processing. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section. Further, when it is determined that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (S154 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end processing during the advantageous section.

[6-2. Periodic interrupt processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 32, a periodic interrupt process executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the periodic interrupt process.

Here, in the present embodiment, the periodic interrupt processing cycle (1 interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms". However, the cycle of periodic interrupt processing is not limited to this. For example, the periodic interrupt process may be executed at a cycle different from this, or even if the same cycle is set, the interrupt process is actually performed for a part or all of the process. By setting the number of interrupts to "2" or more, the periodic interrupt process may be executed at a cycle different from this as a result.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S201). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an input port check process (S202). In this process, the input state (on state or off state) of various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) is checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt is compared with the input state at the time of the current interrupt, and it is checked whether or not there is a change in the input state. If there is a change in the input state, the input of the main RAM 103 is performed. The change is stored in the port storage area 0 (not shown), and the input state not related to the change is directly stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel control process (S203). In this process, the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled, and the rotation and stop of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R are controlled. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data transmission process (S204). In this process, each parameter of each command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. In this process, when the command data is not stored in the communication data storage area, the data stored in the input port storage area 0 and the input port storage area 1 is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 as an input state command.

In the present embodiment, various command data are temporarily stored in the communication data storage area and then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in the periodic interruption process. For example, various command data are stored in the communication data storage area. Instead of storing the data, the data may be directly stored in a communication circuit (not shown) provided in the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. Further, in the present embodiment, although detailed description is omitted, various command data are transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by serial communication. For example, various command data are transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by parallel communication. It may be configured to be transmitted to.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment LED drive process (S205). In this process, the display contents of, for example, the information display device 14 connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are controlled. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process (S206). In this process, various timers managed by the main control circuit 100 are updated.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an error detection process (S207). In this process, it is detected whether or not various error states have occurred based on the input state and the like checked in S202 described above. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a door open / close check process (S208). In this process, for example, the lower door mechanism DD open / close state is checked based on the input state of the door open / close monitoring switch 56. When various error states have occurred and the input state of the door open / close monitoring switch 56 is in the open state (off state), a security signal is output from the external centralized terminal plate 55.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a register reset process (S209). Then, the main CPU 101 ends the periodic interrupt process after this process.

[7. Processing by sub-control circuit]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 33, an outline of the sub-side control process executed by the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 using each program will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of an outline of the sub-side control process.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, various restrictions are provided on the main control circuit 100 side (including the main control board 71 and the main control board case) from the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications, but the sub-control circuit The 200 side (including the sub-control board 72 and the sub-control board case) is not so restricted. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and the sub-control circuit 200) varies depending on the type and number of connected effect devices, the type of effect performed by the effect device, and the manufacturing cost. It is possible to use the configuration. That is why the term "outline" is used in FIG. 33.

First, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 201 performs the power-on processing in the same manner as the main CPU 101 (S301 and S302). In this process, various tasks necessary for detecting whether or not an abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on, initializing the data stored in the sub RAM 203, and performing various effect execution control processes described later. Processing such as starting up is performed.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 receives the command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub CPU 201 performs the effect execution control process at the time of command reception (S303 and S304). In this process, for example, when an initialization command is received, the parameter information of the received initialization command is referred to, and if the settings have been changed, the initialization process is appropriately executed on the sub side as well, and the settings must not be changed. If so, the process of returning to the state before the power failure is executed on the sub side as well.

In addition, for example, when a start command is received, the parameter information of the received start command is referred to, and if it is in a non-AT state, the content of the effect of suggesting or notifying the internal winning combination, the game state, etc. (as necessary). It is decided (by lottery), and various production devices are controlled so that the production of the determined content is executed. Further, in the AT state, in addition to this, the content of the effect of notifying the advantageous stop operation mode is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed.

Further, for example, when a lock command is received, the content of the effect linked to the content of the lock effect is determined by referring to the information of the parameter of the received lock command, and various effects are executed so that the effect of the determined content is executed. Control the device. Also, for example, when a reel stop command is received, the parameter information of the received reel stop command is referred to, and it is linked with the stop start position and the scheduled stop position (or simply what number stop operation was performed, etc.). The content of the effect is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed. In addition, for example, when a winning operation command is received, the parameter information of the received winning operation command is referred to, and when a privilege is given, the content of the effect linked to the given privilege is determined and determined. Control various production devices so that the production of is executed.

Further, the sub CPU 201 is connected to the sub control board 72 (including one connected via the sub relay board 74), for example, when the effect buttons 10a and 10b are operated, the effect is executed when the effect button is operated. Control processing is performed (S305 and S306). In this process, for example, when the effect button according to the effect is operated during the execution of the operation-linked effect, various effect devices are controlled so that the content of the operation-linked effect changes. Further, for example, when the effect button is operated for calling the user menu described later during non-game, control for displaying the user menu is performed. Further, when the effect button is operated for the selection / decision operation while the user menu is displayed, the control according to these operations is performed.

Further, when a trigger other than the above-mentioned trigger is established, the sub CPU 201 performs other effect execution control processing (S307). In this process, for example, when the non-operation period in which the operation related to the game and the operation related to the user menu are not performed becomes a predetermined period (for example, about 30 seconds), the content of the effect related to the demo status notification is determined and determined. Various production devices are controlled so that the production of the desired content is executed.

[8. Other functions of pachislot machines]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with various functions for controlling the game, various functions for controlling the effect, and various configurations for realizing these functions. It can also have a function. In the following, an example of other functions on the player side and an example of other functions on the game store side will be described.

[8-1. Player side]
For example, when a user menu is displayed by a player's production operation, a desired menu is selected in the user menu, and a selection / determination operation is appropriately performed for the selected menu, the player obtains various information. , It is possible to make various settings.

For example, when the "arrangement / payout table" is selected / determined, game information indicating the symbol arrangement in the pachislot machine 1, the specified symbol combination, and the payout (contents of the privilege) at the time of winning can be confirmed. The information screen is displayed on the effect display unit.

Further, for example, when "volume / light amount adjustment" is selected / determined, the brightness of various display devices in the pachislot machine 1, the volume of sound output from the speaker group, the light amount of the lamp / LED group, etc. are set. The possible setting screen is displayed in the effect display unit. At the time of such a setting, in order to enable more detailed setting or to accept operations related to the setting more easily, various operation units that accept the game operation of the player are set. It shall be possible to use it as a part of the operation unit (that is, the operation unit that accepts the effect operation) that accepts the operation related to.

Further, for example, when "custom" is selected / determined, the effect mode in the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, the type of the character used for the effect (the type of the character (display mode) itself, the voice corresponding to the character). (Including the type of costume or item (individual display mode) related to the character), the probability of occurrence of the effect (including the type of expectation when the effect occurs), or the mode of suggestion or notification (effect execution timing). Etc.)) etc.) can be set. The setting screen is displayed in the effect display unit. At the time of such a setting, in order to enable more detailed setting or to accept operations related to the setting more easily, various operation units that accept the game operation of the player are set. It shall be possible to use it as a part of the operation unit (that is, the operation unit that accepts the effect operation) that accepts the operation related to.

Further, for example, when "Unimemo" is selected and determined, it is possible to receive an information providing service using a player's mobile terminal (for example, a mobile phone, a smartphone, etc.). In such an information providing service, for example, a player logs in to start a game (may be a case where the game is started without a login operation), and a logout operation is performed at the end of the game to perform game history information (for example,). , Information according to the results of various games, such as how many games have been played in total, how many times an advantageous game state has occurred, and how many cards have been acquired at the maximum) can be confirmed or acquired.

Further, for example, the game history information includes information indicating the type of character that can be displayed during the game and the type of music that can be output, depending on the result of the game (establishment of the opening condition), and the player's information. It also includes information about incidental benefits such as information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed on the mobile terminal and the types of music that can be output.

Various methods can be adopted as the login / logout method in such an information providing service. For example, using the player's terminal, the player may be made to read the two-dimensional code displayed on the effect display unit to log in / log out, or the player may be entered with a password. Or store the password (specifically, at the time of logout at the end of the game, instead of the two-dimensional code, a character string of about 4 to 10 digits can be displayed as the password for the next input, and it can be displayed. The player can take notes on paper media, take pictures with a mobile terminal, etc., and log in by logging in by logging in before the next game starts (the password obtained in this way can be entered). -Logout may be performed. In addition, these methods can be combined as appropriate so that login / logout can be performed.

[8-2. Amusement store side]
For example, the hall menu is displayed by the setting confirmation operation of the administrator on the game store side (may be the setting change operation or other operation by the administrator on the game store side), and the desired menu is selected in the hall menu. Further, when the selected menu is appropriately selected / determined, the manager of the game store can obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when "time setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which the date and time of the pachi-slot machine 1 can be set is displayed in the effect display unit. The date and time may be configured to be automatically updated, for example, in the above-mentioned sub-side power-on processing (see S302 in FIG. 33).

Further, for example, when "total medal information" is selected / determined, historical information indicating the number of inserted and discharged sheets within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed on the effect display unit. It should be noted that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu.

Further, for example, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected / determined, the number of setting change operations and setting confirmation operations within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 etc. An information screen is displayed on the effect display unit so that the history information indicating the above can be confirmed. Further, for example, when "error information history" is selected / determined, history information indicating the error occurrence date / time and its contents within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 is shown. An information screen that enables confirmation is displayed on the effect display unit.

Further, for example, when "monitoring history" is selected / determined, history information indicating the door opening date / time and the period within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed on the effect display unit. Further, for example, when the "warning setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which the mode and frequency of various warning notifications in the pachi-slot machine 1 can be set is displayed on the effect display unit.

Further, for example, when the "power saving mode setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which it is possible to set whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed on the effect display unit. It should be noted that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu. In addition, at the time of such a setting, in order to enable more detailed setting or to accept operations related to the setting more easily, various operation units that accept the game operation of the player are set. It shall be possible to use it as a part of the operation unit (that is, the operation unit that accepts the effect operation) that accepts the operation related to.

Further, for example, when the "stop setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which it is possible to set whether or not to activate the stop function in the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed on the effect display unit. The stop function is a function that, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, makes the game inoperable until the manager of the game store performs a release operation (for example, a reset operation). Further, the predetermined operating condition may be satisfied, for example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the above-mentioned limit process, or a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase section, or an advantage). It may be established when any of the sections (including the effect section) is completed. Further, when the stop function is set to the on state, the automatic settlement function described later may be set to the on state in conjunction with this.

Further, for example, when the "automatic settlement setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which it is possible to set whether or not to activate the automatic settlement function in the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed on the effect display unit. The automatic settlement function is a function in which credits are automatically settled (that is, all credited game values are automatically returned) when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied. Further, the predetermined operating condition may be satisfied, for example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the above-mentioned limit process, or a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase section, or an advantage). It may be established when any of the sections (including the effect section) is completed. Further, when the automatic settlement function is set to the on state, the above-mentioned stop function may be set to the on state in conjunction with this.

In addition, when setting the stop function or automatic settlement function, various operation units that accept the game operation of the player in order to enable more detailed setting or to accept the operation related to the setting more easily. Can be used as a part of an operation unit that accepts an operation related to the setting (that is, an operation unit that accepts an effect operation). However, in this case, it is not desirable to increase the number of operation units that can be unnecessarily accepted. Therefore, only a specific operation unit (for example, a stop button) should be used as a part of the operation unit that accepts the operation related to the setting. May be possible.

[9. Expansion example]
Up to this point, the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied, but the gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied is not limited thereto. For example, it can be applied to a game machine called a so-called "pachinko machine", a "slot machine", or the like, and the same effect can be obtained. That is, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to all gaming machines capable of playing a game (performing a game control) according to a player's game operation (operation). Further, the configuration and functions of the gaming machines including the pachislot machine 1 are not limited to those described above, and various changes and expansions are possible. The following is just an example, but such an extended example will be described.

(Pachinko machine)
The pachinko machine is, for example, a game board having a game area in which a game ball can roll and flow, a glass door including a protective glass that protects the game area while making it visible from the outside, and an effect display device provided in a predetermined area of the game area. It has a payout unit (which may be provided outside the game area), a payout unit that pays out the game ball, and a board unit including various control boards that perform various controls related to the game and the production, and these are frame bodies (which may be provided outside the game area). It is supported by (sometimes referred to simply as a "frame" etc.).

Further, on the front side of the pachinko machine, for example, a launch handle as one of the operating means of the player, an upper plate capable of storing the game ball to be used for the game, and a lower plate capable of storing the paid out game ball. Etc. are provided. In many cases, the above-mentioned effect buttons and movable effect devices are provided. Further, in the game area, for example, a start area through which a game ball can pass (sometimes referred to as a "start opening" or the like), a specific area (sometimes referred to as a "V winning opening" or the like), and the like. A variable winning device that can change between a state in which a game ball is easy to win and a state in which it is difficult to win (sometimes referred to as a "large winning opening"), and identification information (referred to as a "design", etc.) In some cases, a variable display device or the like capable of variablely displaying (including "special symbol" and "ordinary symbol") is provided.

Then, in the pachinko machine, the player operates the firing handle and launches the game ball into the game area to play the game. For example, when the launched game ball passes through the starting area, the variable display is started. At this time, whether or not to shift the gaming state with a probability according to the current state (for example, whether it is a probabilistic gaming state with a relatively high hit probability), the type of the starting area, or the like (for example, the game). Whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state that is advantageous to the person is determined (that is, whether or not to shift to the gaming state is drawn (or determined)). After that, when the stop condition of the variable display (for example, that the set fluctuation time has ended) is satisfied, the variable display is stopped in the stop mode according to the above determination result. At this time, if the above-mentioned determination result shifts the gaming state (hit), the stop mode to be stopped also becomes the display result corresponding to the hit, and corresponds to the hit according to the display result being displayed. It shifts to the game state to play. On the other hand, if the above determination result does not shift the gaming state (off), the stopped mode will also be the display result corresponding to the off, and the gaming state will not shift. For example, when the launched game ball passes through a specific area (the specific area is usually placed in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through), the game state is displayed regardless of the variable display device. It is decided to migrate.

That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 bets the necessary medals and the game is started when the player starts the operation, whereas the pachinko machine launches the game ball required by the player and operates the handle. Although they differ in that the game is started when the game ball passes through the starting area, for example, they are common in that the game is started by the player's game motion. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 and the pachinko machine are common in that when the start opportunity is established, the stop mode (in other words, the content of the privilege to be given) that is finally permitted to be displayed is determined. ..

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the variable display is basically stopped by the stop operation of the player, whereas in the pachinko machine, the stop condition is satisfied (regardless of the stop operation of the player). Although they differ in that the variable display is stopped, they are common in that the variable display is stopped according to the result of a predetermined decision and a privilege is given according to the stopped mode. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 and the pachinko machine are common in that they can perform effects related to the game. For example, the effect display device functions as the effect display unit and the information display unit described above. Further, it goes without saying that the pachinko machine may also be provided with the above-mentioned lamps, speakers, or other effect execution means such as the effect device, and the effect may be executed by these.

In many pachinko machines, decorative patterns (also referred to as "identification information" or the like) are variablely displayed in the above-mentioned effect display device. As described above, the original game result is displayed by the variable display device, but the variable display device is configured to be compact, and the display result is also displayed by the lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs. Therefore, it is often difficult for the player to recognize the game result. For this reason, the mainstream of pachinko machines is to play a game by variablely displaying (and stopping) the decorative symbol on the effect display device so as to be linked to the variable display of the variable display device. .. Then, such a variable display of the decorative symbol may be delayed for a certain period of time when the start opportunity is established, or the variable display may be started or temporarily stopped before the stop condition is satisfied. Basically, like the variable table device described above, the identification information is variablely displayed or stopped and displayed according to the progress of the game (for example, in the case of a hit, the decorative symbol is a special stop mode (for example, the symbols are aligned). ) Is stopped and displayed, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-special stop mode (for example, a random stitch) in the case of a missed pattern). It is also possible to apply the invention according to the embodiment.

That is, in the present embodiment, various matters described as the configuration of the external structure or the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 have characteristics peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, those that require a medal and cannot be replaced with a game ball, etc.). ), It can be applied as the configuration of the external structure or internal structure of the pachinko machine.

Further, also in the pachinko machine, various controls related to the game are performed by the main control circuit as the game control unit mounted on the main control board (partly, the control related to the payout is electrically connected to the main control board). (Including this, it may be performed by the payout control circuit mounted on the payout control board), and various controls related to the effect are performed by the sub-control circuit as the effect control unit mounted on the sub-control board. The various items described as the electrical configuration of the pachislot machine 1 can be applied as the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine, except for those having characteristics peculiar to the pachislot machine 1 (for example, those related to a stop operation).

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, as described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a bonus state, an RT state, an AT state, and other game states that are relatively advantageous to the player (or may be disadvantageous depending on the configuration). It is possible to provide an ART state or the like in which these are combined. For example, in the bonus state, by making the lottery mode of the small winning combination more advantageous than the non-bonus state, it is possible to continue the state in which medals are easily awarded (increased) for a certain period of time, and in the RT state, the replay role is played. By making the lottery mode more advantageous than the non-RT state, it is possible to maintain a state in which disconnection is unlikely to occur (as a result, medals are difficult to decrease) for a certain period of time, and in the AT state, an advantageous stop operation mode is available. By being notified, it is possible to continue the state in which medals are likely to be awarded (increased) for a certain period of time.

On the other hand, even in pachinko machines, it is possible to provide various gaming states having the same properties as these. For example, in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the variable winning device is controlled differently from the usual one, so that the game ball can be changed to a state in which it is easy to win, and the game ball is given. It is possible to maintain an easy (increasing) state for a certain period of time. Further, for example, in a time-saving game state (sometimes referred to as an "electric support state" or the like), a game ball is easily passed through the starting area by controlling the normal symbol differently from the normal state. This makes it possible to increase the lottery frequency by the variable display device and to maintain a state in which the number of game balls is difficult to decrease for a certain period of time. Further, for example, in the probabilistic gaming state, the special symbol is controlled differently from the usual one, so that the winning probability by the variable display device is increased (as a result, the number of gaming balls is likely to increase) for a certain period of time. Is possible.

That is, in the present embodiment, as the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1, various matters described as the configuration of the control regarding the transition (or transition) of the gaming state have the characteristics peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, the game section). Except for those with transitions, etc.), it can be applied as a control configuration related to the transition (or transition) of the gaming state of the pachinko machine. The same applies to various items described elsewhere as the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Although it is in the time-saving game state, even in the pachinko machine, it is possible to shift to the time-saving game state according to the specified number of games in the non-time-saving game state (normal game state). There is. That is, even in the pachinko machine, when the disadvantageous state (for example, the normal gaming state) continues for a predetermined period (for example, 900 games (rotation)) without shifting to the ceiling function (advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state)). Since it is possible to install an advantageous state (for example, a function that can shift to a time-saving game state) as a relief for the pachinko machine, various matters described as the configuration related to the ceiling function of the pachi-slot machine 1 are the configurations related to the ceiling function of the pachinko machine. Can be applied as.

Further, although the pachinko machine is in the time-saving gaming state, even in the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state), if the stop mode of the variable display device results in a display result corresponding to a specific deviation, this is the case. It is possible to shift to a time-saving gaming state with this as an opportunity. That is, even in a pachinko machine, it is possible to transition (shift) the gaming state (not triggered by the transition to the jackpot gaming state, etc.) by displaying a specific display result (combination of specific symbols), for example. , The various items described as the configuration related to the transition (transition) of the RT state by displaying the combination of the specific symbols of the pachi-slot machine 1 are the configurations related to the transition (transition) of the time-saving gaming state by displaying the specific display result of the pachinko machine. Can be applied.

(Medalless gaming machine)
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player's betting operation (that is, the operation of inserting a hand-held medal into the medal insertion slot 5 and betting, or the credited medal being placed in the MAX bet button 6a or the 1-bet button). The game is started with one of the start conditions (operation of operating 6b to bet), and if the medal is paid out when the game is finished, the hopper device 32 is driven to drive the medal payout exit 11. Although the form of paying out medals or being credited has been described, the configuration of the pachislot machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, the present embodiment relates to all the forms in which a player bets a game value required for a game, a game is played based on the bet, and a privilege is given (for example, a game value is given) based on the result of the game. The invention according to the above is applicable. That is, not only the form in which medals are physically inserted (hanged) and the medals are paid out by the movement of the player, but also the game value possessed by the player is electromagnetically managed inside the pachi-slot machine 1 ( Alternatively, even if it is not electromagnetic, it can be applied to a medal-less game that can be played at least in a manner in which the player cannot directly contact the game value). Here, such a pachi-slot machine 1 is referred to as a "medalless gaming machine". The medalless gaming machine may be referred to as a "managed gaming machine", an "enclosed gaming machine", or the like.

It should be noted that it may be the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself that electromagnetically manages the game value possessed by the player, or it may be mounted on the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). It may be a game value management device (connected) (hereinafter, such a management device may be described as a "medal number control board"). Hereinafter, an example in which this game value management device is provided will be described.

The game value management device is a device provided in the pachi-slot machine 1 having at least a ROM and an RWM (or RAM), and a communication device (hereinafter, such a communication device is described as a "connection terminal board". (There is), it is connected to an external game value providing device (hereinafter, such a game value providing device may be referred to as a "communication-only unit") so as to be bidirectionally communicable. The game value management device provides the game value necessary for the player to perform the game value lending operation (that is, the game value betting operation) by performing the necessary communication with the external game value providing device. (Action to play), action to give game value (that is, action to provide the player with the game value related to the grant when the winning combination related to the granting the game value is won (the winning combination is established)), and these. It is possible to perform an operation such as electromagnetically recording the game value provided by the operation of. The game value providing device may be referred to as a "game value (game medium) handling device", a "game value (game medium) lending device", a "sandwich", or the like.

Further, the external game value providing device is connected to an external ball ejection management device (ball ejection management server), and the game value management device is connected to the external ball ejection management device as a communication device and an external game value. It is configured so that the payout management information can be transmitted via the providing device. Here, the payout management information is composed of various information necessary for the external payout management device to be able to manage the payout. An example of the payout management information will be described later. Further, the external game value providing device and the external ball ejection management device are connected by, for example, an internet line.

Here, the “ball payout” directly means the number of game media paid out, but in the present embodiment, for example, the difference number (net increase number) obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts, etc. How much the benefits are given to the player (for example, how much the player is positive (how much the game store is negative), or how much the player is negative (how much the game store is positive) It is a concept that includes the degree of continuation of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, an AT state, a series of advantageous sections, etc.), or the degree of gambling assumed by a combination thereof.

Further, for example, a possessed game value number display device (not shown) for displaying the possessed game value number is provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the game value management device is based on the management result of the game value number. It is also possible to manage the game value number displayed on the possessed game value number display device. That is, the game value management device may be configured not only to record the total number of game values that the player can provide for the game by an electromagnetic method, but also to control the display of the recording result. .. In this case, the game value management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded game value number to an external game value providing device, and the player can freely transmit the signal. It has a performance that the recorded game value number cannot be reduced except when it is directly operated, and a signal indicating the recorded game value number has a performance that can be transmitted only via a communication device. Is desirable.

The game value management device not only has a function of electromagnetically managing the game value of the player by using an external game value providing device, but also the number of game values bet by the physical movement of the player and the pachislot machine 1. It may have a function of managing the number of game values paid out by the physical movement of. That is, it may be possible to manage the actual insertion and withdrawal of medals in the conventional pachi-slot machine 1. By doing so, the pachi-slot machine 1 can be controlled by a conventional method or can be controlled by a method such as the above-mentioned medalless gaming machine. Therefore, regardless of the specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1. Even if there is, it can be a common configuration. Further, in this case, the game value management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 31 and the hopper device 32 described above, and these are controlled by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). It is also possible to adopt a method of indirectly controlling by transmitting the control result.

Further, in addition to the above, the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with various operating means necessary for operating the medalless gaming machine, such as a lending operating means and a return (settlement) operating means that can be operated by the player. In addition, the game value providing device includes various devices such as an insertion slot for valuable value such as banknotes, an insertion slot for a recording medium (for example, an IC card), and a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money or the like from a mobile terminal. In addition, various operating means necessary for operating the medalless gaming machine, such as a lending operating means and a returning operating means that can be operated by the player, may be provided (all not shown). The insertable recording medium includes not only non-member recording media issued on the day of the game store but also member recording media owned by the members of the game store. The game value recorded on the non-member recording medium is valid only on the day (it becomes invalid from the next day onward), but the game value recorded on the member recording medium is valid from the next day onward.

An example of the flow of the game in this case will be described. For example, first, the player deposits valuable value to the game value providing device by either method. The game value providing device subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values according to the operation of the player to any of the lending operation means, and provides the pachi-slot machine 1 with the game value corresponding to the subtracted valuable values. Then, the player plays a game, and when the game value is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, when the game is ended after acquiring a predetermined number of game values according to the result of the game, the player operates one of the return operation means. The game value management device transmits the game value number to the game value providing device in response to the operation of the player to any of the return operation means. The game value providing device discharges a recording medium recording the transmitted game value number. The game value management device clears the game value number stored by itself when the game value number is transmitted. The player can take the discharged recording medium to a prize exchange or the like in order to exchange it for a prize, and the discharged recording medium can be used as a game value providing device corresponding to another pachi-slot machine 1. By inserting it, you can move the table and continue the game. Further, if the discharged recording medium is a member recording medium, the game can be stopped here because it is valid from the next day onward.

In the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation. However, depending on the mode of the player's return operation, the game is played. It may be configured so that only the number of game values desired by the person can be transmitted. That is, the game value held by the player may be divided. Further, the game value providing device records the transmitted game value number on a recording medium and discharges it, but the same value is applied to the player's mobile terminal by using the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna or the like. Information may be transmitted, and cash or cash equivalents may be discharged, for example, as long as they provide the player with equivalent value.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 or the game value providing device, a lock operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and communication between the game value management device and the game value providing device cannot be performed according to the operation of the lock operating means. It may be possible to control the state (locked state). In this case, in the pachislot machine 1 or the game value providing device, for example, setting a password (and inputting the set password), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication. The lock state may be released when the result of the authentication process is normal.

According to the medalless gaming machine described so far, as compared with the case where the gaming medium is physically used for the game, for example, a part of the external structure such as the medal insertion slot 5 or the medal payout exit 11, or the selector 31 or the like. Since it is not necessary to provide a part of the internal structure of the hopper device 32 or the like, not only the cost and manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, but also the power consumption of the gaming machine can be reduced. In addition, since it becomes more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the gaming machine. Further, since the player does not come into direct contact with the game medium, the game environment can be improved and noise can be reduced. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

(Example of configuration of a medalless gaming machine)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 34, a configuration example in the case where the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine. In the following, a configuration example in which a medal number control board (game value management device) is provided will be mainly described.

As described above, the medal number control board is connected to the main control board 71 and manages the number of medals (game value number) held by the player. Further, the medal number control board is connected to a communication-dedicated unit (game value providing device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). Further, the medal number control board transmits the ball ejection management information to the ball ejection management device via the connection terminal board and the communication dedicated unit. Further, a medal number control circuit (not shown) is mounted on the medal number control board. Further, the medal number control circuit includes, for example, a medal number control CPU (not shown), a medal number control ROM (not shown), and a medal number control RWM (not shown).

The payout management device is, for example, a server for payout management managed by the association (information center) to which the gaming machine maker belongs, and the transmitted payout management information is stored in the payout management device. Therefore, it is provided for the purpose of making it possible to monitor whether or not the gambling of each gaming machine is appropriate (ball ejection performance).

Therefore, from this point of view, the medal number control board and the connection terminal board play important functions in the pachi-slot machine 1 like the main control board 71, so that fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications can be prevented. It needs to be provided inside the pachi-slot machine 1. Configuration Example 1 and Configuration Example 2 shown in FIG. 34 show an example of such an embodiment.

<Structure example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 34 shows that the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case in the same manner as the main control board 71. Here, the main control board case is usually subjected to various sealing treatments to make it difficult to open (or remove) it, or to make it possible to recognize the trace of opening (or the number of times it has been opened). (For example, a seal by caulking or affixing a seal sticker, or affixing a caulking sticker that describes the record of cutting the caulking, etc.).

Therefore, if the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, the same security effect as that of the main control board 71 can be obtained, and fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications can be appropriately prevented.

<Structure example 2>
In the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34, the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in a medal number control board case provided separately from the main control board case, unlike the configuration example 1 described above. It shows that there is. The medal number control board case shall be configured as a transparent (or substantially transparent) resin case similar to the main control board case, and the medal number control board and connection terminals housed therein shall be configured. The board shall be housed in an easily visible state.

Here, the medal number control board case of the configuration example 2 may be configured to be subjected to the same sealing process as the main control board case, or at least a part thereof may be sealed. You can also do it. For example, in the medal number control board case, the seal may be performed by caulking as in the main control board case, but the seal may not be attached. Further, for example, in the main control board case, it is obligatory to use a predetermined caulking seal, but in the medal number control board case, any seal may be used as the caulking seal.

<Example of accumulated data>
The stored data example shown in FIG. 34 shows an example of various data stored in the ball ejection management device. That is, an example of the ball ejection management information transmitted by the medal number control board to the ball ejection management device via the connection terminal board and the communication dedicated unit is shown. It should be noted that this is only an example, and among the various information shown in FIG. 34, a part thereof may be configured not to be transmitted, or information other than the various information shown in FIG. 34 may be transmitted. You can also.

Further, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-dedicated unit is arbitrary, and the timing at which the communication-dedicated unit transmits information to the ball ejection management device is also arbitrary. If the payout management device can monitor the payout performance of each gaming machine for at least one unit (for example, one business day of a game store), the ball may be transmitted at any timing. .. For example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-dedicated unit may be different from the timing at which the communication-dedicated unit transmits information to the payout management device. Further, for example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-dedicated unit may be different depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data "total number of input" is the cumulative number of input per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transfers information on the number of game values bet by the player's betting operation to a communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), except for those bet by the operation of the re-game. The unit dedicated to communication transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the game store).

The accumulated data "total number of payouts" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transfers the information of the game value number given by the payout process of the gaming machine to the communication-dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), except for the one given by the operation of the re-game. The communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the amusement shop).

The accumulated data "MY" is the maximum difference number generated in one unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on (in short, the difference number obtained in the period when the game value is most increased in one unit. (Referred to as "MY"). For example, the medal number control board calculates such a maximum difference number and transmits the calculated information to the communication-dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time when the game store is closed), and the communication-dedicated unit receives the information. Is transmitted to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the game store).

The accumulated data "total number of payouts for pachinko machines" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and is the cumulative number of payouts paid out during the operation of various pachinko machines. .. For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during the operation of various bonuses at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during operation of various bonuses). It is transmitted to the unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the game store).

The accumulated data "total number of continuous payouts" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and the continuous bonuses (RB, including RB in operation of BB). It is the cumulative number of payouts paid out during the operation of. For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during the operation of the continuous bonus at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during the operation of the continuous bonus). It is transmitted to the unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the game store).

Further, the medal number control board transmits various information that can be displayed on the combination ratio monitoring device 54 to the communication-dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of calculation by the combination ratio monitoring device 54), and the communication-dedicated unit receives. The information is transmitted to the ball ejection management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transmission from the medal number control board). The accumulated data "combined character ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned accessory ratio information, and the accumulated data "continuous accessory ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned continuous accessory ratio information, and the accumulated data "advantageous". The "section ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific section ratio information, and the accumulated data "instructed accessory ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned accessory ratio information to be aggregated / calculated even during the AT state. , The accumulated data "state ratio of accessories, etc." corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific section ratio information which is the target of aggregation / calculation even during operation of various accessories.

The accumulated data "number of games" is the cumulative number of games per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of games played to the communication-dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), and the communication-dedicated unit accumulates the information at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game). For example, it is transmitted to the payout management device at the end of business of the game store).

The stored data "main control chip ID number" is an individual identification number (also referred to as "CPUID", which is referred to as "chip ID number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this individual identification number when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the ball ejection management device. Information including this individual identification number is transmitted.

The stored data "main control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this maker code when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the payout management device. Send information including the manufacturer code.

The stored data "main control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this product code when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the payout management device. Send information including the product code.

The accumulated data "medal number control chip ID number" is an individual identification number of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this individual identification number when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the ball ejection management device. Information including this individual identification number is transmitted. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication-dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information is "0".

The stored data "medal number control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each game machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this maker code when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the payout management device. Send information including the manufacturer code. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication-dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information is "0".

The stored data "medal number control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this product code when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the payout management device. Send information including the product code. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication-dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information is "0".

In this way, the ball ejection management device can store various types of information (ball ejection management information) transmitted from the gaming machine. Further, the payout management information includes a plurality of individual identification information (for example, the above-mentioned "main control chip ID number" to "medal number control chip product code") capable of identifying an individual of the gaming machine. Therefore, the payout management device can identify the gaming machine of the transmission source by these individual identification information, and for example, from a certain time, the "main control chip ID number" and the "medal number control chip ID number" are used. If the correspondence between the two is different, it is possible to recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (that is, the possibility of fraudulent activity or unauthorized modification).

In addition, the ball ejection management information includes a plurality of ball ejection information (for example, the above-mentioned "total number of inserted balls" to "number of games") that can identify the ball ejection performance per unit. Therefore, the payout management device can recognize whether or not the gambling of the source gaming machine is within an appropriate range based on the payout information. For example, if the "total number of payouts" or "instructed accessory ratio" becomes extremely high from a certain time, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity or unauthorized modification has been performed, or there is some defect in the specification design in the first place. It is possible to recognize the possibility that there was.

When the above-mentioned possibility is recognized by the ball ejection management device, it can be expected that the result will be notified to the game store, the game machine maker, or the like, and appropriate measures will be taken. That is, each is based on a plurality of managed gaming machines, a game value providing device (communication dedicated unit) that transmits the payout management information transmitted from the managed gaming machine to the payout management device, and the sent ball payout management information. By constructing a management system including a ball ejection management device that manages the ball ejection performance of the managed gaming machines, it is possible to appropriately manage all managed gaming machines under control.

<Modification 1>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured so that the number of gaming values possessed by the player is managed by the medal number control board. Therefore, the medal number control board may be provided with a medal number monitoring device (not shown) so that the manager of the game store can grasp such management status or other information.

The medal number monitoring device is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED and is provided inside the medal number control board case. The medal number monitoring device collects various information (for example, a part or all of the above-mentioned payout management information) regarding the number of game values aggregated and calculated by the medal number control CPU (or may be the main CPU 101). Display sequentially. If the medal number monitoring device displays all the display contents of the combination ratio monitoring device 54, the combination ratio monitoring device 54 may not be provided. Alternatively, the combination ratio monitoring device 54 may be used in combination with the medal number monitoring device.

Further, the medal number monitoring device may be mounted on the medal number control board, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a connection terminal board) connected to the medal number control board. May be good. Further, if it is in the cabinet G, it may be provided in another place. For example, it may be provided on the medal number control board case. Further, a management switch for starting the display on the medal number monitoring device or switching the contents thereof may be provided in the cabinet G so that various information may be displayed when the switch is operated. Further, on the premise that such a management switch is used, for example, the information display device 14 may be used in combination with the medal number monitoring device.

The medal number monitoring device may display the type of the error state when various error states related to the medal state occur. For example, a communication error with the main control board 71 occurs, a communication error with the connection terminal board occurs, a communication error with the game value providing device occurs, or an abnormality occurs in the medal number control RWM. In some cases, etc., the corresponding numerical value may be displayed. In this case, in order to make it easy for the manager of the game store to recognize which error state the displayed numerical value corresponds to, the corresponding relationship is set in or near the medal number control board case. An explanatory part (sticker sticking, printing, etc.) may be provided.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in the medalless gaming machine, the medal number control board can be configured to transmit the ball ejection management information to the outside via the connection terminal board. Here, in the present embodiment, an external centralized terminal plate 55 is also provided to transmit information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal plate and the external centralized terminal plate 55 can be configured as follows, for example.

For example, the connection terminal plate and the external centralized terminal plate 55 are configured as a common terminal plate. As a result, not only the number of parts can be reduced, but also the wiring to the outside can be reduced, so that the security effect can be enhanced.

Further, for example, the connection terminal plate and the external centralized terminal plate 55 are configured as one unit. Further, for example, the connection terminal plate and the external centralized terminal plate 55 are arranged in the vicinity at least in the cabinet G. This makes it possible to improve work efficiency at the time of connection. Further, the length of the wiring can be made constant, and the wiring location can be limited, so that the security effect can be enhanced.

<Modification 3>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured to transmit the payout management information to the payout management device. Further, in the ball ejection management device, the ball ejection performance of each medalless gaming machine can be appropriately managed by the transmitted ball ejection management information. Therefore, on the premise that the ball ejection performance can be appropriately managed in this way, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. That is, it may not have the function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of certain regulatory conditions.

Further, the function of appropriately managing the ball ejection performance may be provided on the medal number control board, and the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided on the premise that the ball ejection performance can be appropriately managed in this way. .. That is, it may not have the function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of certain regulatory conditions.

For example, the medal number control board may be configured to include a ball output monitoring RWM (which may be the above-mentioned medal number control RWM or another RWM). For example, the ball ejection monitoring RWM is initialized when the setting is changed, but is not initialized at the end of the advantageous section to monitor the ball ejection. Then, when the monitored ball output exceeds a certain threshold value, for example, the advantageous section itself is not forcibly terminated, but the probability of occurrence of navigation is reduced, the probability of AT state being extended is reduced, or the like. Alternatively, the AT state itself can be terminated to control the ball ejection performance. Even in this way, it is possible to appropriately manage the ball ejection performance. In this case, such a control result may be transmitted to the ball ejection management device as the ball ejection management information. That is, both the medal number control board and the ball ejection management device may be configured to be able to manage the ball ejection performance of each medalless gaming machine.

(Configuration example of main control board of pachislot machine)
Subsequently, a configuration example of the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. In the following, a configuration example of reuse of the main control board 71 will be mainly described.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, and one of them is that it is necessary to print the manufacturer name and the board control number on the main control board 71. It has become. The manufacturer name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactures the pachi-slot machine 1, and the control number is a number for specifying the model of the main control board 71.

<Structure example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35 shows that the manufacturer name and the board control number are printed in characters on the main control board 71 as in the conventional case. Here, in the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, it is assumed that the pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “model A”) on which the main control board 71 is mounted is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd. At this time, initially, only the manufacturer name "BB Co., Ltd." and the board control number "BB-00-11-22" in the lower row are printed. After that, when the model A is removed from the amusement shop and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as "model B"), the company Co., Ltd. AA deletes the printed lower manufacturer name and board control number by laser engraving, and in a different space, the manufacturing number and board control number related to the company (for example, the upper manufacturer of the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35). The name "AA Co., Ltd." and the board control number "AA-00-11-22") must be newly printed.

After that, the model B was removed from the amusement shop, and for example, BB Co., Ltd. tried to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as "model C"). In this case, BB Co., Ltd. must delete the printed manufacturer name and board control number in the upper row by laser engraving, and newly print the serial number and board control number related to the company in a different space. However, in the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, since there is no free space anymore, the main control board 71 can be reused due to the above-mentioned restrictions, although it can still be sufficiently reused in terms of hardware. There was a problem that it might not be possible.

This is the same even when a plurality of manufacturer names and board control numbers are printed from the beginning. For example, even if the serial number and the board control number related to both AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. are printed in advance, the serial number and the board control number related to AA Co., Ltd. are laser-engraved at the time of manufacturing the model A. This is because it will be deleted. Therefore, although there is a possibility that BB Co., Ltd. can reuse it, AA Co., Ltd. cannot reuse it. On the other hand, the following Configuration Example 2 and Configuration Example 3 can be expected to solve the above-mentioned problems. That is, it is possible to improve the reusability of a board used for controlling a game, such as the main control board 71.

<Structure example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35 shows printing a code including a manufacturer name and a board control number. In the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of a code including a manufacturer name and a board control number, but a JAN code (bar code) and others are used. Code can be used. That is, the code is any as long as it includes information that allows the confirmer to uniquely identify the manufacturer name and the board control number by some means (for example, a mobile terminal or the like). May be good.

In the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, first, assuming that the model A is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., the first reference numeral from the right is printed. The first code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, when the model A is removed from the game store and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to manufacture the model B, the second code from the right is printed and the first code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The second code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to AA Co., Ltd.

After that, the model B is removed from the game store, and for example, when BB Co., Ltd. tries to manufacture the model C, the third code from the right is printed and the second code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The third code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, even when the model C is removed from the amusement shop and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. is the third from the right. The code of is deleted by laser engraving, the fourth code from the right is printed, and the fourth code from the right contains information that can identify the serial number and board control number related to AA Co., Ltd. If this is the case, the main control board 71 can be reused for a new pachislot machine 1.

That is, in the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, by printing a code including the manufacturer name and the board control number, the manufacturer name and the board control number are printed (printed) on the surface of the main control board 71. ) Since space can be saved, it is possible to improve the reusability as compared with the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35.

<Structure example 3>
Configuration Example 3 shown in FIG. 35 shows that a code including a manufacturer name and a substrate control number is printed in the same manner as in Configuration Example 2 described above. In the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of (for example, four) codes are printed from the beginning. For example, it is assumed that two copies of AA Co., Ltd. and two copies of BB Co., Ltd. are printed. Further, on the surface of the main control board 71 (or it may be on the main control board case corresponding thereto), the code is read by caulking the portion corresponding to each code with, for example, a band-shaped member or the like. It is possible to fix it in an impossible state. Further, for example, by cutting a strip-shaped member or the like, it is possible to release the fixing and make the code readable.

In the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, first, assuming that the model A is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., only the first code from the right is readable, and the second to fourth codes from the right are readable. Is considered unreadable. The first code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, model A was removed from the amusement store, and for example, when AA Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture model B, only the second code from the right was readable, and the first, third, and 4 from the right. The second code is considered unreadable. The second code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to AA Co., Ltd.

After that, the model B was removed from the amusement store, and for example, when BB Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture the model C, only the third code from the right was readable, and the first, second and fourth codes from the right were readable. The second code is considered unreadable. The third code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, even when the model C is removed from the game store and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. is the fourth from the right. If only the code of No. 1 is readable and the first to third codes from the right are unreadable, the main control board 71 can be reused for a new pachislot machine 1.

Further, in the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, since it is sufficient to make at least one code readable and the other code unreadable, further reuse is possible, and more. It is also possible to reuse it at the game machine manufacturer. Also in the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, it is possible to provide only the caulking hole and to print the code at the portion corresponding to the caulking hole each time it is reused.

[10. Second game machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 46, another specific example of the specifications relating to the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as a “second game machine”. The difference between the second gaming machine and the first gaming machine will be described.
The second gaming machine is a medalless gaming machine, and the configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the same as that in FIG. 34.
Further, since the second gaming machine is a game that does not use a medal, which is a gaming medium, the "medal" in the following description is a common name indicating the gaming value.

[10-1. Main control circuit]
The configuration of the main control circuit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 36.

As shown in FIG. 36, in addition to the main CPU 101, the main ROM 102, and the main RAM 103, the main control circuit 100 includes an external bus interface 104, a clock circuit 105, a reset controller 106, an arithmetic circuit 107, and a random number. It has a circuit 110, a parallel port 111, an interrupt controller 112, a timer circuit 113, a first serial communication circuit 114, and a second serial communication circuit 115. Each of these parts constituting the main control circuit 100 is connected to each other via a signal bus 116.

The external bus interface 104 electrically connects the main control circuit 100 with an external signal bus (not shown) to which various components (for example, reels and the like) provided outside the main control circuit 100 are connected. It is an interface circuit for.

The clock circuit 105 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown), and receives a clock pulse signal for CPU operation input from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) to other components (for example, a timer circuit). It is converted into a clock pulse signal of the frequency used in 113).

The clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is output to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the clock pulse signal output from the clock circuit 105 to control the game operation in general. The clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is also output to the reset controller 106.

The reset controller 106 resets the IAT (Illegal Address TraP) and the WDT (watchdog timer) based on the reset signal input from the power supply management circuit 93. The arithmetic circuit 107 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit.

The random number circuit 110 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Although not shown, the random number circuit 110 has random number registers 0 for obtaining 2-byte hard-latch random numbers, random number registers 1 to 3 for obtaining 2-byte soft-latch random numbers, and 1-byte soft-latch random numbers. It is composed of random number registers 4 to 7 for obtaining. The main CPU 101 extracts one value from the random numbers in a predetermined range generated by the random number circuit 110, for example, as a random number value for internal lottery.

The parallel port 111 is a port (memory map I / O) of signals input / output between the main control circuit 100 and various circuits (for example, power supply management circuit 93, etc.) provided outside the main control circuit 100. Is. The parallel port 111 is also connected to the random number circuit 110 and the interrupt controller 112.

The interrupt controller 112 interrupts processing by the main CPU 101 based on a power failure detection signal input from the power supply management circuit 93 via the parallel port 111 or a timeout signal input from the timer circuit 113 at a cycle of 1.1172 ms. Controls the execution timing of.

When a power failure detection signal is input from the power management circuit 93, or when a timeout signal is input from the timer circuit 113, the interrupt controller 112 uses an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command as the main CPU 101. Output to.

The main CPU 101 performs periodic interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) based on the interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 112 in response to the timeout signal from the timer circuit 103.

The timer circuit 113 (PTC) operates with a clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 (a clock pulse signal having a frequency obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU by a divider (not shown)) ( Count the elapsed time). The timer circuit 113 outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 112 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec.

The first serial communication circuit 114 is a circuit that controls the serial transmission operation when data (various control commands (commands)) are transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72. The second serial communication circuit 115 is a circuit that controls the serial transmission operation when data is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

When the actual medal is inserted or the MAX bet button 6a is pressed and the start lever 7 (see FIG. 1) is turned on, the first gaming machine extracts the internal lottery random number value, but the second gaming machine , The random value is extracted even when the start lever 7 is kept on.

In the second gaming machine, the detection signal of the MAX bet button 6a (see FIG. 1) is input from the bet switch 6S (see FIG. 3) to the input port PI1 of the parallel port 111. The detection signal of the 1-bet button 6b (see FIG. 1) is input from the bet switch 6S to the input port PI2 of the parallel port 111. The detection signal of the start switch 7S is input to the input port PI3 of the parallel port 111.

As described above, the bet switch 6S constitutes a decision operation detection unit for detecting the bet operation, and more specifically, the first decision operation detection unit for detecting the operation of the MAX bet button 6a and the operation of the 1-bet button 6b are performed. The second determination operation detection unit to be detected is configured.

Further, the main CPU 101 is a detection signal of the bet switch 6S (detection signal of the MAX bet button 6a, detection signal of the 1 bet button 6b), a detection signal of the settlement switch 9S (see FIG. 3), and an automatically inserted bet. It constitutes a game value number determination unit that determines the number of bets (game value number) based on the number.

A latch signal is input to the input port PI0 of the parallel port 111 from the latch signal generation circuit shown in FIG. 37. The latch signal generation circuit includes an XOR circuit (first circuit) 140 that exclusively ORs the detection signal of the MAX bet button 6a and the detection signal of the 1-bet button 6b, an output signal of the XOR circuit 140, and a start switch 7S. It is composed of an AND circuit (second circuit) 141 that takes a logical product with the detection signal.

In FIG. 36, in the random number circuit 110, a random number update circuit (not shown) is latched by inputting a latch signal, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is set in the random number register 0. The hard latch random number set in the random number register 0 is acquired as an internal lottery random number value by the main CPU 101 in the random number value acquisition process (see S4 in FIG. 23).

The main CPU 101 determines whether or not the latch signal input to the input port PI0 of the parallel port 111 is effective for the progress of the game based on the level of each signal input to the input ports PI1 to PI3 of the parallel port 111. Is determined.

For example, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the input port P13 (start switch 7S) is in the ON state in order to determine whether or not the latch signal of the input port PI0 is valid by the latch signal generation circuit shown in FIG. 37. If it is on, it is determined whether either the input port P11 (MAX bet button 6a) or the input port P12 (1 bet button 6b) is on, and if either one is on, it is input to the input port PI0. The latch signal is judged to be valid, and if the input port P13 is in the off state, the input port P11 and the input port P12 are in the off state, or the input port P11 and the input port P12 are in the on state, the latch signal of the input port PI0 is invalid. to decide.

When it is determined that the latch signal input to the input port PI0 of the parallel port 111 is valid, the main CPU 101 is in a state where execution of the internal lottery process (see S5 in FIG. 23) is permitted. In this way, the main CPU 101 constitutes the latch signal determination means.

If it is determined that the latch signal input to the input port PI0 of the parallel port 111 is not valid, the main CPU 101 is not in a state where the execution of the internal lottery process is permitted.

[10-2. Game flow]
The first gaming machine starts the game when the actual medal is inserted or the MAX bet 6a is pressed and the start lever 7 is turned on, but the second gaming machine keeps the start lever 7 on. Start the game even when you are there. Hereinafter, the flow of the game of the second gaming machine will be described with reference to the time charts shown in FIGS. 38 to 41.

[10-2-1. Game flow when the game is started from the state where the start lever is off]
With reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 38, the flow of the game when the game excluding the re-game is started from the state where the start lever 7 is off will be described. In FIG. 38, the horizontal axis represents the passage of time, and the vertical axis represents the operation state of the re-game (re-game in the figure), the detection state of the bet switch 6S (MAXBET in the figure), and the execution of the input process from the top. State, effective state of start lever 7 (in the figure, acceptance state of the reel rotation device), operation state of the start lever 7 (input state of the reel rotation device in the figure), start of the game (in the figure, rotation of the reel) Operation state of the device), execution period of random value acquisition process (see S4 in FIG. 23, random number acquisition process in the figure), execution period of internal lottery process (see S5 in FIG. 23, in the figure, lottery process), reel rotation. Execution period of processing at the start (see S6 to S11 in FIG. 23, in the figure, rotation processing), execution period of processing at the time of reel stop (see S12 in FIG. 23, in the figure, stop processing), processing after the reel is stopped. It shows the execution period of (see S13 to S16 and S2 in FIG. 23, in the figure, post-stop processing).

At time t1, for example, when the MAX bet button 6a is turned on, the input process is started and the maximum bet number (specified number) is set. When the charging process is completed at time t2, the start lever 7 (rotating cylinder rotating device) becomes effective.

When the start lever 7 is turned on at time t3, the game is started, the start lever 7 is disabled, the random number acquisition process is executed, and then the internal lottery process, the reel rotation start process, the reel stop control process, and the reel The processing after the stop is executed sequentially.

[10-2-2. Game flow when re-game is started from the state where the start lever is off]
With reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 39, the flow of the game when the re-game is started from the state where the start lever 7 is off will be described. The horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 39 are the same as the horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 38.

In the operating state of the re-game, the charging process by automatic charging is started at time t11, and when the charging process is completed at time t12, the start lever 7 is activated. When the start lever 7 is turned on at time t13, the game is started, the start lever 7 is disabled, the random number acquisition process is executed, and then the internal lottery process, the reel rotation start process, the reel stop control process, and the reel The processing after the stop is executed sequentially.

[10-2-3. Game flow when the game is started from the state where the start lever is on]
With reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 40, the flow of the game when the game excluding the re-game is started from the state where the start lever 7 is on will be described. The horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 40 are the same as the horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 38.

When the MAX bet button 6a is turned on at time t21 while the start lever 7 is on, the charging process is started and the maximum bet number (specified number) is set. When the closing process is completed at time t22, the start lever 7 is activated.

When the MAX bet button 6a is turned off at time t23, the game is started, the start lever 7 is disabled, the random number acquisition process is executed, and then the internal lottery process, the reel rotation start process, the reel stop control process, The processing after the reel is stopped is sequentially executed.

In FIG. 40, when the 1-bet button 6b is turned on at time t21, the game is not started even if the 1-bet button 6b is turned off at time t23. Similarly, if the number of bets is less than the maximum number at time t21, the game is not started. However, at the start of the game, if the number of bets is 1 and the game can be executed, the game is started when the 1-bet button 6b is turned off.

When the game is not started in this way, if the game is possible with the current number of bets, the start lever 7 is turned off and the game is started when the start lever 7 is turned on again. Further, even if the start lever 7 remains on, the game is started when the number of bets reaches the maximum number of bets by turning on the MAX bet button 6a or turning on the 1-bet button 6b.

Further, if the next game after one game is completed can be executed with less than the maximum number of bets, and the start lever 7 is on, the main CPU 101 is a speaker group connected to the sub-relay board 74. A notification unit such as the main display device 210 connected to the sub-control board 72 is notified of a message prompting the start lever 7 to be turned off.

By notifying in this way, the player is given room to change the number of bets when it is advantageous to play with less than the maximum number of bets and when it is not disadvantageous to play with less than the maximum number of bets. be able to.

[10-2-4. Game flow when re-game is started from the state where the start lever is on]
With reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 41, the flow of the game when the re-game is started from the state where the start lever 7 is on will be described. The horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 41 are the same as the horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 38.

In the state where the start lever 7 is turned on in the re-game activated in the first game, the charging process by automatic charging is started at time t31, and when the charging process is completed at time t32, the start lever 7 becomes effective. ..

When, for example, the MAX bet button 6a is turned on at time t33 and the MAX bet button 6a is turned off at time t34, the game is started, the start lever 7 is disabled, the random number acquisition process is executed, and then. , Internal lottery processing, reel rotation start processing, reel stop control processing, and processing after reel stop are sequentially executed.

In FIG. 41, when the start lever 7 is in the enabled state, even if the start lever 7 is turned off, the game is started, the start lever 7 is disabled, and the random number acquisition process is executed. After that, the internal lottery process, the reel rotation start process, the reel stop control process, and the process after the reel stop are sequentially executed.

Further, in FIG. 41, when the charging process is completed at time t32, the game is started and the random number acquisition process is executed without the start lever 7 becoming effective, and then the internal lottery process and the reel rotation start process are performed. The reel stop control process and the process after the reel stop may be sequentially executed.

[10-3. Confirmation of communication between the main control circuit and the sub control circuit]
As described above, various commands such as an input state command, a winning operation command, a medal insertion (bet) command, a start command, and an initialization command are transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. The input state command includes various data indicating the detection state of the MAX bet button 6a, the detection state of the 1-bet button 6b, the detection state of the start switch 7S, and the like.

After receiving the initialization command or the winning operation command, the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 determines whether or not the game is started based on various data included in the medal insertion command and the input status command corresponding to the first command. To judge.

Specifically, it is confirmed by the medal insertion command that the maximum number of bets (specified number) has been reached, and the detection state of the MAX bet button 6a (input port P11) included in the input state command, the 1-bet button 6b (input port). From the detection state of P12) and the detection state of the start switch 7S (input port P13), the start switch 7S is in the on state and the MAX bet button 6a is changed from the on state to the off state as the start condition of the first game. In this case, when the start switch 7S is on and the 1-bet button 6b changes from the on state to the off state as the start condition of the second game, the MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet are set as the start condition of the third game. When the button 6b is in the off state and the start switch 7S changes from the off state to the on state, it is determined that the game has started.

When the sub CPU 201 does not receive the start command corresponding to the second command even after a certain period of time (for example, a suitable time between 10 msec and 100 msec) has elapsed after determining that the game has started, the main control circuit 100 Performs error processing such as notifying a communication error between the device and the sub-control circuit 200.

The start of the game corresponds to the time t3 in FIG. 38, the time t13 in FIG. 39, the time t23 in FIG. 40, the time t34 in FIG. 41, the time t42 in FIG.

In the communication error processing, the sub CPU 201 causes, for example, output an error message to the speaker group connected to the sub relay board 74, the LED group, the main display device 210 connected to the sub control board 72, and / or the sub display device 220. ..

[10-4. Main processing]
With reference to FIG. 42, the main process (main operation process) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 in the second gaming machine will be described.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection state of the bet switch 6S has changed from off to on. For example, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the on-edge of the MAX bet button 6a is detected.

If it is determined that the detection state of the bet switch 6S has changed from off to on (YES), the process of step S402 is executed. If it is determined that the detection state of the bet switch 6S is not turned on from off (NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S401.

In step S402, the main CPU 101 executes the input process. The process executed in the input process corresponds to the process of steps S41 to S49 of the medal acceptance / start check process shown in FIG. 25. After executing the process of step S402, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S403.

In step S403, the main CPU 101 executes the settlement button check process. In the settlement button check process, the main CPU 101 transmits the number of game values credited to the number of medals control board (“medals” in the first game machine) and the number of game values bet (1 to specified number). At the same time, the number of credits and the number of bets are reset to 0. The medal number control board returns the credited game value number and the bet game value number to the game value providing device (sand).

In the operating state of the re-game, the main CPU 101 skips the settlement button check process. After executing the process of step S403, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S404.

In step S404, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection state of the start switch 7S has changed from off to on. That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the on-edge of the start lever 7 (rotating cylinder rotating device) is detected.

If it is determined that the detection state of the start switch 7S has changed from off to on (YES), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S407. If it is determined that the detection state of the start switch 7S is not turned on from off (NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S405.

In step S405, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection state of the start switch 7S is ON. That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever 7 is on.

If it is determined that the detection state of the start switch 7S is ON (YES), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S406. If it is determined that the detection state of the start switch 7S is not on (NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S403.

In step S406, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection state of the bet switch 6S has changed from on to off. For example, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the off-edge of the MAX bet button 6a has been detected.

If it is determined that the detection state of the bet switch 6S has changed from on to off (YES), the process of step S407 is executed. If it is determined that the detection state of the bet switch 6S is not from on to off (NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S403.

In step S407, the main CPU 101 executes a random number acquisition process. The process executed in the random number acquisition process corresponds to the process of step S4 of the main process shown in FIG. 23, except that the random number value for internal lottery is the random number registers 0 to 2 as described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. Get a hard-latch random number for a byte. After executing the process of step S407, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S408.

In step S408, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process. The process executed in the lottery process corresponds to the process of step S5 of the main process shown in FIG. 23. After executing the process of step S408, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S409.

In step S409, the main CPU 101 executes a rotation process. The process executed in the rotation process corresponds to the process of steps S6 to S11 of the main process shown in FIG. 23. After executing the process of step S409, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S410.

In step S410, the main CPU 101 executes a stop process. The process executed in the stop process corresponds to the process of steps S12 to S16 and S2 of the main process shown in FIG. 23. After executing the process of step S410, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S411.

In step S411, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the replay has been activated. If it is determined that the replay has been activated (YES), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S402. If it is determined that the replay has not been activated (NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S401.

[10-5. External structure]
A suitable external structure of the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 43. The second gaming machine may have the external structure shown in FIG.

In FIG. 43, the start lever 7 functions as a palm rest on which the player can place one hand (left hand in the second gaming machine). The start lever 7 is provided on the pedestal portion in a state of being urged upward by an urging member or the like.

The start lever 7 is located at the first position where the pedestal portion and the upper surface are continuous when nothing is placed, and when the load state such that the player's left hand is placed, the start lever 7 has a predetermined angle (for example, 10). It is located in a second position tilted downwards in the range (a preferred angle of ° to 30 °).

The start switch 7S (see FIG. 3) is composed of a photo interrupter, and if the start lever 7 is in the first position, it detects that the start lever 7 is off, and if the start lever 7 is in the second position, it starts. It detects that the lever 7 is on.

By configuring the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S in this way, the start lever 7 is kept on by simply placing the left hand on the start lever 7.

The MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b are provided at positions where the player can easily press the left hand with the fingertip of the left hand while the left hand is placed on the start lever 7. The bet switch 6S (see FIG. 3) is configured by a photo interrupter and functions in the same manner as the bet switch 6S of the first gaming machine.

Similar to the first gaming machine, the information display unit 14 includes a credit lamp 14a. In the second gaming machine, the credit lamp 14a displays the number of credited gaming values. On the credit lamp 14a, the number of game values up to an appropriate value such as 0 to 99999 is displayed.

With the external structure described above, the game can be easily advanced by appropriately pressing the MAX bet button 6a or the 1-bet button 6b with the fingertips of the left hand while the player has his left hand placed on the start lever 7. Can be done.

Although FIG. 43 shows an example in which the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1-bet button 6b and the settlement button 9 are arranged on the left side of the pedestal portion, and the information display unit 14 is arranged on the right side of the pedestal portion. The start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1-bet button 6b, and the settlement button 9 may be arranged on the right side of the pedestal portion, or the information display unit 14 may be arranged on the left side of the pedestal portion.

[10-6. Action effect]
As described above, in the second gaming machine, even when the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S, the bet operation is not detected after the bet number is determined to be the maximum bet number. By starting the game with this as an opportunity, the operation of the start lever 7 is not invalidated even if the start lever 7 is operated before the bet operation. Therefore, the second gaming machine can allow the player to proceed with the game while the start lever 7 is on, so that the gaming operation can be smoothly performed.

Further, in the second gaming machine, even if the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S in the operating state of the re-game, the detection state of the bet switch 6S is changed from on to off after the automatic closing is completed. Since the game is started when the game is started, the game operation can be smoothly performed even in the operating state of the re-game.

Further, in the second gaming machine, even if the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S in the operating state of the re-game, the detection state of the bet switch 6S is changed from on to off after the automatic closing is completed. Since the game is started when the start operation is no longer detected by the start switch 7S, the game operation can be smoothly performed even in the operating state of the re-game.

Further, even if the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S, the second gaming machine starts if the number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets and if the game can be played with the current number of bets. Since the game is started when the start operation is detected again by the switch 7S, the game operation can be smoothly performed even for a player who intends to start the game with less than the maximum number of bets. ..

Further, in the state where the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S, the second gaming machine plays a game when the number of bets is determined to be the maximum number of bets when the number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets. Since it starts, the game operation can be smoothly performed.

Further, in the second gaming machine, if the next game in which one game is completed can be played with less than the maximum number of bets and the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S, the start lever 7 is used. In order to notify the off message, the player has room to change the number of bets when it is advantageous to play with less than the maximum number of bets and when it is not disadvantageous to play with less than the maximum number of bets. Can be given.

Further, the second gaming machine latches the random number generated by the random number circuit 110 by the latch signal generated by the latch signal generation circuit shown in FIG. 37, and determines the internal winning combination based on the latched random number. Even when the game is started in a state where the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S, the internal winning combination can be determined at the timing when the game is started.

Further, the second gaming machine determines that the latch signal is effective for the progress of the game based on the detection signal of the MAX bet button 6a, the detection signal of the 1-bet button 6b, and the detection signal of the start switch 7S. In some cases, the internal winning combination is determined, so that it is possible to prevent the internal winning combination from being determined based on an invalid latch signal.

Further, after receiving the initialization command or the winning operation command, the second gaming machine has elapsed for a certain period of time or more since it is determined that the game has started based on various data included in the medal insertion command and the input status command. However, if the start command is not received, communication error processing such as notifying a communication error between the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200 is executed, so that the communication error processing between the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200 is executed. You can check the communication status of.

[10-7. Modification example]
The second gaming machine described above starts the game when the detection state of the bet switch 6S is changed from on to off (off edge) while the start lever 7 is kept on. In the example, the game is started when the maximum number of bets is set while the start lever 7 is kept on.

[10-7-1. Game flow (variation example)]
Hereinafter, the flow of the game of the modified example of the second gaming machine will be described with reference to the time charts shown in FIGS. 44 to 45. It should be noted that the flow of the game when the game or the re-game is started from the state where the start lever is off is the same as the flow of the game described with reference to each time chart shown in FIGS. 38 to 39. , The explanation is omitted.

[10-7-1-1. Game flow when the game is started from the state where the start lever is on]
With reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 44, the flow of the game when the game excluding the re-game is started from the state where the start lever 7 is on will be described. The horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 44 are the same as the horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 38.

When the MAX bet button 6a is turned on at time t41 while the start lever 7 is on, the charging process is started and the maximum bet number (specified number) is set.

When the charging process is completed at time t42, the start lever 7 is enabled, the game is started, the start lever 7 is disabled, the random number acquisition process is executed, and then the internal lottery process and the reel rotation start process are executed. , Reel stop control processing, and processing after reel stop are executed in sequence.

In FIG. 44, when the 1-bet button 6b is turned on at the time t41, the game is not started even if the 1-bet button 6b is turned off at the time t43. Similarly, if the number of bets is less than the maximum number at time t41, the game is not started. However, at the start of the game, if the number of bets is 1 and the game can be executed, the game is started when the 1-bet button 6b is turned off.

When the game is not started in this way, if the game is possible with the current number of bets, the start lever 7 is turned off and the game is started when the start lever 7 is turned on again. Further, even if the start lever 7 remains on, the game is started when the number of bets reaches the maximum number of bets by turning on the MAX bet button 6a or turning on the 1-bet button 6b.

Further, if the next game after one game is completed can be executed with less than the maximum number of bets, and the start lever 7 is on, the main CPU 101 is a speaker group connected to the sub-relay board 74. A notification unit such as the main display device 210 connected to the sub-control board 72 is notified of a message prompting the start lever 7 to be turned off.

[10-7-1-2. Game flow when re-game is started from the state where the start lever is on]
With reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 45, the flow of the game when the re-game is started from the state where the start lever 7 is on will be described. The horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 45 are the same as the horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 38.

In the state where the start lever 7 is on in the re-game activated in the first game, the charging process by automatic charging is started at time t51, and when the charging process is completed at time t52, the start lever 7 is in the effective state. , The game is started, the start lever 7 is disabled, the random number acquisition process is executed, and then the internal lottery process, the reel rotation start process, the reel stop control process, and the process after the reel stop are sequentially executed.

[10-7-2. Main processing (transformation example)]
With reference to FIG. 46, the main process (main operation process) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 in the modified example of the second gaming machine will be described.

First, in step S421, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection state of the bet switch 6S has changed from off to on. For example, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the on-edge of the MAX bet button 6a is detected.

If it is determined that the detection state of the bet switch 6S has changed from off to on (YES), the process of step S422 is executed. If it is determined that the detection state of the bet switch 6S is not turned on from off (NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S421.

In step S422, the main CPU 101 executes the input process. The process executed in the input process corresponds to the process of steps S41 to S49 of the medal acceptance / start check process shown in FIG. 25. After executing the process of step S422, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S423.

In step S423, the main CPU 101 executes the settlement button check process. In the operating state of the re-game, the main CPU 101 skips the settlement button check process. After executing the process of step S423, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S424.

In step S424, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection state of the start switch 7S is ON. That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever 7 is on.

If it is determined that the detection state of the start switch 7S is ON (YES), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S425. If it is determined that the detection state of the start switch 7S is not on (NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S423.

In step S425, the main CPU 101 executes a random number acquisition process. The process executed by the random number acquisition process corresponds to the process of step S4 of the main process shown in FIG. 23. However, as the random number value for internal lottery, a 2-byte hard latch random number is acquired from the random number register 0 as described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. After executing the process of step S425, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S426.

In step S426, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process. The process executed in the lottery process corresponds to the process of step S5 of the main process shown in FIG. 23. After executing the process of step S426, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S427.

In step S427, the main CPU 101 executes a rotation process. The process executed in the rotation process corresponds to the process of steps S6 to S11 of the main process shown in FIG. 23. After executing the process of step S427, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S428.

In step S428, the main CPU 101 executes a stop process. The process executed in the stop process corresponds to the process of steps S12 to S16 and S2 of the main process shown in FIG. 23. After executing the process of step S428, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S429.

In step S429, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the replay has been activated. If it is determined that the replay has been activated (YES), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S422. If it is determined that the replay has not been activated (NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S421.

[10-7-3. Action effect (modification example)]
As described above, in the modified example of the second gaming machine, even if the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S, the game is played with the bet number determined to be the maximum bet number. By starting, the operation of the start lever 7 is not invalidated even if the start lever 7 is operated before the bet operation. Therefore, the second gaming machine can allow the player to proceed with the game while the start lever 7 is on, so that the gaming operation can be smoothly performed.

Further, in the modified example of the second gaming machine, even if the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S in the operating state of the re-game, the game is started when the automatic loading is completed. , The game operation can be smoothly performed even in the operating state of the re-game.

<Additional Notes>
Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-202330 proposes a conventional gaming machine in which a gaming machine is started by operating a start lever after a gaming medium is inserted by operating a bet button or the like.

However, in such a gaming machine, if the start lever is operated before the loading of the gaming medium is completed, the operation of the start lever becomes invalid, so that the gaming operation is smooth depending on the player. There was a problem that there were some things that could not be done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing a gaming operation.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

<< First invention >>
A game value number determination unit (for example, main CPU101) that determines a game value number to be used for a game, and
A start operation detection unit (for example, start switch 7S) that detects the start operation of the game, and
A game control unit (for example, the main control circuit 100) that controls the game, and
Equipped with
The game control unit
In the state where the start operation is not detected by the start operation detection unit, the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit after the game value number is determined by the game value number determination unit. A gaming machine characterized by starting a game.
<< Second invention >>
In the state where the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the game control unit takes the opportunity that the game value number is determined by the game value number determination unit to a specified number (for example, the maximum bet number). The gaming machine described above, characterized in that the gaming is started as.
<< Third invention >>
The game control unit
In the operating state of the re-game, in the state where the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the game value number used for the re-game by the game value number determination unit is the game in which the re-game is activated. The gaming machine described above, wherein the gaming is started when the number of gaming values used is determined.
<< Fourth invention >>
A determination operation detection unit (for example, a bet switch 6S) for detecting a determination operation for causing the game value number determination unit to determine the game value number to be used for the game from the game value number deposited in the game machine is provided.
The game control unit
While the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the game value number is determined by the game value number determination unit to the specified number, and then the determination operation detection unit continues to detect the determination operation. If so, the gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the game is started when the determination operation is no longer detected by the determination operation detection unit.
<< Fifth Invention >>
The game control unit
In the operating state of the re-game, when the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the decision operation detection unit changes from the detected state to the determination operation detection unit, and the determination operation is not detected. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it initiates a replay.
<< Sixth Invention >>
The game control unit
In the operating state of the re-game, when the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the re-game is started when the start operation is no longer detected by the start operation detection unit. The gaming machine described above as a feature.
<< Seventh Invention >>
The specified number is the maximum number of game values that can be used for the game.
The game control unit is the start operation detection unit when the game value number determined by the game value number determination unit is less than the maximum number while the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the gaming machine is started when the starting operation is detected again.
<< Eighth Invention >>
The game control unit determines the game value number when the game value number determined by the game value number determination unit is less than the maximum number while the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the game is started when the game value number is determined to be the maximum number by the unit.
<< Ninth invention >>
A notification unit (for example, a speaker group, a main display device 210) for notifying a player is provided.
The game control unit is in a state where the next game after one game is completed can be played with a game value number less than the maximum number, and the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the notification unit is notified of a message prompting the interruption of the start operation.
<< 10th invention >>
A first determination operation detection unit (for example, determination of a MAX bet button 6a) for detecting a first determination operation for determining the number of game values to be used for a game from the number of game values deposited in the game machine to the specified number. Bet switch 6S) to detect the operation and
A second determination operation detection unit that detects a second determination operation for determining a predetermined number (for example, 1) equal to or less than the specified number from the number of game values deposited in the game machine. (For example, a bet switch 6S that detects a determination operation of the 1-bet button 6b).
The game control unit
A first circuit (for example, XOR circuit 140) that generates a first signal consisting of an exclusive OR of the detection signal of the first determination operation detection unit and the detection signal of the second determination operation detection unit.
A second circuit (for example, AND circuit 141) that generates a latch signal consisting of the detection signal of the start operation detection unit and the logical product of the first signal, and
It has a random number circuit (for example, a random number circuit 110) that generates random numbers in a predetermined cycle, and has.
The random number circuit latches a random number generated in the predetermined cycle by the latch signal.
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the gaming control unit determines a winning combination of a game based on a random number latched by the latch signal.
<< 11th invention >>
Whether or not the latch signal is valid in the game control unit based on the levels of the detection signal of the first determination operation detection unit, the detection signal of the second determination operation detection unit, and the detection signal of the start operation detection unit. Further has a latch signal determination means for determining
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the gaming control unit determines the winning combination when the latch signal is determined to be valid.
<< 12th invention >>
A production control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) that controls the production is provided.
The game control unit
A first command (for example, an input state command) indicating the state of the game value number determination unit and the start operation detection unit, and
A second command (for example, a start command) indicating that the game has started is transmitted to the effect control unit.
The effect control unit
The above description, wherein if the second command is not received even after a lapse of a certain period of time (for example, 1 ms) or more after it is determined that the game has been started based on the first command, error processing is executed. Game machine.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the gaming operation can be smoothly performed.

[11. Third game machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 60, the pachi-slot machine 401, which is a pachi-slot machine having a configuration different from that of the pachi-slot machine 1 and is characterized by a holding structure of a main control board case, a selector, and a hopper device. Will be described as a "third gaming machine".

[11-1. Appearance structure]
FIG. 47 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 401. FIG. 48 is a front view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 401.

As shown in FIG. 47, the pachi-slot machine 401 includes an exterior body 402 showing a specific example of the game machine main body. The exterior body 402 has a cabinet 402a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 402b that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet 402a.

Handles 407 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 402a (only one side handle 407 is shown in FIG. 47). The handle 407 is a recess for carrying the pachi-slot machine 401.

Inside the cabinet 402a, three reels 403L, 403C, and 403R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, each reel 403L, 403C, and 403R will be referred to as a left reel 403L, a middle reel 403C, and a right reel 403R, respectively. Each reel 403L, 403C, 403R is for a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape, a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body, and a reel that irradiates the sheet material with light from the inside of the reel body. It has a light source. A plurality of (for example, 21) patterns are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

The front door 402b includes a door body 409, a front panel 410, and a light emitting display device 411.

The door body 409 is attached to the cabinet 402a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end portion of the door body 409 when the door body 409 is viewed from the front of the pachi-slot machine 401.

As shown in FIG. 47, the light emitting display device 411 is provided on the upper part of the door body 409. The light emitting display device 411 includes a dot matrix portion 519 (see FIG. 48) formed by a plurality of light source portions arranged in a matrix, and a light emitting cover facing the dot matrix portion 519 of the front panel 410. ..

The dot matrix unit 519 lights (blinks) a light source unit at an arbitrary location to illuminate an arbitrary location (a fireworks pattern in the present embodiment) of the design applied to the front panel 410 from the back surface. As a result, an effect of emitting light at any part of the design applied to the front panel 410 is performed.

Below the light emission display device 411, display windows 404L, 404C, 404R for displaying the patterns drawn on the three reels 403L, 403C, 403R are provided. Hereinafter, the display windows 404L, 404C, and 404R are referred to as a left display window 404L, a middle display window 404C, and a right display window 404R, respectively.

The display windows 404L, 404C, and 404R are made of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. The display windows 404L, 404C, and 404R are provided at positions overlapping with the arrangement area of the three reels when viewed from the front (player side), and are located in front of the three reels (player side). It is provided in. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels provided behind the display windows 404L, 404C, 404R through the display windows 404L, 404C, 404R.

In the third gaming machine, the display windows 404L, 404C, and 404R are continuously arranged among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reels provided behind them is stopped. It is set to a size that can display three symbols. That is, in the frame of the display windows 404L, 404C, and 404R, upper, middle, and lower areas are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each area.

The front panel 410 is attached to the upper part of the door body 409. As shown in FIG. 48, the front panel 410 includes an upper display unit 501, a reel lighting unit 502, a reel side effect display unit 503A, 503B, an edge effect display unit 504A, 504B, and a reel lower display unit 505. Have.

The upper display unit 501 is arranged above the light emission display device 411, and the reel illumination unit 502 is arranged between the reels 403L, 403C, 403R and the light emission display device 411. The reel side effect display units 503A and 503B are arranged on the side of the reels 403L, 403C and 403R, and the edge effect display units 504A and 504B are arranged on the side of the reel side effect display units 503A and 503B. .. The reel lower display unit 505 is arranged below the reels 403L, 403C, and 403R.

The upper display unit 501, the reel lighting unit 502, the reel side effect display units 503A, 503B, the edge effect display units 504A, 504B, and the reel lower display unit 505 cover various lamp groups (not shown) provided on the door body 409. .. The upper display unit 501, the reel lighting unit 502, the reel side effect display unit 503A, 503B, 104A, 104B, the edge effect display unit 504A, 504B, and the reel lower display unit 505 are irradiated with light from various lamp groups. It emits light.

For example, the reel side effect display unit 503A is provided with three BET light emitting units arranged in the vertical direction. The number of lighting of the three BET light emitting units indicates the number of medals as a game medium used for one game.

In the third gaming machine, the number of medals used for one game is set to 1 to 3. For example, when the number of medals used in one game is set to "1", one BET light emitting unit (for example, the BET light emitting unit located at the bottom) lights up, and the other BET light emitting unit (one with the center). The BET light emitting unit located at the top) goes out.

As shown in FIG. 47, a pedestal portion 412 is formed in the center of the door body 409. The pedestal portion 412 is provided with various devices (medal insertion slot 413, MAX bet button 414, 1 bet button 415, start lever 416, stop button 417L, 417C, 417R) to be operated by the player.

The medal slot 413 is provided to receive medals dropped from the outside into the pachi-slot machine 401 by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 413 are used for one game up to a preset number of medals (for example, 3), and the amount exceeding the preset number of medals is deposited inside the pachislot machine 401. Can be (so-called credit function).

A reject button 413a is provided in the vicinity of the medal insertion slot 413. When the medals dropped by the player are jammed by the selector 700 described later, the jammed medals can be ejected from the medal payout outlet 418 by operating the reject button 413a.

The MAX bet button 414 and the 1-bet button 415 are provided to determine the number of medals deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 401 to be used for one game. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 412 is provided with a settlement button. This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 401 to the outside.

The start lever 416 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (403L, 403C, 403R). The stop buttons 417L, 417C, and 417R are provided corresponding to the left reel 403L, the middle reel 403C, and the right reel 403R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 417L, 417C, and 417R are referred to as a left stop button 417L, a middle stop button 417C, and a right stop button 417R, respectively.

Further, the pedestal portion 412 is provided with a 7-segment display 406 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). This 7-segment display 406 performs the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 401 (hereinafter, the number of credits), and the game. Information such as the number of inserted medals (hereinafter referred to as the number of BETs) is digitally displayed.

A medal payout outlet 418, a medal tray 419, speakers 420L, 420R, and the like are provided at the lower part of the door body 409. The medal payout outlet 418 guides the medals discharged by driving the hopper device 800, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 419 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 418. Further, the speakers 420L and 420R output sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the content of the production.

Further, the door body 409 is provided with a waist panel display unit 506. The waist panel display unit 506 is arranged above the speakers 420L and 420R. The waist panel display unit 506 covers the light source unit provided on the door body 409. Then, the waist panel display unit 506 is irradiated with light from the light source unit to emit light.

[11-2. Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 401 will be described with reference to FIG. 49.
FIG. 49 is a front view of the pachi-slot machine 401 with the front door 402b removed.

As shown in FIG. 49, the cabinet 402a is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with one surface on the front side open. A main control board case 601 as a board case accommodating a main control board as a circuit board constituting a main control circuit (not shown) is attached to the upper part of the cabinet 402a. The main control circuit is a circuit that controls the main operation of the game in the pachi-slot machine 401 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, and determination of the presence or absence of winning.

Three reels (left reel 403L, middle reel 403C and right reel 403R) are provided in the central portion of the cabinet 402a. Although not shown in FIG. 49, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor (not shown) via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

At the lower part of the cabinet 402a, a hopper device 800 having a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one is provided. Further, on one side of the hopper device 800 (on the left side in the example shown in FIG. 49) in the cabinet 402a, a power supply device 434 that supplies necessary power to each device of the pachi-slot machine 401 is provided. Has been done.

An auxiliary board constituting an auxiliary control circuit (not shown) is provided on the upper portion of the front door 402b on the back surface side (the portion opposite to the display screen side). The sub-control circuit is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like.

Further, a selector 700 (see FIG. 53), which will be described later, is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 402b. The selector 700 is a device that selects whether or not the material, shape, etc. of the medal inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 413 (see FIG. 47) is appropriate, and the medal determined to be appropriate is a hopper device. Guide to 800. Further, on the path through which the medals pass in the selector 700, a medal detection sensor 715 (see FIG. 54), which will be described later, is provided to detect that an appropriate medal has passed.

[11-3. Main control board case holding structure]
Next, the holding structure of the main control board case 601 of the third gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52.

In the third gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 50C, the main control board case 601 is held by the bracket 630 as a holding member fixed to the protective member 650 as a box-shaped member. The 650 is fixed to the inner surface 402c of the rear wall as a mounting portion of the cabinet 402a, so that the 650 is held by the cabinet 402a.

[11-3-1. Main control board case]
As shown in FIG. 51 (A), the main control board case 601 is composed of a first member 602 and a second member 603 that are horizontally overlapped with each other to form a substantially rectangular housing. A main control board (not shown) is housed inside the main control board case 601.

Further, the first member 602 and the second member 603 are formed of a colorless and transparent resin material (light-transmitting resin) so as not to interfere with the visibility of the main control board. The main control board is mounted by fixing a mounting surface on which an IC (integrated circuit), a setting key cylinder, a setting change button, etc. are mounted at a plurality of places with screws or the like while facing the inner surface of the first member 602. ..

The first member 602 has a front portion 602a formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape, and a plurality of connector openings 611, a setting key cylinder opening (not shown), and a setting change button opening are formed in the front portion 602a. Has been done. The openings for multiple connectors, the opening for the setting key cylinder and the opening for the setting change button are the connectors such as the power connector and the communication connector mounted on the main control board, the opening for the setting key cylinder and the opening for the setting change button. Expose. Further, the first member 602 is provided with a cover member 610 that covers the opening for the setting key cylinder and the opening for the setting change button. The cover member 610 is supported by the first member 602 via a hinge, and can be opened and closed in the vertical direction. The cover member 610 may be openable / closable in the left-right direction, or may be a slide type that opens / closes in the up-down direction or the left-right direction.

A first sealing portion 612 is provided at the lower part of the first member 602. The first sealing portion 612 is fastened to the second sealing portion 616 of the second member 603, which will be described later, with a screw (not shown) to seal the bonded state of the first member 602 and the second member 603. Further, a sealing sticker 615 is attached so as to cover a part of the first sealing portion 612 and the second sealing portion 616. Since the seal seal 615 must be peeled off or torn in order to access the first seal portion 612 and the second seal portion 616, when the main control board case 601 is to be opened, a trace due to the seal seal 615 remains. It has become. Further, a seal seal cover 619 is provided so as to cover the seal seal 615 from the front side of the first member 602. The sealing seal cover 619 is fastened to the first member 602 from the back surface side of the main control board case 601 by a screw (not shown).

Further, a first fastening portion 613 is provided on the upper portion of the second member 603. The first fastening portion 613 is fastened to the second fastening portion 636 described later of the bracket 630 by a sealing screw 613a, and seals the bonded state of the main control board case 601 and the bracket 630. Further, a screw hole cover 613a made of a colorless and transparent resin material is attached so as to cover the sealing screw 613a. In order to access the sealing screw 613a, the screw hole cover 613a must be broken, so that a trace of attempting to remove the sealing screw 613a remains.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), four hook portions 617 are provided on the back surface of the second member 603. The hook portion 617 is arranged near each of the four corners on the back surface of the second member 603. These four hook portions 617 are adapted to engage with each of the four engaging holes 637 described later in the bracket 630. Specifically, the hook portion 617 is fitted above the engagement hole 637 and then slides downward to engage with the engagement hole 637. As a result, the main control board case 601 is held against the bracket 630. Although the engagement hole 637 is formed so that the hook portion 617 is slid downward from above and engaged with the hook portion 617, the engaging hole 637 is formed so as to be engaged by sliding the hook portion 617 in the left-right direction. May be good.

[11-3-2. bracket]
As shown in FIG. 52, the bracket 630 holds the main control board case 601 and has a flat plate portion 631 facing the main control board case 601 and the main control board case 601 is opened. It is formed in a box shape. The bracket 630 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material (light-transmitting resin). The bracket 630 may be made of a colored resin material.

The flat plate portion 631 of the bracket 630 is formed with four engagement holes 637 into which the four hook portions 617 of the main control board case 601 described above are fitted. The engaging hole 637 communicates between the front surface (the surface facing the main control board case 601) side and the back surface (the surface facing the protective member 650) side of the flat plate portion 631, and the upper portion is greatly opened and the lower portion is open. It has a small opening. Therefore, the hook portion 617 is easily fitted above the engaging hole 637, and is stably held below the engaging hole 637 without wobbling. The engagement hole 637 may be formed so as to have a large opening on the left side and a small opening on the right side, and the engagement hole 637 has a large opening on the right side and a small opening on the left side. It may be formed so as to be opened.

Further, the flat plate portion 631 of the bracket 630 is formed with a through hole 632 for passing the fastening screw 620. The bracket 630 is fastened and fixed to the protective member 650 by passing the shaft portion of the screw 620 through the through hole 632 and screwing it into the fastening hole 652 described later of the protective member 650.

Further, the flat plate portion 631 of the bracket 630 is formed with a communication hole 633 that communicates the main control board case 601 side of the flat plate portion 631 and the protective member 650 side. The communication hole 633 is a hole opened for attaching the protective member 650 to the rear wall inner surface 402c of the cabinet 402a by a screw 621 as a fastening member.

The communication hole 633 is formed to have a diameter larger than the diameter of the screw head of the screw 621 and is arranged above the above-mentioned through hole 632. Further, the communication hole 633 is provided so as to correspond to the arrangement location of the cylindrical portion 653 described later of the protective member 650.

Further, a convex portion 635 protruding upward from the flat plate portion 631 is provided on the upper portion of the bracket 630. The convex portion 635 has a thickness from the back surface of the flat plate portion 631 (the surface facing the protective member 650) to the protective member 650 side.

The convex portion 635 is provided with a second fastening portion 636 as a fastening portion to which the first fastening portion 613 of the main control board case 601 described above is fastened.

[11-3-3. Protective member]
The protective member 650 is formed in a box shape having an opening 651 on the bracket 630 side. The protective member 650 has a bottom wall portion 655 facing the inner surface 402c of the rear wall of the cabinet 402a.

In the protective member 650, the opening 651 faces the main control board case 601 with the bracket 630 interposed therebetween, and the bottom wall portion 655 is fixed to the rear wall inner surface 402c of the cabinet 402a.

The protective member 650 has a facing surface 656 facing the main control board case 601 with the bracket 630 interposed therebetween. The facing surface 656 is composed of an inner surface surface (a surface facing the main control board case 601) of the bottom wall portion 655.

The area of the facing surface 656 is larger than the area of the facing surface (rear surface of the second member 603) of the main control board case 601 facing the protective member 650 with the bracket 630 interposed therebetween.

The protective member 650 is dimensioned in the depth direction so that the thickness in the direction (depth direction) from the inner surface 402c of the rear wall of the cabinet 402a toward the main control board case 601 is thicker than the thickness of the main control board case 601. ..

Further, the protective member 650 is made of a member having a color different from the color of the main control board case 601. In the third gaming machine, the main control board case 601 and the bracket 630 are made of a colorless and transparent resin material (light-transmitting resin), while the protective member 650 is made of a colored resin material. The protective member 650 may be made of a colorless and transparent resin material (light-transmitting resin).

Further, the protective member 650 has a main body portion 660 facing the flat plate portion 631 of the bracket 630, and a protruding portion 661 protruding upward from the main body portion 660. The protrusion 661 is provided at a position facing the convex portion 635 of the bracket 630.

The main body 660 of the protective member 650 is provided with ribs 670 in a grid pattern. The rib 670 is erected on the inner side surface of the bottom wall portion 655 so as to extend from the inner side surface of the bottom wall portion 655 toward the bracket 630 side.

The rib 670 includes a plurality of vertical ribs 670A extending in the vertical direction inside the main body 660, and a plurality of horizontal ribs 670B extending in the horizontal direction inside the main body 660. The upper and lower ends of the vertical rib 670A are connected to the upper wall and the lower wall of the main body 660, respectively. The left and right ends of the horizontal rib 670B are connected to the left wall and the right wall of the main body portion 660, respectively.

Further, the protective member 650 is erected on the inner surface of the bottom wall portion 655, and has a cylindrical portion 653 through which a screw 621 for attaching the protective member 650 to the rear wall inner surface 402c of the cabinet 402a is passed. As shown in FIGS. 50A and 50B, the protective member 650 is fixed to the rear wall inner surface 402c of the cabinet 402a with screws 621.

The tubular portion 653 is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape, and the inner diameter thereof is formed to be larger than the diameter of the screw head of the screw 621. A fastening hole (not shown) for screwing the screw 621 is formed on the inner side surface side (bottom surface of the tubular portion 653) of the bottom wall portion 655 of the tubular portion 653.

Further, the tubular portion 653 is integrally formed with the rib 670, and is integrally formed with the vertical rib 670A extending in the vertical direction in the third gaming machine. The tubular portion 653 may be integrally formed with the horizontal rib 670B.

[11-4. selector]
Next, the selector 700 of the third gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55.

As shown in FIG. 53, the selector 700 is configured to be detachable from the bracket 750, which is a holding means, by a detachable mechanism described later. The bracket 750 is formed with screw holes 751 for fixing at a plurality of places, and is mounted at a predetermined position on the inner frame of the front door 402b (see FIG. 47) by inserting screws or the like into these screw holes 751. ..

In the bracket 750, a medal determined to be genuine by the selector 700 is placed in a predetermined position (in the third gaming machine, a bucket described later of the hopper device 800 (see FIG. 49) installed on the cabinet 402a side of the pachi-slot machine 401). A slope 753 provided with a guide path 753a for guiding to 802 is integrally formed.

Further, the bracket 750 is formed with a detachable mechanism for attaching and detaching the selector 700, and the detachable mechanism of the third gaming machine is previously provided on both sides of the facing wall surface of the rectangular selector main body 731 of the selector 700. The four pin members 731a, 731b, 731c, and 731d provided are configured to engage with each other.

Specifically, the bracket 750 does not show the engagement hole 755 into which the pin members 731a and 731b projecting from one side surface side of the selector body 731 are inserted (the engagement hole into which the pin member 731b is inserted is not shown. ), And an engaging member 757 to which the pin members 731c and 731d (see FIG. 54) projecting from the other side surface side of the selector main body 731 are engaged.

The engaging member 757 includes a pair of upper and lower rotating pieces 759a (lower rotating pieces are not shown) held by an elastic member (not shown) installed on the bracket 750, and pin members 731c and 731d (FIG. 54). A pair of upper and lower engaging portions 760a (the lower engaging portion is not shown) with which the upper and lower engaging portions are engaged (see).

The engaging member 757 presses the pin members 731c and 731d (see FIG. 54) against the inclined surface of the rotating piece 759a, and pushes the rotating piece 759a rearward from the selector 700 side against the urging force of the elastic member. By unfolding, the pin members 731c and 731d are engaged with the engaging portion 760a.

That is, for mounting the selector 700 on the bracket 750, after inserting the pin members 31a and 31b provided in the selector main body 731 into the engaging holes 755 of the bracket, respectively, the pin members 731c and 731d (see FIG. 54) are attached. This is done by pressing the rotating piece 759a against the inclined surface to spread the rotating piece 759a and engaging it with the engaging portion 760a. To remove the selector 700 from the bracket 750, the rotating piece 759a is pushed open against the urging force of the elastic member, the pin members 731c and 731d (see FIG. 54) are disengaged from the engaging portion 760a, and the pin member is removed. This is done by disengaging 731a and 731b from the engagement holes 755 of the bracket 750.

The selector 700 includes a selector main body 731 in which a guide passage 710 for guiding medals is formed in the selector, and a sub-plate 732 as a plate member that constitutes the above-mentioned guide passage 710 and can open the guide passage 710. There is. The sub-plate 732 is removable from the selector main body 731 and is rotatable with respect to the selector main body 731 with a predetermined fulcrum as a rotation fulcrum.

The upper surface of the selector body 731 is provided with a medal inlet 735 whose side portion is covered with a sub-plate 732 and which receives medals falling from the medal slot 413 (see FIG. 47).

The medals entering from the medal entrance 735 are guided along the guide passage 710 formed in the selector main body 731. At the intermediate position of the guide passage 710, a select plate 739 that guides only medals of a regular size is arranged.

Further, a medal pressure 740 pushed by a passing medal is arranged on the surface of the guide passage 710 (the second guide passage 712 described later) in the portion where the select plate 739 is arranged.

The select plate 739 and the medal pressure 740 have a function of pushing the inserted medal to the cancel shooter 742 by the medal pressure 740 without being guided by the select plate 739 when the inserted medal is smaller than the standard size. The cancel shooter 742 is connected to the medal payout outlet 418 at the lower front of the front door 402b (see FIG. 47) described above.

If the inserted medal is appropriate, the medal is guided along the select plate 739 and guided to the downstream side of the guide passage 710 while pushing the medal pressure 740. The medal guided to the downstream side of the guide passage 710 is discharged from the medal outlet 720 formed on the side surface of the selector main body 731 to the guide path 753a of the slope 753 provided outside the selector 700.

The select plate 739 is configured to be displaceable from the medal guide position or the medal ejection position by a solenoid (not shown) provided on the back side of the selector main body 731.

The shortest dimension of the medal guide position is the minimum distance from the lower side of the select plate 739 to the lower side of the second guide passage 712. This shortest dimension is a dimension slightly smaller than the allowable minimum diameter of the standard dimension of the medal. Therefore, if the medal passing between the second guide passage 712 and the select plate 739 is in accordance with the standard dimensions, the end of the medal is caught by the select plate 739, guided by the select plate 739, and the medal exit 720. To reach. Normally, the select plate 739 is held in the medal guide position.

Further, a magnet (not shown) is arranged in the path of the guide passage 710, and when a medal (non-standard medal) attracted to the magnet is inserted, it is attracted to prevent unauthorized operation. There is. The details of the guide passage 710 will be described later.

A photo sensor (not shown) is arranged in the vicinity of the medal pressure 740, and while the medal pressure 740 is pressed by the passing of the medal, the medal passing signal is output to the control board of the pachi-slot machine 401. In this case, if the medal is jammed or an unauthorized operation is performed, the medal pressure 740 is pushed in for a long time and the detection signal changes, so that an abnormality is detected on the control board side.

As described above, the select plate 739 is normally held at the medal guide position by the solenoid, but under predetermined conditions (for example, when a specified number of medals have already been inserted, or when an error has occurred). , When the game is started, etc.), the medal held at the medal ejection position and inserted from the medal insertion slot 413 (see FIG. 47) is forcibly ejected to the cancel shooter 742.

As shown in FIG. 54, an after medal pressure 745 and a select plate medal stopper portion 746 are installed on the downstream surface of the guide passage 710. A medal that is not guided by the select plate 739 held in the medal ejection position is pushed by the medal pusher 740, and further abuts on the protruding after medal pressure 745 and the select plate medal stopper 746 to cancel shooter 742. Is discharged to.

[11-4-1. Guidance passage]
Next, a detailed configuration of the guide passage 710 of the selector 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.

As shown in FIG. 54, the guide passage 710 has a first guide passage 711 on the medal insertion slot 413 (see FIG. 47) side and a second guide passage 712 on the medal exit 720 (see FIG. 55) side. It is composed of including.

The first guide passage 711 is composed of a front side surface of the selector main body 731 (a surface facing the sub plate 732) and a rear side surface of the sub plate 732 (a surface facing the selector main body 731).

Hereinafter, the surface of the first guide passage 711 on the sub-plate 732 side is referred to as a passage surface 711a on the sub-plate 732 side (see FIG. 55 (B)), and the surface of the first guide passage 711 on the selector body 731 side is referred to. , The passage surface 711b on the selector main body 731 side (see FIG. 55 (B)).

The second guide passage 712 is configured to eject medals downward when opened by the subplate 732. For example, when a medal jam occurs in the selector 700, by operating the reject button 413a, one end of the movable member 760 provided on the bracket 750 is pushed, and the other end of the movable member 760 is interlocked. By doing so, a rotating member (not shown) provided on the back side of the selector main body 731 is rotated, and the sub-plate 732 is moved in a direction away from the selector main body 731, whereby the medal is moved downward from the second guide passage 712. It can be ejected to clear the medal jam.

As shown in FIG. 55 (A), the second guide passage 712 is tilted forward toward the sub-plate 732 with respect to the vertical plane V indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 55 (A). That is, the second guide passage 712 is inclined toward the inside of the selector main body 731 from the upper part to the lower part. The vertical plane V is a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction of the pachi-slot machine 401 (see FIG. 47).

As shown in FIG. 55 (B), the first guide passage 711 is curved so as to be convex toward the sub-plate 732 side.

Specifically, in the first guide passage 711, the passage surface 711a on the sub-plate 732 side is concavely curved toward the front surface side (the side opposite to the selector main body 731 side) of the sub-plate 732. Further, in the first guide passage 711, the passage surface 711b on the selector main body 731 side is curved in a convex shape toward the sub-plate 732 side. As a result, the first guide passage 711 is formed in a curved shape.

Here, the first guide passage 711 is formed so that the passage surface 711a on the sub-plate 732 side has a larger degree of curvature than the passage surface 711b on the selector main body 731 side.

Further, the first guide passage 711 has a shape in which the passage surface 711a on the sub-plate 732 side is uniformly (continuously) curved, whereas the first guide passage 711 is part of the passage surface 711b on the selector main body 731 side. It has a flat surface portion 711c.

The flat surface portion 711c is provided in the passage surface 711b on the selector main body 731 side between the medal entrance 735 side and the second guide passage 712 side, that is, an intermediate portion in the vertical direction.

As shown in FIG. 54, the first guide passage 711 bends downward and is connected to the second guide passage 712. Further, the first guide passage 711 is formed so that the passage surface 711a on the sub-plate 732 side below the first guide passage 711 has the same inclination angle as the second guide passage 712. In other words, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), in the first guide passage 711, of the passage surface 711a on the sub-plate 732 side, the lower passage surface 711d has the same inclination as the second guide passage 712. It is formed at an angle.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54, a medal detection sensor 715 as a medal detecting means for detecting a medal passing through the second guide passage 712 is provided in the vicinity of the medal exit 720 of the selector 700.

As shown in FIG. 55 (A), the medal detection sensor 715 is composed of a photo sensor having a light emitting element 716 and a light receiving element 717. The light emitting element 716 and the light receiving element 717 are arranged so that the light emitting surface and the light receiving surface face the same direction (sub-plate 732 side).

The light emitting element 716 is located above the second guide passage 712 and is arranged on the subplate 732 side of the light receiving element 717. The light emitting element 716 may not be arranged on the subplate 732 side of the light receiving element 717.

The light receiving element 717 is arranged on the second guide passage 712. Specifically, the light receiving element 717 is provided so that the light receiving surface is exposed to the second guide passage 712 through the opening 712a formed in the second guide passage 712.

Further, the medal detection sensor 715 has a reflector 718 that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting element 716 (indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 55 (A)) toward the light receiving element 717. The reflector 718 is arranged in front of the light receiving element 717 (on the subplate 732 side). It is desirable that the reflector 718 is arranged so that the light of the light emitting element 716 that is reflected and directed toward the light receiving element 717 passes through the medal passing region on the second guide passage 712.

The medal detection sensor 715 is unitized by accommodating the above-mentioned light emitting element 716, light receiving element 717, and reflector 718 in the sensor housing 719. The medal detection sensor 715 detects the medal passing through the second guide passage 712 by blocking the light emitted from the light emitting element 716 by the medal.

[11-5. Hopper device]
Next, the hopper device 800 of the third gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60.

As shown in FIG. 56, the hopper device 800 discharges the bucket 802 capable of storing medals and the medals stored in the bucket 802 to the outside one by one from the medal payout outlet 418 (see FIG. 47) for payment. It includes a medal payout unit 803 to be paid out, a bucket 802, and a base member 804 on which the medal payout unit 803 is mounted. The bucket 802 and the base member 804 are made of a colored, eg, black, resin material.

The bucket 802 has a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view for inserting medals, an upper end opening 821 having a substantially vertical wall surface, and a side wall 822a that inclines inward from the lower edge of the upper end opening 821. It is composed of a pyramidal bucket main body 823 having a to 822d and a mounting base 827 for mounting the bucket main body 823 to the base member 804.

Further, the bucket 802 has a circular shape for exposing the upper surface portion of the medal disk 831 as a rotating member constituting the medal payout unit 803, which will be described later, at the lower end portion of one side wall, for example, the central portion in the width direction of the side wall 822a. An opening (not shown) is formed.

Further, on one end side in the width direction of the side wall 822a, a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 413 (see FIG. 47) of the pachislot machine 401 and inserted into the bucket 802 via the selector 700 (see FIG. 51). A medal collision portion 824 is provided for colliding and dropping the medal to the lower part of the bucket 802. In the vicinity of the medal collision portion 824, a discharge port (not shown) for discharging medals overflowing from the bucket 802 to the outside of the bucket 802 is formed.

The medal payout unit 803 is composed of a medal disc 831 that receives medals stored in the bucket 802 and sequentially conveys the received medals while rotating, a cover 832 that covers the peripheral edge of the medal disc 831, and a unit main body 833. Has been done.

The medal disc 831 is provided with a plurality (for example, four) of medal receiving holes 831d for receiving medals, and these medal receiving holes 831d are arranged in a ring shape on the medal disc 831 at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. ..

The medal receiving hole 831d has a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the medal, and is between the medals that have slid down from the bulging portion 831b that bulges upward in the center of the medal disc 831 and the adjacent medal receiving holes 831d. The diameter of the medal that has fallen to the medal is expanded while gently tilting outward so that the medal that has fallen into the medal slides smoothly into the medal receiving hole 831d.

The unit main body 833 includes a mounting plate 834 on which the medal disc 831 is mounted, a disc rotation shaft 835 that is attached to the bulging portion 831b and serves as a rotation center of the medal disc 831, and a motor that rotates the disc rotation shaft 835. 833b and is configured to include. Further, the unit main body 833 accommodates a medal payout device (not shown) for ejecting medals carried by the medal disc 831 from the medal payout outlet 418 (see FIG. 47). Further, the unit main body 833 is provided with a connector (not shown) for supplying electric power from the outside and communicating with the main control board.

Although not shown, a gear that meshes with the motor output shaft 833c is fixed to the disc rotation shaft 835, and the rotation of the motor 833b is transmitted via the gear. As a result, the medal disc 831 rotates at a constant speed in a fixed direction with the disc rotation shaft 835 as the center of rotation by the driving force of the motor 833b transmitted via the gear.

As the medal disc 831 rotates, the medal receiving hole 831d moves to a medal payout device (not shown) arranged on the rotation orbit, and the stored medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 418 (see FIG. 47).

Further, the mounting plate 834 is formed with a plurality of through holes 834a that penetrate the mounting surface on which the medal disk 831 is mounted and the back surface (the surface opposite to the mounting surface) of the mounting plate 834. .. The through hole 834a is a dust removing hole for dropping (discharging) foreign matter other than medals such as dust and dirt in the bucket 802 including the mounting plate 834 downward (under the mounting plate 834). .. The number of through holes 834a does not have to be plural.

The medal payout unit 803 configured as described above is attached to the bucket 802 so that the medal disk 831 faces the upper end opening 821 of the bucket 802 from the lower end of the bucket 802.

The base member 804 supports the bucket 802 and the medal payout unit 803. The upper surface of the base member 804 is inclined, and a concave mounting portion 841 for mounting the medal payout unit 803 is formed in the central portion of the upper surface. The medal payout unit 803 is attached to the mounting portion 841 so that the upper surface of the base member 804 is inclined with respect to the inclined installation surface of the base member 804 at substantially the same angle as the upper surface of the base member 804. The medal payout unit 803 is attached to the mounting portion 841 so as to be removable for maintenance and inspection.

A guide piece 842 is provided on the bottom surface of the base member 804, and is detachably attached by being guided by a guide rail (not shown) provided on the bottom surface of the cabinet 402a (see FIG. 49) of the pachi-slot machine 401. There is. As a result, the hopper device 800 is detachably housed in the cabinet 402a. Further, the base member 804 has an open bottom.

Further, the base member 804 is attached with a foreign matter recovery case 805 for collecting foreign matter discharged from the bucket 802 through a plurality of through holes 834a formed in the mounting plate 834. The foreign matter recovery case 805 is installed so as to face the bottom of the base member 804.

The foreign matter recovery case 805 is formed in a box shape in which the upper surface side, that is, the medal payout unit 803 side is opened. The foreign matter recovery case 805 has a bottom plate portion 805a and a peripheral wall 805b formed on the peripheral edge of the bottom plate portion 805a.

The foreign matter recovery case 805 is provided so as to cover all the openings at the bottom of the base member 804. The foreign matter recovery case 805 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material (light-transmitting resin). The foreign matter recovery case 805 may be made of a colored resin material.

As shown in FIG. 57, the bottom plate portion 805a of the foreign matter recovery case 805 is provided with a substrate case 850 for accommodating a drive substrate 851 (see FIG. 57) described later for the motor 833b. The substrate case 850 is integrally formed with the bottom plate portion 805a of the foreign matter recovery case 805. The substrate case 850 may be configured separately from the foreign matter recovery case 805 and may be attached to the bottom plate portion 805a of the foreign matter recovery case 805.

The substrate case 850 is arranged at a position offset with respect to the region C (the part surrounded by the broken line in FIG. 57) below the through hole 834a (see FIG. 56) of the mounting plate 834.

Specifically, the substrate case 850 is arranged behind the region C (the part surrounded by the broken line in FIG. 57) below the through hole 834a (see FIG. 56) of the mounting plate 834. In the region C below the through hole 834a (see FIG. 56) of the mounting plate 834, foreign matter discharged from the bucket 802 through the plurality of through holes 834a is likely to accumulate.

The substrate case 850 has peripheral walls 850a, 850b, 850c, and 850d erected from the bottom plate portion 805a of the foreign matter recovery case 805, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the substrate case 850 is composed of the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 805a of the foreign matter recovery case 805. That is, the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 805a of the foreign matter recovery case 805 also serves as the bottom surface of the substrate case 850.

The peripheral wall 850d of the board case 850 is formed with an opening 850f for connecting a connector for connecting the connector 851a described later of the drive board 851. In other words, the opening 850f for connecting the connector is provided in the peripheral wall 850d of the peripheral wall of the substrate case 850, which is located on the lower side of the through hole 834a (see FIG. 56) of the mounting plate 834 and is opposite to the peripheral wall 850a. ing.

As shown in FIG. 58, protrusions 850 g protruding inward of the substrate case 850 are formed on the inner surfaces of the peripheral walls 850a, 850b, 850c, and 850d of the substrate case 850. Two protrusions 850g are provided on each of the peripheral walls 850a and 850d, and one protrusion is provided on each of the peripheral walls 850b and 850c. It should be noted that the number of protrusions 850 g provided on any of the peripheral walls is arbitrary, and may be provided at least on the peripheral walls that oppose each other, and may be provided only on the peripheral walls 850a and 850d, for example.

As shown in FIG. 57, the length of the protrusion 850 g in the height direction is set shorter than the height of the peripheral walls 850a, 850b, 850c, and 850d. The protrusions 850g provided on the peripheral walls 850a, 850b, 850c, and 850d each have the same length in the height direction.

A drive substrate 851 is mounted on each protrusion 850 g. Therefore, the drive substrate 851 is placed on each protrusion 850 g and is held by the substrate case 850 at a predetermined height position from the bottom surface of the substrate case 850 (the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 805a).

The drive board 851 is provided with a connector 851a for receiving power and a drive signal from the outside.

In the board case 850, the upper opening 850e is closed by the cover member 852. The board case 850 is attached to the upper surface of the board case 850 by a screw (not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 57 and 59, the cover member 852 includes a flat plate portion 853 that covers the upper opening 850e of the substrate case 850, and an inner wall portion 852a formed so as to project downward from the lower surface of the flat plate portion 853. It has 852b, 852c, and 852d.

The inner wall portion 852d of the cover member 852 has a recess 852e recessed inward at a position overlapping with the connector 851a of the drive board 851. As shown in FIG. 60, an opening 852f corresponding to the height of the connector 851a (see FIG. 57) is formed in the recess 852e of the inner wall portion 852d. When the cover member 852 is attached to the board case 850, the connector 851a (see FIG. 57) is exposed to the outside of the board case 850 from the recess 852e of the inner wall portion 852d.

As shown in FIG. 57, the inner wall portions 852a, 852b, 852c, and 852d of the cover member 852 are configured to be in-row fitted to the inner surface of the substrate case 850. Further, in a state where the cover member 852 is attached to the substrate case 850, the lower ends of the inner wall portions 852a, 852b, 852c, and 852d of the cover member 852 come into contact with or approach the upper surface of the drive substrate 851. There is.

Therefore, the drive substrate 851 is mounted on the protrusions 850 g provided on the peripheral walls 850a, 850b, 850c, and 850d, respectively, and is vertically oriented by the lower ends of the inner wall portions 852a, 852b, 852c, and 852d of the cover member 852. Movement is restricted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, the flat plate portion 853 of the cover member 852 is provided with a canopy portion 854 protruding outward from the upper portion of the opening 850f (see FIG. 57) for connecting a connector.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57, the flat plate portion 853 of the cover member 852 is provided with a hook piece 855 for restraining a harness (not shown) connected to the connector 851a of the drive board 851. The hook piece 855 is integrally formed with the flat plate portion 853 of the cover member 852.

Further, the bottom plate portion 805a of the foreign matter recovery case 805 is provided with a guide piece 856 that engages with the hook piece 855 described above. The guide piece 856 does not necessarily have to be engaged with the hook piece 855 as long as the harness hooked on the hook piece 855 can be regulated so as not to come off. For example, the guide piece 856 may be provided at a predetermined interval with respect to the hook piece 855.

[11-6-1. Actions and effects related to the holding structure of the main control board case]
As described above, in the third gaming machine, a protective member 650 is provided between the rear wall inner surface 402c of the cabinet 402a and the bracket 630, and the bracket 630 is provided via the protective member 650 to the rear wall inner surface of the cabinet 402a. Since it is attached to the 402c, even if an unauthorized device or the like is inserted to access the main control board from the outside of the cabinet 402a, the protective member 650 can be an obstacle. Further, the distance from the outside of the cabinet 402a to the main control board becomes longer by the amount provided with the protective member 650.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the main control board provided in the pachi-slot machine 401 by using an unauthorized device. Further, since the main control board case 601 and the bracket 630 are arranged in front of the rear wall inner surface 402c of the cabinet 402a, the replacement of the main control board case 601 or the bracket 630 can be easily performed as compared with the case where the protective member 650 is not provided. It is also possible to do it.

Further, in the third gaming machine, the area of the facing surface 656 of the protective member 650 facing the main control board case 601 is the facing surface of the main control board case 601 facing the protective member 650 (the back surface of the second member 603). Since it is larger than the area of, the main control board case 601 can be covered with the protective member 650. As a result, the protective member 650 can be an obstacle to unauthorized access to the main control board by using an unauthorized device.

Further, in the third gaming machine, since the thickness of the protective member 650 in the direction from the inner surface 402c of the rear wall of the cabinet 402a toward the main control board case 601 is thicker than the thickness of the main control board case 601 from the outside of the cabinet 402a. The distance to the main control board can be increased.

Further, in the third gaming machine, since the protective member 650 has ribs 670 in a grid pattern, the strength of the protective member 650 can be improved, and the back surface of the bracket 630 (the surface facing the protective member 650) is protected by the protective member 650. The bracket 630 can be stably held.

Further, in the third gaming machine, the protective member 650 is formed in a box shape having an opening 651, and the opening 651 faces the main control board case 601 with the bracket 630 interposed therebetween, and the bottom wall of the protective member 650. The portion 655 is fixed to the inner surface 402c of the rear wall of the cabinet 402a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the back surface of the main control board case 601 from the rear and sides without making the protective member 650 a complicated shape.

Further, in the third gaming machine, the flat plate portion 631 of the bracket 630 has a main control board of the flat plate portion 631 corresponding to a fastening portion for attaching the protective member 650 to the rear wall inner surface 402c of the cabinet 402a by the screw 621. A communication hole 633 that communicates the case 601 side and the protective member 650 side is formed. Therefore, the protective member 650 can be attached to or removed from the rear wall inner surface 402c of the cabinet 402a while the bracket 630 is fixed to the protective member 650. Therefore, the work of attaching and detaching the protective member 650 can be easily performed.

Further, in the third gaming machine, the bracket 630 has a second fastening portion 636 to which the main control board case 601 is fixed, and the second fastening portion 636 is a convex portion protruding from the flat plate portion 631 of the bracket 630. It is provided in 635. Further, the protective member 650 has a main body portion 660 facing the flat plate portion 631 of the bracket 630 and a protruding portion 661 protruding from the main body portion 660, and the position where the protruding portion 661 faces the convex portion 635 of the bracket 630. It is provided in. Therefore, since the protruding portion 661 of the protective member 650 hinders access to the second fastening portion 636, it is possible to prevent the fixation between the first fastening portion 613 and the second fastening portion 636 from being broken from the back surface side. Can be done.

Further, in the third gaming machine, the tubular portion 653 through which the screw 621 for attaching the protective member 650 to the rear wall inner surface 402c of the cabinet 402a is passed is provided integrally with the rib 670, so that the strength of the tubular portion 653 is provided. Can be improved.

Further, since the cylindrical portion 653 is provided integrally with the vertical rib 670A extending in the vertical direction, the main control board case 601, the bracket 630, and the protective member 650 attached to the rear wall inner surface 402c of the cabinet 402a The load can be received by the vertical rib 670A via the tubular portion 653. This makes it possible to prevent the protective member 650 from being deformed.

[11-6-2. Actions and effects related to selectors]
As described above, in the third gaming machine, the second guide passage 712 of the selector 700 is in front of the sub-plate 732 side with respect to the vertical plane V (indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 55 (A)). Since it is tilted, the medal will also be tilted forward. Therefore, when the sub-plate 732 is rotated to open the second guide passage 712, the medal is likely to fall. Therefore, the third gaming machine can easily eject the medals stuck in the guide passage 710 in the selector 700.

Further, in the third gaming machine, in the first guide passage 711 of the selector 700, the passage surface 711a on the sub-plate 732 side is concavely curved toward the front side (opposite side of the selector main body 731 side) of the sub-plate 732. Therefore, the speed of medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 413 (see FIG. 47) can be suppressed. As a result, the inserted medals can be smoothly guided from the first guide passage 711 to the second guide passage 712.

Further, in the third gaming machine, in the first guide passage 711, the passage surface 711a on the sub-plate 732 side below the first guide passage 711 has the same inclination angle as the second guide passage 712. Since it is formed, medals can be smoothly flowed from the first guide passage 711 to the second guide passage 712.

Further, in the third gaming machine, in the first guide passage 711, since the passage surface 711b on the selector main body 731 side is curved convexly toward the sub plate 732 side, the passage surface 711a on the sub plate 732 side. Similarly, the speed of medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 413 (see FIG. 47) can be suppressed.

Further, in the third gaming machine, since the first guide passage 711 is curved so as to be convex toward the sub-plate 732 side, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 413 (see FIG. 47). The speed of the can be further suppressed. As a result, the inserted medals can be smoothly guided from the first guide passage 711 to the second guide passage 712.

Further, in the third gaming machine, the passage surface 711a on the sub-plate 732 side has a larger degree of curvature than the passage surface 711b on the selector body 731 side, so that the inclination angle of the passage surface 711a on the sub-plate 732 side below is set. It becomes easy to adjust to the same inclination angle as the second guide passage 712.

Further, in the third gaming machine, the first guide passage 711 has a shape in which the passage surface 711a on the sub-plate 732 side is uniformly (continuously) curved, whereas the first guide passage 711 is on the selector main body 731 side. Since the flat surface portion 711c is provided in a part of the passage surface 711b, the posture of the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 413 (see FIG. 47) can be stabilized by the flat surface portion 711c.

Further, in the third gaming machine, the selector 700 is provided with a medal detection sensor 715 that detects a medal passing through the second guide passage 712 in the vicinity of the medal exit 720. The medal detection sensor 715 is composed of a photosensor having a light emitting element 716 and a light receiving element 717, and the light emitting element 716 and the light receiving element 717 are arranged so as to face the same direction, and the light emitted from the light emitting element 716 is arranged. It has a reflector 718 that reflects (indicated by a alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 55 (A)) toward the light receiving element 717. Further, the medal detection sensor 715 is configured to detect the medal passing through the second guide passage 712 by blocking the light emitted from the light emitting element 716 by the medal.

According to this medal detection sensor 715, since the light emitting element 716 and the light receiving element 717 are arranged so as to face the same direction, the light emitting element 716 is compared with the configuration in which the light emitting element and the light receiving element are arranged so as to face each other. The thickness in the light emission direction can be suppressed. As a result, the medal detection sensor 715 can be installed even when the space for installing the medal detection sensor 715 is limited in the selector 700.

Further, in the third gaming machine, in the medal detection sensor 715, the light receiving element 717 is arranged on the second guide passage 712, the light emitting element 716 is arranged on the upper part of the second guide passage 712, and the reflector 718 receives light. Since it is arranged in front of the element 717, it can be a medal detection sensor 715 having a compact configuration.

[11-6-2. Actions and effects related to the hopper device]
As described above, in the third gaming machine, the hopper device 800 collects the foreign matter discharged from the bucket 802 through the plurality of through holes 834a formed in the mounting plate 834. The foreign matter recovery case 805 with an open side is installed so as to face the bottom of the base member 804. Therefore, the foreign matter recovery case 805 can prevent foreign matter such as dust discharged from the dust-removing through hole 834a of the hopper device 800 from diffusing.

Further, in the third gaming machine, since the foreign matter recovery case 805 is provided so as to cover all the openings at the bottom of the base member 804, dust and the like discharged from the dust-removing through hole 834a of the hopper device 800 can be removed. In addition to being able to reliably collect the foreign matter, the collected foreign matter can be retained in the hopper device 800.

Further, in the third gaming machine, since the foreign matter recovery case 805 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, it is easy to visually check whether or not there is a recovered foreign matter and the amount of the foreign matter, and it is easy to perform maintenance. Easy to judge.

Further, in the third gaming machine, the bottom plate portion 805a of the foreign matter recovery case 805 is provided with a board case 850 for accommodating the drive board 851 of the motor 833b, so that the foreign matter recovery case 805 can be unitized for convenience. Can be enhanced.

Further, in the third gaming machine, the substrate case 850 is arranged at a position offset with respect to the region C below the through hole 834a of the mounting plate 834 (the portion surrounded by the broken line in FIG. 57). It is possible to prevent foreign matter falling through the through hole 834a from directly falling on the substrate case 850.

Further, in the third gaming machine, the drive substrate 851 is placed on each protrusion 850 g and is held by the substrate case 850 at a predetermined height position from the bottom surface of the substrate case 850 (upper surface of the bottom plate portion 805a). ing. Therefore, it is suitable for heat dissipation of the drive substrate 851, and it is possible to avoid contact with dust, dust, etc. that have fallen on the bottom plate portion 805a of the foreign matter recovery case 805.

Further, in the third gaming machine, since the upper opening 850e of the board case 850 is closed by the cover member 852, foreign matter falling through the through hole 834a, diffused dust, dust, etc. enter the board case 850. It is possible to protect the drive board 851 from these foreign substances, dust, dust and the like.

Further, in the third gaming machine, the drive substrate 851 is placed on the protrusions 850 g provided on the peripheral walls 850a, 850b, 850c, and 850d, respectively, and the inner wall portions 852a, 852b, and 852c of the cover member 852c are mounted. , 852d is configured to restrict vertical movement by the lower end. As a result, the drive board 851 can be fixed to the board case 850 with a simple configuration without requiring a fastening member for fastening or fixing the drive board 851.

Further, in the third gaming machine, the flat plate portion 853 of the cover member 852 is provided with a canopy portion 854 protruding outward from the upper portion of the opening 850f for connecting the connector, so that foreign matter falls through the through hole 834a. It is possible to prevent the diffused dust and dirt from falling on the connector 851a.

Further, in the third gaming machine, the opening 850f for connecting the connector is provided in the peripheral wall 850d of the peripheral wall of the substrate case 850, which is located on the lower side of the through hole 834a of the mounting plate 834 and is opposite to the peripheral wall 850a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter falling through the through hole 834a from entering the substrate case 850 through the opening 850f for connecting the connector.

Further, in the third gaming machine, the flat plate portion 853 of the cover member 852 is provided with a hook piece 855 for restraining a harness (not shown) connected to the connector 851a of the drive board 851. It can be easily restrained together.

Further, since the hook piece 855 is integrally formed with the flat plate portion 853 of the cover member 852, the number of parts can be reduced.

[Specifications of the third interface board IF3 for testing machines]
As shown in FIG. 61, the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order and / or the pressing position of the stop button is different. The second interface board for the testing machine IF2 (302) (hereinafter referred to as the IF2 board) that outputs the test signal related to the instruction information such as The test (testing of the gaming machine at a designated testing institution) is performed using the third interface board IF3 for the testing machine (hereinafter referred to as the IF3 board) that outputs the test signal to the testing machine.

Although the first interface board IF1 (301) for a testing machine (hereinafter referred to as an IF1 substrate) is omitted in FIG. 61, three types of an IF1 substrate, an IF2 substrate, and an IF3 substrate are used for the test.

In the test using the IF3 board, the correct answer pressing order and / or the correct answer pressing position according to the winning combination is followed during the assist time AT, but during the non-AT, the test machine to the actual machine (main board (main control) according to the random order and pressing position. A test in which a stop signal is input to the board 71)), a test in which the push order is fixed in a specific order, but the push position is random, and a test in which a stop signal is input to the actual machine, the push order is random, but the push position is specified. A test is conducted in which a stop signal fixed at a position is input to the actual machine, and a test in which a stop signal that is completely removed against the correct answer pressing order or the correct answer pressing position is input to the actual machine is performed. In addition, among the six instructions for the push order of "left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle left and right", "middle right left", "right left middle", and "right middle left", "left middle right" and "left middle right" during AT. Follow the instructions of "Left / Right / Middle", "Middle / Left / Right", "Middle Right / Left", and "Right / Left / Middle", but "Right / Middle / Left" is the first left reel even during AT because the content of the instruction is not obvious from the instruction display itself. Only when "the content of the instruction is obvious from the display of the instruction itself", the instruction content is obeyed during AT, such as the first stop on the left, and all other games (during AT). Expected value acquired by the most player (expected value calculated by totaling all, instead of calculating the expected value individually depending on the game state) by totaling the games that give instructions other than the instruction of ) Will be lower. A test will be conducted in which the actual machine is input with a stop signal according to the stop order (pressing position is random) (a test of a game method that is most disadvantageous to the player).

As shown in FIG. 61 [A], the specification 1 is an internal winning combination for generating a stop position signal (a signal for specifying a push order and / or a push position) from an actual machine (main board (main control board 71)). Data such as identification information is output to the IF2 board and IF3 board, converted into an IF2 test signal that corresponds to the IF2 test by the CPU of the IF2 board, and output to the tester, and also supports the IF3 test by the CPU of the IF3 board. The data is converted into a test signal to be output to the tester.

In this case, the data output from the actual machine may be one type of data such as the identification information of the internal winning combination, but the test signals output to the testing machine side on each of the IF2 board and the IF3 board are used for the IF2 test and IF3. It is necessary to convert the data for the test, basically it is necessary to prepare different ROM data for the IF2 board and the IF3 board, and it is necessary to specially prepare two types of boards with greatly different specifications for the test. There is. However, the IF2 board and the IF3 board are mounted together on one board, and the IF2 test and the IF3 test are made possible by the switching operation of the DIP switch etc. provided on the board. It is possible to use the IF2,3 common substrate.

In Specification 2, as shown in FIG. 61 [B], the IF2 test signal corresponding to the IF2 test is input to the IF2 board from the actual machine (main board), and the input signal is input to the IF2 board without processing by the CPU. Is output almost as it is just by adjusting the signal level suitable for the testing machine, and the input signal is omitted by adjusting the signal level suitable for the testing machine without processing by the CPU on the IF3 board. It is decided to output as it is, and the actual machine (main board) switches between two signals, the IF2 test signal and the IF3 test signal.

In the case of specification 2, it is necessary to switch between the IF2 output mode that outputs the IF2 test signal and the IF3 output mode that outputs the IF3 test signal in the actual machine, and the capacity of the test program increases, but the IF2 board And the IF3 substrate can be shared with substantially the same one, and it is sufficient to submit two of the same substrates or one substrate as a common substrate to a testing institution, which contributes to economic efficiency. In particular, even if the current IF2 board does not have a CPU, it can be used almost as it is, and the labor for creating a new board can be greatly reduced.

The IF2 output mode that outputs the IF2 test signal and the IF3 output mode that outputs the IF3 test signal are set values each time the reset switch, which originally functions as a setting change button, is pressed during setting confirmation by operating the setting key. Is switched as it is, and by the decimal display of the dot part of the 7-segment LED for setting value display, which is configured by diverting the dedicated payout number display or credit display to be mounted on the main board, for example. If the dot part is off, it can be distinguished from the IF2 output mode, and if the dot part is on, it can be distinguished from the IF3 output mode.

Switching between the IF2 output mode and the IF3 output mode can be operated by the manufacturer of the gaming machine and the staff of the testing institution, for example, by operating a dedicated changeover switch provided on the main board, and if the player cannot operate it. , Various modified specifications can be applied.

[Suggestion of settings using the number of elapsed games and the total number of games]
This modification makes it possible to change the value of the setting indicating the degree of advantage for the player. Specifically, for example, the winning probability in the internal lottery, in which the internal winning combination (combination of the winning, winning flag, and conditional device) is determined by a random number for the internal lottery having a numerical range of 0 to 65535, is the most disadvantageous to the player. From the low-probability setting 1 to the most advantageous high-probability setting 6, a plurality of stages, for example, 6 stages can be changed by the game hall staff mainly outside business hours.

Further, as one of the effects under the control of the sub CPU 201, the value of the setting transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the player who plays the game during the business hours under the control of the sub CPU 201 is not the numerical value itself. It is possible to perform a predetermined setting suggestion effect that is predicted with a definite or a predetermined reliability by a predetermined effect mode corresponding to a numerical value.

The setting suggestion effect is a value set for the player by changing the display of a specific image, item, character, background color, etc., or by outputting a specific music, dialogue, message, etc. that replaces or accompanies the specific image, item, character, background color, etc. To predict. For example, setting 1 is a blue crown, setting 2 is a green crown, setting 3 is a yellow crown, setting 4 is a red crown, setting 5 is a golden crown, setting 6 is a rainbow-colored crown, and so on. The color of the item suggests the setting.

In addition to deterministically informing the value of the setting, setting 2 or more, setting 1, 3, 5 odd setting, setting 2, 4, 6 even setting, setting 4 or more high setting, setting 5 or 6 Ambiguous notifications such as extra-high settings may be displayed instead of definitive notifications. In addition, it may be said that a definite notification may be issued at a fixed rate, or an ambiguous notification may be issued.

In addition, the total number of games from the predetermined reference time in the gaming machine (specific one gaming machine), for example, the total number of games consumed after the power is turned on from the power off, and the specific one in the gaming machine. It is possible to count the number of consecutive elapsed games by the player.

The total number of games of the gaming machine is counted by a counter (counter on the sub RAM 203) under the control of the sub CPU 201, which is incremented by 1 for each game after the power is turned on. In addition, the predetermined reference time may be set based on other factors such as the business start time and the time arbitrarily set by the amusement park before the start of business.

The number of elapsed games by one player is to be grasped by using an information providing service such as "Unimemo" operated by the applicant, which is linked with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone owned by the individual player. After the login operation of the player who uses the service and until the logout operation is performed, the counting is performed by the counter under the control of the sub CPU 201 (counter on the sub RAM 203), which is incremented by 1 for each game.

To start Unimemo, open the Unimemo app from the player's personal smartphone that downloaded the Unimemo app, and select Issuing a password on the Unimemo app. Next, the gaming machine is provided by touch operation or switch operation from the effect display unit 22 (see FIG. 1) that functions as a touch panel provided in the gaming machine, or a cross key switch separately provided in place of or in combination with the effect display unit 22. Open the menu (user menu) on the effect display device such as a liquid crystal display, select "Unimemo" → "Enter password", and enter the password issued by the virtual keyboard etc. displayed on the effect display device. , When "OK" is displayed, the login is successful. After this, the game is started.

Or, depending on the model, open the Unimemo app on your smartphone, open the menu of the gaming machine, select "Unimemo" → "Start", and change the QR code (registered trademark) displayed on the gaming machine to the QR of the Unimemo app. Read it with a reader to access the URL of Unimemo, and if the accessed page is displayed on the smartphone, the login is successful.

To log out, open the menu of the gaming machine, select "Unimemo" → "Record and exit", and read the QR code (registered trademark) displayed on the gaming machine with the QR reader of the Unimemo app. If you access the URL and the accessed page is displayed on your smartphone, you have successfully logged out.

On your smartphone, you can check your game record at any time using the Unimemo app. In the middle of the game, if you open the menu on the gaming machine and select "Unimemo"-> "View intermediate recording", you can see the recording on the gaming machine.

Even if you are not a user of an information providing service such as "Unimemo", you can display the menu screen of the gaming machine at the start of the game and select a simple login operation, etc. to check the number of games since the selection. It may be counted as the number of games.

In addition, the replacement of players by the game hall staff is visually monitored, and after the previous player has left, the internal switch etc. is used during disinfection work of the start lever, stop button, switches, etc. and table maintenance work such as confirmation of lost items. Only the number of elapsed games may be initialized to 0, and the number of elapsed games may be counted from 0 games in the later games played by the player.

In this way, the total number of games and the number of elapsed games are counted, and the probability of executing the setting suggestion effect is changed according to the combination of the two different variables as in the following specific example.

Specifically, when the total number of games approaches the upper limit preset by the operation of the game hall staff, for example, the upper limit of the number of games (total number of rotations) expected within business hours or one business hour, it is far. The probability of executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than in the case. At the same time, even if the total number of games is the same, when the number of elapsed games is large, the probability of executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the total number of games is small.

As shown in FIG. 62, the business hours can be set by the game hall staff mainly from the hall menu displayed on the effect display unit 21 (see FIG. 1) under the control of the sub CPU 102, mainly outside the business hours. The hall menu task for controlling the hall menu is performed by interrupt processing of the sub CPU 102 every predetermined cycle, for example, 33 msec.

When the sub CPU 102 detects that the setting key has been turned from off to on by the transmission command from the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 102 displays a hall menu screen on the effect display unit 21 and displays a selectable hall menu together with the current date and time. indicate.

Select [Business Hours Setting] from the hall menu by touch operation or switch operation from the effect display unit 22 (see Fig. 1) that functions as a touch panel, or a cross key switch provided separately in place of or in combination with this. do.

This selection will take you to the Business Hours Settings screen where you can enter your business hours. For example, in the case of opening at 10 am and closing at 10 pm, enter 12:00 from the selection items to be listed. Instead of inputting the business hours, the opening time and the closing time may be input. Further, instead of inputting the time and time, the upper limit of the number of games (total number of rotations) expected within one business hour may be directly input.

The 12-hour business hours are 43,200 seconds, and if you continue to play games without a break due to the minimum game interval of 4.1 seconds, you will be able to play about 10500 games, but such cases are extremely rare. , A maximum of about 8000 games is a realistic upper limit. Therefore, in the case of 12-hour business, the upper limit of the number of games is set to, for example, 8000 games as internal information under the control of the sub CPU 201.

On the day of replacement of new machines, if the new machines are opened at 1:00 pm and closed at 10:00 pm, the actual business hours will be 9 hours, and the upper limit of the number of games will be set to, for example, 6000 games. If the new platform is open at 4:00 pm and closed at 10:00 pm, the actual business hours will be 6 hours, and the upper limit of the number of games will be set to, for example, 4000 games. If the new platform is open at 7:00 pm and closed at 10:00 pm, the actual business hours will be 3 hours, and the upper limit of the number of games will be set to 2000 games, for example.

That is, the upper limit of the number of games is set by the formula of business hours × 8000/12. However, when the solution is less than 2000 games, it is preferable to set it to 2000 games, for example. If the business hours exceed 12 hours, the upper limit of the number of games may be set to a value exceeding 8000 games, or may be fixed to 8000 games.

In addition, the upper limit of 8000 games during 12-hour business hours may be changed arbitrarily on the game hall side in consideration of the skill level, age group, gender, regional differences, etc. of the main players who visit the store, and the business hours may be changed. The upper limit of the number of games may be input by a hall menu or the like different from the input.

As shown in FIG. 63, when the upper limit is set to 8000 games, when the total number of games reaches 8000 games, the setting is suggested with a probability of 1 in the 8000 game arrival games regardless of the total number of games at the start of the logged-in game. Perform 100% of the production. However, as an exception, if the total number of games at the start of the logged-in game exceeds a predetermined value, for example, 7,000 games, and the store is about to close, even if 8,000 games can be reached by the time the store closes, the setting suggestion effect is not executed. I am doing it.

Further, for example, when the total number of games is less than a predetermined value, for example, 4000 games, the setting suggestion effect is not executed with a probability of 0. In addition, the total number of games is 1/16 for 4000 game arrival games, 1/8 probability for 5000 game arrival games, 1/4 probability for 6000 game arrival games, 1/2 probability for 7000 game arrival games, and so on. The closer to the upper limit of 8000 games, the higher the probability of executing the setting suggestion effect.

The total number of games in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed may be reduced from 4000 games to 3000 games, 2000 games, or the like, or may be larger than 4000 games.

After the power is turned on, the total number of games is increased by 1 for each game digested, but if no one uses the information providing service, the number of elapsed games is maintained at 0. In this case, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the total number of games reaches 8000 games, but the setting suggestion effect is not executed even if the total number of games reaches 4000, 5000, 6000, and 7000 games. This is because it is no different from the one that simply executes the setting suggestion effect according to the total number of games.

In addition, even if the total number of games reaches 4000, 5000, 6000, and 7000 without adding 1 to the number of elapsed games, the player at the time of reaching does not use the information providing service, so the setting suggestion effect is produced. I try not to do it.

When the setting suggestion effect is executed, whether or not the execution is executed is determined by using, for example, a 1-byte random number having a probability denominator 256 defined in the sub CPU 201.

Even if the setting suggestion effect by reaching the total number of games is not executed, the setting suggestion effect may be executed with a predetermined probability triggered by a bonus, AT, or the like. In addition, the setting suggestion effect by reaching the total number of games may be used in combination with the setting suggestion effect triggered by a bonus, AT, or the like throughout the entire game period.

Furthermore, even if the total number of games is the same, the total number of games logged in by a specific player at the start of the game is relatively young, and when the number of elapsed games in the total number of games is large, the setting suggestion effect is executed rather than when it is small. It enables games with a high probability of playing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 63, even if the total number of games reaches the same 5000 games, if the total number of games is 3001 to 4000, the game is started by logging in to the information providing service. 128, 1/64 for 2001-3000 games, 1/32 for 1001-2000 games, 1/16 for 101-1000 games, 0-100 games. In the case of 1/8, etc., the total number of games at the start of the logged-in game is relatively young, and when the number of elapsed games in the total number of games is large, the probability of executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when it is small. It enables high-quality games. In addition, when the information providing service is logged in and the game is started by the total number of games from 0 to 100, the total number of games reached 4000 games, 5000 games, 6000 games, and 7000 games, respectively. The setting suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/16, 1/8, 1/4, and 1/2, but if the game is started by logging in after the total number of games has advanced, the total at the time of starting the logged-in game. According to the number of games (the number of games at the time of login), the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect is generally reduced. However, it does not prevent the reversal of some probabilities. For new players who sit on a sticky platform until the number of possible games exceeds 4000 and log in to the total number of games 4001 to 5000, the probability of reaching the total number of games 6000 is the total number of games. The probability of logging in to 1001 to 2000, 2001 to 3000, and 3001 to 4000 games is increased to 1/8, for example, to promote the operation of the game machine after the evening.

Further, for example, when the total number of games has already reached 6000 games at the time of login, the setting suggestion effect is not performed when the total number of games reaches 6000 games, and even if the total number of games reaches 7000 games, the number of elapsed games of the player is not performed. Is relatively small, 1000 games, so when the total number of games is 0 to 100, the setting suggestion effect should be executed with a lower probability, for example, 1/4, instead of the probability of 1/2 when logging in. ing.

As a result, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to continue the tenacious game, increase the operating rate of the game machine until the store closes, and the person who takes over the game after the total number of games is accumulated by another person is another person. It is possible to effectively prevent the act of riding free on the achievements, and it is possible to properly link to the setting suggestion production mainly by the game achievements of only the person himself, and the fairness of the game can be enhanced.

Since the upper limit of 8000 games can be arbitrarily changed from the hall menu on the playground side, the upper limit number of games can be set low or conversely high, and the player is informed that the maximum number of games is low. It is also possible to add strength to the setting suggestion effect depending on the business form, such as appealing and increasing the motivation to play.

[Suggestion of setting with a roll corresponding to the character customized with Unimemo]
In this modification, as shown in FIG. 64, a total of 10 types of symbols of lip 1, lip 2, bell 1, bell 2, blank, watermelon, blue 7, cherry, red 7, and BAR are arranged with symbol position numbers 0 to 19. It is equipped with a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R arranged in correspondence with the above, and based on the internal winning combination and the player's stop operation, the rotating reel is stopped and a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed. .. The effective line is one line in the middle row, and the specified number (number of sheets to be input) is always three.

The internal winning combination is a replaying combination by the normal rip REP01 in which rips 1 or 2 are aligned in the middle stage, and the operation of "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" or "red 7"-"BAR"-"BAR". A bonus role by a big bonus BB composed of a bonus continuous operation device related to a first-class special bonus that is activated by displaying a combination of symbols, and a first-class special that is drawn during a general game (BB general) during BB operation. Includes a shift role by the character RB.

As shown in FIG. 65, the following 1] to 7] are included in the small winning combination with the payout of medals.
1] The same game result when the 12-card combination NML01 is played incorrectly due to the failure of the second stop by the number priority control that preferentially draws in the symbol corresponding to the combination of the symbols that has the largest number of medals to be paid out when the right middle right push order is correct. NML08 is a 1-card combination NML08 by priority control that preferentially pulls in the symbol with the largest number of symbol types corresponding to the combination of symbols, and MML10 is a 1-card combination MML10 by number priority control when an incorrect answer is made due to the first stop failure. Push order bell LCR to win a prize.

2] 12-card combination NML02 by number priority control when the push order in the left and right is correct, 1-sheet combination NML09 by number priority control when the answer is incorrect due to the second stop failure, and 1 by the number priority control when the answer is incorrect due to the first stop failure. Push order bell LRC to win each prize of MML10.

3] 12-card combination NML03 by number priority control when the middle and left push order is correct, 1-card combination NML08 by number priority control when incorrect answer due to second stop failure, 1 by number priority control when incorrect answer due to 1st stop failure Push-order bell CLR that wins each of the MML11 cards.

4] 12-card combination NML04 by number priority control when the middle right and left push order is correct, 1-card combination NML08 by number priority control when incorrect answer due to 2nd stop failure, 1 by number priority control when incorrect answer due to 1st stop failure Push order bell CRL that makes each winning piece MML11 win.

5] 12-card combination NML05 by number priority control when the push order in the middle right and left is correct, 1-sheet combination NML09 by number priority control when the answer is incorrect due to the second stop failure, and 1 by the number priority control when the answer is incorrect due to the first stop failure. Push order bell RLC that makes each winning piece MML10 win.

6] Right, middle, left push order: 12-card combination NML06 by number priority control when correct answer, 1-card combination NML10 by number priority control when incorrect answer due to second stop failure, number priority control when incorrect answer due to 1st stop failure Push order bell RCL that wins each prize of 1-card role MML08.

7] Common bell NML07 that pays out 5 medals regardless of the order of pressing.

As shown in FIG. 66, the small roles accompanied by the payout of medals include the following rare roles 1 to 3 of 8] to 10].
8] A rare role 1 watermelon NML18 that pays out 5 medals by winning a prize with a display probability of 1.
9] Rare role 2 Cherry NML19 with a display probability of 1 and paying out the same 5 medals.

10] NML07, NML18, and NML19 with a display probability of 1 are overlapped and won, and in the case of the left first stop in which the left reel 3L is stopped first, the common bell NML07 is stopped first, and the middle reel 3C is stopped first. The acquisition performance of the game medium, in which the cherry NML19 is awarded in the case of one stop and the watermelon NML18 is awarded in the case of the first right stop in which the right reel 3R is stopped first, and five medals are paid out in each case. Rare role 3 special bell (NML07 + 18 + 19), which is positioned as a special role with no difference in.

During the non-winning of the assist time AT in the advantageous section that enables the notification of the instruction information regarding the stop operation, when the rare role of any of the watermelon NML18, cherry NML19, and special bell NML07 + 18 + 19 is won, it is extracted separately from the random number for internal lottery. For example, a two-step lottery using a 1-byte random number (0 to 255) determines whether or not the assist time AT is correct and whether or not the chance zone CZ with an increased probability of winning the AT is successful. In addition, during the winning of the AT and during the operation of the AT, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous games of the AT is added, and whether or not the special zone with an increased probability of addition is applied.

From the normal section to the advantageous section, for example, it is assumed that the game shifts from the next game of the winning game of all small roles.

The BB middle role 1 and the BB middle role 2 are the roles to be drawn only during the RB operation during the BB operation, and the BB middle role 1 duplicately wins and pushes NML01 to 07 and NML18,19 other than the one-card combination. Any 12-card combination NML01 to 06 is won regardless of the order, and the BB middle role 2 wins the 1-card combination NML08 to 11 in duplicate, and any one-card combination is won regardless of the pushing order.

As shown in FIG. 67, the gaming state is "normally in general" due to the infinite replay time RT0 with the lowest probability of replaying 8978/65536 ≈ 1 / 7.3, and the BB is won at this RT0 and the BB is won in the winning game. Includes "inside BB" that carries over the BB winning flag that shifts when the combination of operating symbols is not displayed, and "in operation of BB" that shifts by displaying the combination of BB operating symbols.

"BB operating" is a prize for "BB general middle" during a general game during BB operation, which is entered by displaying a combination of BB operating symbols, and a first-class special bonus RB for a shift role drawn during BB general. However, the combination of RB operation symbols "Blank"-"Blue 7"-"Blank" is transferred by avoiding the display of the RB winning flag. The transition is made by displaying the combination of the above, and the player returns to the general BB by satisfying the RB operation end condition in which the earlier of the predetermined number of times, for example, 8 winnings or the predetermined number of times, for example, 12 times, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. It has "RB operating" in the accessory operating state.

In this modification, even if the AT is shifted to "BB in operation" when the winning of AT is not decided, "BB in operation" is added to AT, CZ, and the winning of rare roles 1, 2, and 3. Etc. will not be drawn. For this reason, basically, the player stays "inside the BB" and plays the game expected to win the AT.

As shown in FIG. 68, in the case of using Unimemo to log in to an information providing service such as "Unimemo" and play a game during AT, that is, while AT is operating based on the winning of AT (hereinafter referred to as "Unimemo"). However, even if you do not use Unimemo to play a game without logging in (hereinafter referred to as "No Unimemo"), the corresponding correct answer pressing order is subordinated when the push order bell LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL is won. Notification is performed by the display navigation on the display device 11 on the side and the voice navigation from the speaker. Therefore, 12 medals can be easily obtained.

If there is a uni-memo during AT, depending on the production element selected under the use of uni-memo, specifically, the type of character on the production display customized from multiple characters, the acquisition performance will be increased when the special bell is won. As a part of the effect performed only on the sub CPU 201 side which does not affect the effect, a predetermined navigation, that is, a display navigation on the effect display 21 and a voice navigation from the built-in speaker are output. In addition, even if the character selection itself is possible even under the use of Unimemo, the character selected under the use of Unimemo will be taken over under the use of Unimemo, and the navigation according to the selected character will be displayed under the use of Unimemo. Often, even in this case, it corresponds to "the effect element can be selected based on the operation of the player who uses the predetermined information providing service".

For example, if you select character A (character A) wearing a yellow costume with the image of yellow bell pattern, if you win a special bell during AT with uni-memo, you will win NML07 along with the cut-in of character A. The display navigation (button-compatible navigation "1,-,-") corresponding to the left first stop is displayed on the effect display unit 21, and the "right" voice navigation is output.

Also, if you select Character B (Character B) wearing a red costume with the image of the red color of the cherry pattern, if you win a special bell during AT with Unimemo, you will win NML19 along with the cut-in of Character B. The display navigation (button-compatible navigation "-, 1,-") corresponding to the first stop in the middle is displayed on the effect display unit 21, and the voice navigation of "middle" is output.

Furthermore, if you select Character C (Character C) wearing a green costume with the image of the green color of the watermelon pattern, if you win a special bell during AT with Unimemo, you will win NML18 along with the cut-in of Character C. The display navigation (button-compatible navigation "-,-, 1") corresponding to the first right stop is displayed on the effect display unit 21, and the "right" voice navigation is output.

Even if you are logged in to "Unimemo", neither the display navigation nor the voice navigation will be displayed even if you win the special bell during non-AT.

Also, if you do not select a character even if you are logged in to "Unimemo", for example, it is assumed that the default character A (Character A) is selected, and during AT with Unimemo, a special bell If you win, the display navigation (button-compatible navigation "1,-,-") corresponding to the left first stop that wins NML07 will be displayed on the production display unit 21 along with the cut-in of character A, and the "left" Put out voice navigation.

As shown in FIG. 69, the special bell (F_rare role 3 special bell) has a lottery value of 170 in setting 1 and a lottery value of 1500 in setting 6. The higher the setting, the larger the lottery value, and the lower the setting, the higher the lottery value. The difference due to the setting, which is small, is secured relatively large.

Therefore, if there is a uni-memo, the cut-in of the selected character, the corresponding first stop navigation, and the combination of the displayed symbols (stop roll) are selected depending on whether the special bell has a high winning frequency or a low setting. As a result, it is relatively easy to know, and the privilege that makes it easy to guess the setting can be linked to the stop result and the like and can be felt.

For watermelon (F_rare role 1 watermelon) and cherry (F_rare role 2 cherry), the lottery value is slightly larger as the setting is higher, and the lottery value is slightly smaller as the setting is lower. There is.

As shown in FIG. 70, when there is a uni-memo, the player can open the second page of the game history at the time of log-out or in the middle of the game, and can know the number of winnings for each winning combination. You can know the winning probability of the special bell (number of winning special bells / number of elapsed games). It should be noted that the probability itself for each winning combination may not be displayed on the screen, but the number of winnings and the number of elapsed games for each winning combination may be displayed on the screen.

Therefore, it is possible not only to discriminate the setting based on the experience based on the frequency of the first stop navigation during the game, but also to discriminate the setting numerically from the game result. The probability of each winning combination can be known by the player from the game machine strategy magazine, the game machine information site, and the like.

On the other hand, if there is no uni-memo, even if you win a special bell during AT, the first stop navigation, the character cut-in will not be issued, and the voice navigation will be done as well as the common bell (F_common bell). Not issued.

The common bell (F_common bell) has a lottery value of 1500 in setting 1 and a lottery value of 100 in setting 6. The higher the setting, the smaller the lottery value, and the lower the setting, the larger the lottery value, which is the opposite of the special bell. The setting difference is provided so that the value obtained by adding the lottery values of the common bell and the special bell does not have a large setting difference.

For this reason, in the case of no uni-memo, when there is no navigation during AT, it is thought that the left first stop, which is the most operable and has been the standard way of hitting since ancient times, is considered, and even when the special bell is hit. The same NML07 symbol combination is displayed even when the common bell is won. Therefore, it is not possible to distinguish between the winning of the special bell and the winning of the common bell, and it is difficult to guess the setting. Moreover, unlike the case with Unimemo, it is not possible to know the number of winnings of the special bell at the time of logout or during the game, and it is not possible to determine the numerical setting.

In this modification, for a player without a uni-memo, "If you do a uni-memo, it will be more fun" or "If you do a uni-memo, the setting will be suggested" to the effect display unit 21 at the appropriate timing during AT or throughout the game. We are trying to promote the use of uni-memo by sending messages such as "Is it advantageous for you?"

However, since the medal acquisition performance does not change when the special bell is won, with or without uni-memo, it does not hinder the fairness and fairness of the game, and the navigation when the special bell is won is put out as part of the production. It is possible to achieve the desired purpose without squeezing the program capacity on the main side that controls the progress of the game.

Even if there is no uni-memo, when the special bell is won, the left first stop navigation and / or the character's cut-in may be issued. It is possible to provide a game that does not make you feel uncomfortable.

In the above, the setting difference of the winning probability of the special bell is secured to be relatively large, but a relatively small setting difference may be added, such as a rare role 1 watermelon and a rare role 2 cherry. Further, the special role may be composed of a small role, a replaying role, or an out-of-order equivalent role (a lottery corresponding to an unjustified lottery).
In addition, at least two types of characters, a first character and a second character, may be selectable when using Unimemo, and as shown in FIG. 68, a bell (NML07), a cherry (NML19), and a watermelon (NML18) can be selected. ), When the combination of 3 types of symbols can be displayed according to the push order, there is no navigation when not using Unimemo, the cherry is displayed when the first character is selected, and the watermelon when the second character is selected. May be displayed in the push order navigation.
Alternatively, the selection under the use of Unimemo may be to select a production element with a character that a specific character appears and a production element without a character that a specific character does not appear, and as shown in FIG. 68, the bell (NML07), When a combination of three types of symbols can be displayed according to the pressing order, such as cherry (NML19) and watermelon (NML18), there is no navigation when not using unimemo, and there is a character when using unimemo. When selecting the displayed push order navigation or the characterless production element under the use of Unimemo, the push order navigation in which the watermelon is displayed may be displayed.
Furthermore, when the common bell (NML07 in Fig. 65) is won under AT, if there is a uni-memo, the same push order navigation as when the special bell is won is displayed without the character cut-in, and even if there is no uni-memo, the special bell The same navigation as the left first stop navigation, etc., which is to be issued at the time of winning, may be output.
In addition, multiple types of special roles are defined, for example, special bell 1 and special bell 2, and if the selected character is character A, setting suggestions can be made if the special bell 1 is won. Navi is issued, but if the special bell 2 is won, the character-compatible navigation is not issued, and if the selected character is character B, the setting is suggested regardless of whether the special bell 1 is won or the special bell 2 is won. It may be possible to put out a character-compatible navigation system that enables.
Furthermore, even when Unimemo is not used, it is possible to select a character from a narrow selection range, and when Unimemo is used, a character can be selected from a wider selection range, and character A can be selected even when Unimemo is not used. , Character B may be selectable only when using Unimemo, and when character B is selected, a navigation system that can display cherries and the like different from those when character A is selected may be displayed.
Furthermore, the effect elements that can be selected under the use of Unimemo are not limited to those on the effect display displayed on the effect display 21, and may be the lighting mode of the display lamp, the music output from the built-in speaker, the sound effect, and the like.

[Countermeasures against light leakage in rear-projection movable screens]
In the modified example shown in FIG. 71, an effect display means 900 using a rear projection (rear projector) movable screen, which is controlled by the sub CPU 201, is provided.

The effect display means 900 directs the projection means 91 by the projector 90 for image light projection arranged behind the upper door mechanism UD and the image light projected from the projection means 91 to the projected surface on the front side to the player. A display means 92 including a plurality of movable screens 9L, 9C, 9R that can be displayed on the image display surface 901 as an effect image is included.

The movable screens 9L, 9C, and 9R displace the image display surface 901 into a [A] valley shape, a [B] planar shape, and a [C] chevron shape. The front of the image display surface 901 is covered with a front decorative plate 902 based on transparency by an acrylic plate or the like, and the player cannot touch the internal structure including the display means 92 and the projection means 91.

The projection means 91 may be arranged on the upper portion of the display means 92 and may project the image light from behind the display means 92 by one or a plurality of plane mirrors or curved mirrors that reflect and reflect.

As shown in FIGS. 72 to 75, the display means 92 receives the image light projected from one projection means 91 from the rear side, for example, the first display means 921 by the medium movable screen 9C, for example, the left movable screen 9L and /. Alternatively, it has at least a second display means 922 by the right movable screen 9R.

The first display means 921 and the second display means 922 may be a left-right split type, a vertical split type, a diagonal split type, or the like. In addition to the three-sided structure, a two-sided structure or a four-sided or more structure may be used.

Each screen 9L, 9C, 9R includes a screen sheet 9S for a rear projector using a blue ocean sheet or the like that shows image light incident from the back side from the front side, and a front cover 92F and an upper cover 92U formed of a transparent acrylic member or the like. It is held by a screen cover 920 made of a lower cover 92D.

Each upper cover 92U is provided with a pair of interlocking legs 94 interlocked with the drive means 93 described later. The lower cover 92D of the medium movable screen 9C is provided with a pair of convex portions 96 composed of rollers 960 that are received in the first guide groove 951 that is linear in the front-rear direction and is provided in the lower pedestal plate 95 (see FIG. 77). The lower cover 92D of the left movable screen 9L and the right movable screen 9R is provided with one convex portion 96 composed of a roller 960 that receives the second guide groove 952 that is linear in the left-right direction on the lower pedestal plate 95.

As shown in FIG. 72, the upper and lower frame portions of the screen sheet 9S are attached to the back surface of the front cover 92F of the screen cover 920 by double-sided tape TP, and as shown in FIG. 74, the attached surface is made inconspicuous on the front side bezel sheet 923. Is pasted.

The upper cover 92U and the lower cover 92D are provided with a convex portion 924 for positioning the screen sheet 9S, and a concave portion 925 is provided at a corresponding portion of the screen sheet 9S so that the screen sheet 9S can be attached to the screen cover 920 without misalignment. ..

The screen sheet 9S may be configured to hold the screen sheet 9S by inserting it from the side or the like by providing an insertion groove or the like on the top and bottom of the screen cover 920, regardless of the attachment by the double-sided tape. In that case, an opening / closing mechanism is provided at the insertion port of the screen sheet 9S to fix the screen sheet 9S, and after the screen sheet 9S is inserted, the screen sheet 9S is prevented from coming off due to the operation of the screen. It may be fixed by surrounding the four sides of the screen and not fixed by the double-sided tape TP. In this case, in order to prevent the screen sheet 9S from expanding due to temperature change and bending due to expansion and contraction, it is desirable to design the mechanism with a certain operating allowable range. Further, in this case, since the convex portion 924 and the concave portion 925 for positioning may hinder the insertion of the screen sheet 9S, the configuration may be such that they are excluded.

Further, the screen sheet 9S may be sandwiched from the front and back by a flat plate-shaped screen cover so as to have a three-layer structure of a cover, a screen sheet, and a cover in the depth direction. In these cases, neither double-sided tape nor bezel sheet can be required. Further, the front cover 92F may be formed of a material having the role of the screen sheet 9S to further reduce the number of members. Also in this configuration, it is possible to take measures against bending of the screen sheet 9S in the same manner as described above.

As shown in FIG. 76, the first display means 921 and the second display means 922 have an adjacent side 926 which is a side adjacent to the other display means, and the screen sheet 9S and the front cover 92F in the first display means 921. The first adjacent side 9261 constituting the end edge of the second display means 922 has a first protrusion 927 on which the projected surface side of the back surface projects with respect to the second display means 922, and the end of the front cover 92F in the second display means 922. The second adjacent side 9262 constituting the portion edge has a second protruding portion 928 on which the front image display surface 901 side projects with respect to the first display means 921.

The first display means 921 and the second display means 922 are arranged without contact with each other via a predetermined space formed between the first protrusion 927 and the second protrusion 928. The predetermined space is refracted in a shape in which the light (image light) projected from the projection means 91 does not leak directly to the front side of each display means 921,922.

That is, the first protruding portion 927 and the second protruding portion 928 face each other so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction, but are arranged in a non-contact state, and even if the display means 921 and 922 are relatively displaced, they are adjacent to each other. It prevents the light (image light) from the projection means 91 from directly leaking forward through the gap of the abutting portion of the 926.

This alleviates the discontinuity of brightness and shading due to the adjacent portion of the screen, and reduces the feeling of image separation and the like.

Laser, sandblast, and printing are applied to at least a part of the second protrusion 928, that is, all or part of the front surface 928F, the back surface 928B, the side surface 928E, the upper surface surface 928U, and the lower surface surface 928D, that is, the back surface 928B. Non-flat processing such as embossing using the above is performed, and the non-flat portion 9280 by this processing causes the brightness and shading of the image on the image display surface side of the portion where the first and second protrusions 927 and 928 overlap each other. It is possible to project a natural image with increased continuity in a pseudo manner without making the discontinuity of the laser stand out.

As shown in FIG. 77, an upper pedestal plate 98 having a plurality of openings 981,982,983,984,985 symmetrically arranged is arranged on the upper part of each screen 9L, 9C, 9R.

Further, on the upper part, a first link 971 that is displaced in conjunction with the drive mechanism 93 and a symmetrical second link 972 (972L, 972R) that is freely rotatably connected to the first link by a joint portion 970 are arranged. is doing. The joint portion 970 places the central axis in the gap portion where the edge portions of the screen sheets 9S on the adjacent movable screens face each other.

On the left side of the upper pedestal plate 98, a first opening 981 that allows linear movement of the connecting leg 94 on the left side of the medium movable screen 9C and an end roller 9700 of the joint portion 970 are received to smoothly guide the linear movement of the front and rear. The second opening 982, the third opening 983, which allows the left connecting leg 94 on the right side of the left movable screen 9L to move back and forth while moving left and right, and the left connecting leg 94 on the left side of the left movable screen 9L. A fourth opening 984 that allows movement and a fifth opening 985 that smoothly guides the left-right linear movement by receiving the end roller 9730 of the protrusion 973 as a free end are provided. The protruding portion 973 as a free end is substantially coaxial with the convex portion 96 provided at the lower part of the left movable screen 9L.

On the right side of the upper pedestal plate 98, a first opening 981 that allows linear movement of the connecting leg 94 on the right side of the medium movable screen 9C and an end roller 9700 of the joint portion 970 are received to smoothly guide the linear movement of the front and rear. The second opening 982 and the right connecting leg 94 on the right side of the right movable screen 9R are allowed to move back and forth while moving left and right. A fourth opening 984 that allows movement and a fifth opening 985 that smoothly guides the left-right linear movement by receiving the end roller 9730 of the protrusion 973 as a free end are provided. The protruding portion 973 as a free end is substantially coaxial with the convex portion 96 provided at the lower part of the right movable screen 9R.

As shown in FIG. 78, the upper part of the first link 971 and the second link 972 is provided with a driving means 93 for displacing the display means 92.

The drive means 93 includes a motor 93M including a stepping motor and the like, a first gear 931 and a second gear 932, a third gear 933, and a fourth gear 934 linked to a gear 930 directly connected to the shaft thereof, and the rotation of the motor 93M. Power is transmitted in the order of the first gear 931, the second gear 932, the third gear 933, and the fourth gear 934.

As shown in FIG. 79, the third gear 933 has a two-stage gear structure consisting of a small-diameter upper gear 933U and a large-diameter lower gear 933D, and receives power from the second gear 933 by the upper gear 933U to receive power from the second gear 933D. Power is transmitted to the 4th gear 934.

Three sensors 9343, 9344, 9345 (3 sensors 9343, 9344, 9345) are provided with detection pieces 9341, 9342 for a pair of sensors at positions displaced 90 degrees on the upper surface of the fourth gear 934 and supported by being displaced 90 degrees from each other toward the stationary member side. The rotation position is grasped by the detection status of (see FIG. 78). That is, it has two detection pieces for three sensors, and manages the rotation position on the sub CPU side depending on which sensor detects the detection piece. Specifically, when the detection piece is detected by the sensors 9343 and 9344, it is grasped that the rotation position corresponds to the planar shape, and when the detection piece is detected by the sensors 9344 and 9345. , It is grasped that the rotation position corresponds to the valley shape, and when the detection piece is detected only by the sensor 9343, it is grasped that the rotation position corresponds to the chevron shape.

As shown in FIG. 80, the lower gear 933D and the fourth gear 934 in the third gear 933 are formed to have the same diameter (the same number of teeth), and are symmetrical on each bottom surface of the fourth gear 934 and the lower gear 933D. A pair of convex portions 95L and 95R each having a freely rotatable roller 950 are provided at various positions. Due to the rotation of the third gear 933 and the fourth gear 934, the left and right convex portions 95L and 95R move back and forth in the depth direction while drawing an arc.

As shown in FIG. 81, the first link 971 moves the middle movable screen 9C back and forth in parallel, and the pair of receiving holes 9710 and 9710 provided in the link 971 are connected to the connecting legs 94 of the middle movable screen 9C. In addition to accepting 94, the left and right convex portions 95L and 95R provided in the fourth gear 934 and the third gear 933 (lower gear 933D) are accepted in the pair of left and right guide grooves 97L and 96R made of rectangular grooves.

The first link 971 and the medium movable screen 9C move back and forth while keeping the image display surface 901 parallel to each other due to the movement of the convex portions 95L and 95R back and forth by the rotation of the gears 933 and 934. The guide grooves 96L and 96R are longer in the lateral direction than the diameter of the roller 95 in order to allow the convex portions 95L and 95R to move in an arc.

The second link 972, which is composed of the left link 972L and the right link 972R, swings following the translation of the first link 971 in the front-rear direction, and has a pair of receiving holes 9720 and 9720 in the left and right links 972L and 972R. The connecting legs 94 and 94 of the left movable screen 9L and the connecting legs 94 and 94 of the right movable screen 9R are received respectively.

As shown in FIG. 82, due to the swing of the second link 972 (972L, 972R) following the forward / backward movement of the first link 971, the left and right movable screens 9L and 9R have the central axis of the joint portion 970 and the adjacent side 926. Can be smoothly changed to a valley shape, a plane shape, or a chevron shape with a parallel medium movable screen 9C sandwiched in the middle without blurring, depending on the image and / or sound effect. It is possible to provide the player with a powerful production.

In FIG. 82, the posture changing states of the valley shape, the plane, and the chevron of each screen 9L, 9C, and 9R are superimposed and drawn. It can also be positioned at any position between the plane and the valley, and between the plane and the chevron. In that case, the position is not managed by detecting the three sensors 9343, 9344, 9345, but the position can be finely managed by managing the motor by the number of steps.

As an effect, the medium movable screen 7C can be continuously moved back and forth to alternately repeat the mountain shape and the valley shape, or the effect of rattling and shaking can be achieved.
Further, as an example of the effect, the screen shape can be switched at the same time as the game state (effect state) is switched, and the screen shape suitable for the projected image can be maintained according to the game state (effect state).
Further, it is also conceivable to operate in a plurality of modes in a continuous production for determining whether or not to give a privilege such as an AT or a bonus advantageous to the player, and to use it in a mode that arouses the player's expectations. In this case, it is conceivable to set the screen operation effect pattern in the continuous effect in advance for each continuous effect, and switch to the next mode by the player's operation to start the next game. Further, if the next game start operation is not detected even though the effect pattern is executed, a specific screen operation effect pattern may be repeatedly executed (loop operation), or in the final state of the effect pattern. You may try to maintain it. In the case of looping, if the player's next game start operation is not detected even after a certain period of time has elapsed, it is determined that the player is away from the seat, and the loop operation can be stopped. The time until the stop can be set arbitrarily, but it is the period until the so-called "demo release" that interrupts the production and starts the demo production according to the non-operation time of the player, which is set for each gaming machine. It is possible to unify them.
In the above-mentioned effect mode, it is conceivable to set a screen operation effect pattern according to the image projected on the screen in advance, but the effect mode is not limited to them. For example, it is possible to accept the operation of the effect button by the player at a specific timing in the specific screen operation effect pattern, and it is also possible to operate the screen according to the operation.

As shown in FIG. 83, the medium movable screen 9C may be displaced diagonally. For example, the 3rd gear 933 and the 4th gear 934 are not interfered with each other, and a motor is also provided on the 4th gear 934 side to control them separately, while the left movable screen 9L and the middle movable screen 9C are continuous in a valley. , The right movable screen 9R and the middle movable screen 9C may enable an N-shaped posture or the like continuous in a mountain.

In this case, the upper and lower pedestal plates 95 and 98 are opened with a first guide groove along an arc having a certain width to allow the diagonal posture of the medium movable screen 7C, and the left movable screen 9L and the right movable screen 9L are opened. A long second guide groove that accepts a relatively large lateral displacement of the screen 9R may be opened.

In FIG. 83, the plane postures of the screens 9L, 9C, and 9R and the N-type postures are superimposed and drawn. The left movable screen 9L and the middle movable screen 9C can be made continuous in a mountain, and the right movable screen 9R and the middle movable screen 9C can be made continuous in a valley in an inverted N-shaped posture.

In the present embodiment, the projector 90 is arranged on the back surface of the screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a type that projects an image from a projector arranged on the front surface of the screen can also be diverted.
In this case, it is not necessary to perform grain processing on the protruding part on the front side, and by providing a protruding part made of the same material as the screen, the screen operates and the image is projected on the entire surface without making the seams stand out. Will be possible.

In the present embodiment, the convex portion 96, the joint portion 970, the protrusion portion 973, and the convex portions 95L and 95R are provided with rollers, but if the convex portion 96, the joint portion 970, the protrusion portion 95L, and the 95R are provided with a member that can move smoothly with respect to the guide groove or the like, It may not be provided with a roller.

<Additional Notes>
In a conventional gaming machine, a substrate case composed of a base body for accommodating a circuit board and a cover body is fixed to a movable base rotatably attached to a housing of the gaming machine. Has been proposed to.

However, in such a gaming machine, since the board case is only fixed to the inner wall on the back side of the housing of the gaming machine via the movable base, an illegal instrument is used from the back side of the housing with respect to the circuit board. There was a problem that there was a risk of unauthorized access.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing unauthorized access to a circuit board provided in a gaming machine by using an unauthorized instrument. With the goal.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

<< First invention >>
A board case containing a circuit board and
A holding member that holds the substrate case and
A gaming machine including a box-shaped member for fixing the holding member.
<< Second invention >>
The box-shaped member is provided between the mounting portion of the gaming machine and the holding member.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the holding member is attached to the attachment portion via the box-shaped member.
<< Third invention >>
The box-shaped member has a facing surface facing the substrate case and has a facing surface.
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the area of the facing surface of the box-shaped member is larger than the area of the facing surface of the substrate case facing the box-shaped member.
<< Fourth invention >>
The gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the box-shaped member has a thickness in a direction from the mounting portion toward the substrate case, which is thicker than the thickness of the substrate case.
<< Fifth Invention >>
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein the color of the box-shaped member is different from the color of the substrate case.
<< Sixth Invention >>
The box-shaped member is composed of colored members.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 5, wherein the substrate case and the holding member are made of colorless members.
<< Seventh Invention >>
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 6, wherein the box-shaped member has ribs in a grid pattern.
<< Eighth Invention >>
The box-shaped member has an opening and has an opening.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 7, wherein the opening faces the substrate case and the bottom wall portion of the box-shaped member is fixed to the mounting portion. ..
<< Ninth invention >>
The holding member has a flat plate portion for holding the substrate case.
In the flat plate portion, a communication hole for communicating the substrate case side and the box-shaped member side of the flat plate portion is formed corresponding to the fastening portion for attaching the box-shaped member to the mounting portion by the fastening member. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 8, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
<< 10th invention >>
The holding member has a fastening portion to which the substrate case is fastened.
The fastening portion is provided on a convex portion protruding from the flat plate portion of the holding member.
The box-shaped member is
The main body of the holding member facing the flat plate and
It has a protruding portion protruding from the main body portion, and has.
The gaming machine according to claim 9, wherein the protruding portion is provided at a position facing the convex portion of the holding member.
<< 11th invention >>
The box-shaped member is erected on the bottom wall portion and has a cylindrical portion through which a fastening member for attaching the box-shaped member to the mounting portion is passed.
The box-shaped member has ribs in a grid pattern and has ribs.
The gaming machine according to claim 8, wherein the tubular portion is provided integrally with the rib.
<< 12th invention >>
The gaming machine according to claim 11, wherein the tubular portion is provided integrally with a rib extending in the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the circuit board provided in the gaming machine by using an unauthorized device. Further, since the board case and the holding member are arranged in front of the mounting portion of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily replace the board case or the holding member as compared with the case where there is no box-shaped member.

In a conventional game machine, when a medal jam occurs in the medal passage in the medal selector, the medal return device opens the medal passage in response to the operation of the medal return button, so that the medal stuck in the medal passage is inserted into the shoot. A method of dropping the medal and returning it to the medal tray is proposed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-89939.

However, in such a game machine, among the medal passages in the medal selector, a medal passage that can be opened by the medal return device is configured, and the guide surface facing the medal return device is vertical, so that the medals are clogged in the medal passage. There was a problem that it might be difficult to discharge.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily ejecting medals clogged in a guide passage in a selector.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

<< First invention >>
It is a gaming machine equipped with a selector that sorts medals inserted into the medal slot.
The selector is
A selector body in which a guide passage for guiding medals is formed in the selector, and
It has a plate member that constitutes the guide passage and can open the guide passage.
The guide passage is
The first guide passage on the medal slot side and
It has a second guide passage on the exit side of the selector, and has.
The second guide passage is configured to eject the medal downward when opened by the plate member.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second guide passage is tilted forward toward the plate member with respect to a vertical surface.
<< Second invention >>
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first guide passage has a passage surface on the plate member side curved in a concave shape toward the front surface side of the plate member.
<< Third invention >>
The first guide passage is bent downward and connected to the second guide passage.
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the passage surface on the plate member side below the first guide passage is formed so as to have the same inclination angle as the second guide passage.
<< Fourth invention >>
The first guide passage according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the passage surface on the selector main body side is curved in a convex shape toward the plate member side. Gaming machine.
<< Fifth Invention >>
The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the first guide passage has a flat surface portion on a part of the passage surface on the selector main body side.
<< Sixth Invention >>
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first guide passage is curved so as to be convex toward the plate member side.
<< Seventh Invention >>
The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the first guide passage has a greater degree of curvature on the passage surface on the plate member side than on the passage surface on the selector main body side.
<< Eighth Invention >>
A medal detecting means for detecting a medal passing through the second guide passage is provided in the vicinity of the exit of the selector.
The medal detecting means is
It is composed of a photo sensor having a light emitting element and a light receiving element.
The light emitting element and the light receiving element are arranged so as to face the same direction, and have a reflector that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting element toward the light receiving element.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the medal blocks the light emitted from the light emitting element to detect the medal passing through the second guide passage.
<< Ninth invention >>
The light receiving element is arranged on the second guide passage, and the light receiving element is arranged on the second guide passage.
The light emitting element is arranged in the upper part of the second guide passage.
The gaming machine according to claim 8, wherein the reflector is arranged in front of the light receiving element.
<< 10th invention >>
The gaming machine according to claim 9, wherein the light receiving element receives light emitted from the light emitting element and reflected by the reflector from diagonally above the light receiving surface.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to easily eject the medals stuck in the guide passage in the selector.

In a conventional gaming machine, as a measure against dust in the hopper device for paying out medals inside the housing, the support plate of the rotating plate for sending out medals inside the hopper device is provided with a hole for removing dust. It is proposed in JP-A-10721.

However, in such a gaming machine, foreign matter such as dust discharged from the dust removing hole of the hopper device is electrically collected or diffused on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the housing in which the hopper device is installed. There was a problem that it could cause troubles.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing foreign matter such as dust discharged from a dust removing hole of a hopper device from diffusing. The purpose.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

<< First invention >>
A bucket that can store game media and
A rotating member that receives and sequentially conveys the game medium stored in the bucket, and
A motor that rotates the rotating member and
The mounting plate on which the rotating member is mounted and
It has a base member that supports the bucket and the above-mentioned mounting plate and is detachably attached to the housing of the gaming machine.
A gaming machine provided with a hopper device that discharges the gaming medium from a payout port to the outside by rotating the rotating member.
The hopper device is a gaming machine including a foreign matter collecting case for collecting foreign matter that has entered the bucket.
<< Second invention >>
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the foreign matter recovery case is installed so as to face the bottom of the base member.
<< Third invention >>
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the foreign matter recovery case is made of a transparent member.
<< Fourth invention >>
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the foreign matter recovery case is provided so as to cover all the openings at the bottom of the base member.
<< Fifth Invention >>
The hopper device further includes a driving board for the motor.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the foreign matter recovery case is provided with a substrate case for accommodating the driving substrate.
<< Sixth Invention >>
The above-mentioned mounting plate is formed with a through hole penetrating the mounting surface on which the rotating member is mounted and the back surface of the previously described mounting plate.
The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the substrate case is arranged at a position offset with respect to the lower portion of the through hole.
<< Seventh Invention >>
The substrate case has a plurality of protrusions on the inner surface of the peripheral wall.
According to claim 5 or 6, the drive substrate is mounted on the plurality of protrusions and is held by the substrate case at a predetermined height position from the bottom surface of the substrate case. The described gaming machine.
<< Eighth Invention >>
The gaming machine according to claim 7, wherein the substrate case has an upper opening closed by a cover member.
<< Ninth invention >>
The cover member is
A flat plate portion that covers the upper opening of the substrate case and
It has an inner wall portion formed so as to project downward from the lower surface of the flat plate portion, and has.
The inner wall portion is configured to be in-row fitted to the inner surface of the substrate case.
The gaming machine according to claim 8, wherein the drive board is restricted from moving in the vertical direction by the lower end of the inner wall portion while being mounted on the plurality of protrusions.
<< 10th invention >>
An opening for connecting a connector of the drive board is provided in a part of the peripheral wall of the board case.
The gaming machine according to claim 9, wherein the flat plate portion of the cover member is provided with a canopy portion protruding outward from the upper portion of the opening for connecting the connector.
<< 11th invention >>
The gaming machine according to claim 10, wherein the opening for connecting the connector is provided in the peripheral wall of the peripheral wall of the substrate case, which is opposite to the peripheral wall located on the lower side of the through hole.
<< 12th invention >>
The cover member is provided with a hook piece for restraining the harness connected to the connector of the drive board.
The foreign matter recovery case is provided with a guide piece that engages with the hook piece.
The gaming machine according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the hook piece is integrally formed with the flat plate portion of the cover member.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust discharged from the dust removing hole of the hopper device from diffusing.

[Fourth game machine]
Conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-10461, the setting indicating the degree of advantage for the player is internally set for the six stages from the setting 1 having the lowest probability to the setting 6 having the highest probability. There is known a gaming machine that can be changed and performs a setting suggestion effect that is a hint of a set value internally set for the player.

By the way, the player wants to come into contact with the setting suggestion effect at the earliest possible stage from the start of the game, and if this is realized, it is preferable to obtain useful material for judging whether or not the game can be continued later. If it becomes clear at an early stage that the setting is low, there is a risk that the operation of subsequent gaming machines will decline, which is a disadvantage. Therefore, the larger the total number of games counted from the opening of the store, the higher the probability that the setting suggestion effect will be executed, and if the setting suggestion effect is not issued at an early stage after the opening of the store, the interests of both the player and the amusement park will be improved. It seems that it can be adjusted.

However, if this is done, a considerable amount of time has passed since the store opened, and after confirming that the total number of games has advanced considerably by the table itself or the data display on the table, etc., the person who will take over the game However, there is a possibility that the fairness or fairness of the game may be hindered because the profit that the setting suggestion effect is likely to be produced may be freed by the game performance of the previous player.

The fourth pachinko / pachislot machine was invented in view of such a point, and has the interests of both the player and the pachinko / pachislot machine regarding the setting suggestion effect without impairing the fairness or fairness of the game. The challenge is to provide a gaming machine that can be adjusted well.

In order to solve the above problems, a gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

In a gaming machine that enables a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value that indicates the degree of advantage for the player.
It is possible to count the total number of games from a predetermined reference time (for example, when the power is turned on) of the gaming machine and the number of consecutive elapsed games by one player in the gaming machine.
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of executing the setting suggestion effect can be changed according to the total number of games and the number of elapsed games.
As a result, not only the total number of games from the predetermined reference time of the gaming machine but also the probability of executing the setting suggestion effect according to the number of consecutive elapsed games by one player in the gaming machine is changed. The number of games progressed by the player can be reflected in the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

In the above gaming machines
Even if the total number of games is the same, when the number of elapsed games is large, it is possible to play a game with a higher probability of executing the setting suggestion effect than when the total number of games is small.
As a result, the free-riding act of the previous player's game record can be effectively suppressed, and the fairness or fairness of the game can be further enhanced.

In addition, in each of the above gaming machines,
When the total number of games approaches a predetermined upper limit, the probability of executing the setting suggestion effect is increased as compared with the case where the total number of games approaches a predetermined upper limit.
The predetermined upper limit can be changed by the operation of the game hall staff.
As a result, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to continue playing the game persistently, and it is also possible to flexibly respond to the sales strategy of the game hall side.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of satisfactorily adjusting the interests of both the player and the playing field with respect to the setting suggestion effect without impairing the fairness or fairness of the gaming.

[Fifth gaming machine]
Conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-11790, a player who logs in to a predetermined information providing service linked with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone and plays a game is displayed a moving image on a liquid crystal display or the like. There is known a gaming machine that makes it possible to select a character and check the number of winnings for each internal winning combination.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional one, when there is a setting difference (difference in probability due to setting) in the winning probability of the internal winning combination, the setting can be estimated by obtaining the winning probability by dividing the number of winnings by the number of digested games. However, despite the complexity of the player's operation including login and logout, there is no particular relationship between the setting suggestion and the selected character, and there are few elements that attract the player's interest during the game, and there is room for improvement.

The fifth gaming machine was invented in view of such a point, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can further arouse the interest of the player during the game in connection with the player operation. ..

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

In a gaming machine in which production elements (for example, characters, etc.) can be selected based on the operation of a player who uses a predetermined information providing service.
The internal winning combination includes a special winning combination (for example, a special bell or the like) in which the winning probability differs depending on the setting and the combination of different symbols is stopped according to the mode of the stop operation.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the special role is won, the player who uses the information providing service is notified of the mode of the stop operation corresponding to the selected effect element.

As a result, when the special role is won, the player who uses the information providing service is informed of the mode of the stop operation corresponding to the selected effect element. As a result, the combination of symbols corresponding to the selected effect element can be stopped, the player can know the winning of the special role, and the setting can be inferred from the frequency of winning the special role. On the other hand, a player who does not use the information providing service cannot infer the setting associated with such an effect element.

In the above gaming machines
The effect element is composed of a character on the effect display corresponding to a combination of symbols that can be stopped at the time of winning the special role.
As a result, the winning of the special role can be strongly impressed on the player by stopping the combination of the symbols corresponding to the character, and the game fun is further enhanced.
In each of the above gaming machines
The special role has the same acquisition performance of the game medium regardless of the combination of the displayed symbols.
As a result, the navigation at the time of winning the special role can be put out as a part of the production, and the intended purpose can be achieved without squeezing the program capacity on the main side that controls the progress of the game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can further arouse the interest of the player during the game in relation to the player operation.

[Sixth gaming machine]
Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known in which an image is projected from the back of the screen by a projector onto a screen provided in the gaming machine to produce an effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-35066).

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost, increase the size of the display screen, and perform an effective effect as compared with the case of using a liquid crystal display.

By the way, in recent gaming machines, a plurality of display screens are used in combination to enable displacement such as relative movement, posture change, time difference vibration, etc., and the display screen is appropriately displaced according to the effect to enjoy the game. There are an increasing number of things that enhance.

However, in a game machine that emits images from the back of the screen by a projector, when multiple screens are movably juxtaposed, in order to prevent interference between the movable screens and ensure smooth movement. It becomes necessary to provide a certain gap between the screens, and the light of the projector leaks from this gap to the front of the screen, which may cause discomfort to the player playing the game at the position facing the projector and the screen. I was worried.

The sixth gaming machine was invented in view of these points, and even when a plurality of screens are movably juxtaposed, light does not leak forward through the gaps between the screens. , It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of allowing a player to play a game comfortably.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine having the following configuration can be provided.

A projection means that projects light (for example, a projector 90, etc.) and
A plurality of display means (for example, a plurality of movable screens 9L, 9C, 9R, etc.) capable of displaying the light projected from the projection means onto the projected surface as an image on the image display surface, and
A driving means for displacing the display means (for example, a driving means 93, etc.) and
Equipped with
The plurality of display means are arranged on the front side of the projection means, and a first display means (for example, a medium movable screen 9C or the like) and a second display means (for example, a medium movable screen 9C or the like) to project light from the common projection means (for example). For example, it has at least a left movable screen 9L and / or a right movable screen 9R).
The first display means and the second display means are arranged adjacent to each other in a displaceable manner in conjunction with the drive of the drive means, and each of the display means is adjacent to the other display means. Has adjacent edges (eg, adjacent edges 926, etc.) that are
The adjacent side of the first display means has a first projecting portion (for example, a first projecting portion 927 or the like) whose projected surface side projects with respect to the second display means.
The adjacent side of the second display means has a second protrusion (for example, a second protrusion 928 or the like) whose image display surface side projects with respect to the first display means.
Each of the display means is a gaming machine characterized in that the first protruding portion and the second protruding portion are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the projection means from directly leaking to the front surface, and it is possible to alleviate the discontinuity of brightness and shading due to the adjacent portions of the first display means and the second display means.

In the above gaming machines
The first display means and the second display means are arranged without contact with each other via a predetermined space formed from the first protrusion and the second protrusion.
The predetermined space is characterized in that the light projected from the projection means is refracted in a shape that does not directly leak to the front side of the display means.
As a result, it is possible to more effectively prevent the light from the projector from leaking directly to the front surface, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of separation due to the adjacent portion of the display means.

In addition, in each of the above gaming machines,
At least a part of the second protruding portion is characterized in that the surface is subjected to non-flat processing (for example, texture processing or the like).
As a result, it is possible to project a pseudo image by making the image display surface side of the portion where the first and second protrusions overlap each other non-flat.

According to the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine capable of allowing a player to comfortably play a game without leaking light forward through a gap between the screens even when a plurality of screens are movably juxtaposed. can do.

1,401 Pachislot machine (game machine)
402a Cabinet 402b Front door 403L, 403C, 403R Reel 404L, 404C, 404R Display window 409 Door body 413 Medal slot 414 MAX Bet button 415 1 Bet button 416 Start lever 417L, 417C, 417R Stop button 418 Main control Board case (board case)
602 1st member 603 2nd member 612 1st sealing part 613 1st fastening part 616 2nd sealing part 617 Hook part 620 Screw 621 Screw (fastening member)
630 bracket (holding member)
631 Flat plate part 632 Through hole 633 Communication hole 635 Convex part 636 Second fastening part (fastening part)
637 Engagement hole 650 Protective member (box-shaped member)
651 Opening 652 Fastening hole 653 Cylindrical part 655 Bottom wall part 656 Facing surface (facing surface of protective member)
660 Main body 661 Protruding part 670 Rib 670A Vertical rib 670B Horizontal rib 700 Selector 710 Guide passage 711 First guide passage 711a Passage surface (passage surface on the plate member side)
711b Passage surface (passage surface on the selector body side)
711c Flat surface 712 Second guide passage 712a Opening 715 Medal detection sensor (medal detection means)
716 Light emitting element 717 Light receiving element 718 Reflector 719 Sensor housing 720 Medal outlet 731 Selector body 731a, 731b, 731c, 731d Pin member 732 Sub plate (plate member)
735 Medal entrance 739 Select plate 740 Medal pressure 742 Cancel shooter 745 After medal pressure 746 Select plate medal stopper 750 Bracket 751 Screw hole 753 Slope 753a Guideway 755 Engagement hole 757 Engagement member 759a Rotating piece 760a Equipment 802 Bucket 803 Medal payout unit 804 Base member 805 Foreign matter collection case 805a Bottom plate part 805b Peripheral wall 821 Top end opening 822a, 822b, 822c, 822d Side wall 823 Bucket main body 824 Medal collision part 827,827 Mounting base 821
831b bulge 831d medal receiving hole 832 cover 833 unit body 833b motor 833c motor output shaft 834 mounting plate 834a through hole 835 disk rotation shaft 841 mounting part 850 board case 850a, 850b, 850c, 850d opening Opening for connector connection)
850g protrusion 851 drive board 851a connector 852 cover member 852a, 852b, 852c, 852d inner wall part 852e recess 852f opening 853 flat plate part 854 eaves part 855 hook piece 856 guide piece 21; effect display 90; projector, 91;
9L, 9C, 9R; Movable screen, 92; Display means 93; Drive means 93
926; adjacent side 927; first protrusion, 928; second protrusion

Claims (1)

A bucket that can store game media and
A rotating member that receives and sequentially conveys the game medium stored in the bucket, and
A motor that rotates the rotating member and
The mounting plate on which the rotating member is mounted and
It has a base member that supports the bucket and the above-mentioned mounting plate and is detachably attached to the housing of the gaming machine.
A gaming machine provided with a hopper device that discharges the gaming medium from a payout port to the outside by rotating the rotating member.
The above-mentioned mounting plate is formed with a through hole penetrating the mounting surface on which the rotating member is mounted and the back surface of the previously described mounting plate.
The hopper device is
A foreign matter recovery case installed so as to face the bottom of the base member,
Further having a substrate involved in driving the motor,
The foreign matter recovery case is provided with a board case for accommodating the board.
The substrate case has a plurality of protrusions on the inner surface of the peripheral wall.
By placing the substrate on the plurality of protrusions, the substrate is held by the substrate case at a predetermined height position from the bottom surface of the substrate case.
In the substrate case, the upper opening is closed by a cover member, and the substrate case is closed.
The cover member is
A flat plate portion that covers the upper opening of the substrate case and
It has an inner wall portion formed so as to project downward from the lower surface of the flat plate portion, and has.
The inner wall portion is configured to be located inside the inner surface of the substrate case.
The substrate is placed on the plurality of protrusions, and its movement in the vertical direction is restricted by the lower end of the inner wall portion.
A recess for connecting a connector of the board is provided in a part of the peripheral wall of the board case.
The flat plate portion of the cover member is provided with a canopy portion protruding outward from the upper portion of the recess for connecting the connector.
The recess for connecting the connector is provided on the peripheral wall of the substrate case, which is opposite to the peripheral wall located on the lower side of the through hole.
The cover member is provided with a hook piece for restraining the harness connected to the connector of the board.
The foreign matter recovery case is provided with guide pieces at predetermined intervals with respect to the hook pieces.
A gaming machine characterized in that the hook piece is integrally formed with the flat plate portion of the cover member.

Images